2.3 Since m is not a prime, it can be factored as the product of two integers a and b,
m = a · b
with 1 < a, b < m. It is clear that both a and b are in the set {1, 2, · · · , m − 1}. It follows
from the deﬁnition of modulom multiplication that
a b = 0.
Since 0 is not an element in the set {1, 2, · · · , m−1}, the set is not closed under the modulom
multiplication and hence can not be a group.
2.5 It follows from Problem 2.3 that, if m is not a prime, the set {1, 2, · · · , m− 1} can not be a
group under the modulom multiplication. Consequently, the set {0, 1, 2, · · · , m−1} can not
be a ﬁeld under the modulom addition and multiplication.
2.7 First we note that the set of sums of unit element contains the zero element 0. For any 1 ≤
< λ,
i=1
1 +
λ−
i=1
1 =
λ
i=1
1 = 0.
Hence every sum has an inverse with respect to the addition operation of the ﬁeld GF(q). Since
the sums are elements in GF(q), they must satisfy the associative and commutative laws with
respect to the addition operation of GF(q). Therefore, the sums form a commutative group
under the addition of GF(q).
Next we note that the sums contain the unit element 1 of GF(q). For each nonzero sum
i=1
1
with 1 ≤ < λ, we want to show it has a multiplicative inverse with respect to the multipli
cation operation of GF(q). Since λ is prime, and λ are relatively prime and there exist two
1
integers a and b such that
a · + b · λ = 1, (1)
where a and λ are also relatively prime. Dividing a by λ, we obtain
a = kλ + r with 0 ≤ r < λ. (2)
Since a and λ are relatively prime, r = 0. Hence
1 ≤ r < λ
Combining (1) and (2), we have
· r = −(b + k) · λ + 1
Consider
i=1
1 ·
r
i=1
1 =
·r
i=1
1 =
−(b+k)·λ
i=1
+1
= (
λ
i=1
1)(
−(b+k)
i=1
1) + 1
= 0 + 1 = 1.
Hence, every nonzero sumhas an inverse with respect to the multiplication operation of GF(q).
Since the nonzero sums are elements of GF(q), they obey the associative and commutative
laws with respect to the multiplication of GF(q). Also the sums satisfy the distributive law.
As a result, the sums form a ﬁeld, a subﬁeld of GF(q).
2.8 Consider the ﬁnite ﬁeld GF(q). Let n be the maximum order of the nonzero elements of GF(q)
and let α be an element of order n. It follows from Theorem 2.9 that n divides q −1, i.e.
q −1 = k · n.
Thus n ≤ q − 1. Let β be any other nonzero element in GF(q) and let e be the order of β.
2
Suppose that e does not divide n. Let (n, e) be the greatest common factor of n and e. Then
e/(n, e) and n are relatively prime. Consider the element
β
(n,e)
This element has order e/(n, e). The element
αβ
(n,e)
has order ne/(n, e) which is greater than n. This contradicts the fact that n is the maximum
order of nonzero elements in GF(q). Hence e must divide n. Therefore, the order of each
nonzero element of GF(q) is a factor of n. This implies that each nonzero element of GF(q)
is a root of the polynomial
X
n
−1.
Consequently, q −1 ≤ n. Since n ≤ q −1 (by Theorem 2.9), we must have
n = q −1.
Thus the maximum order of nonzero elements in GF(q) is q1. The elements of order q − 1
are then primitive elements.
2.11 (a) Suppose that f(X) is irreducible but its reciprocal f
∗
(X) is not. Then
f
∗
(X) = a(X) · b(X)
where the degrees of a(X) and b(X) are nonzero. Let k and m be the degrees of a(X) and
b(X) respectivly. Clearly, k + m = n. Since the reciprocal of f
∗
(X) is f(X),
f(X) = X
n
f
∗
(
1
X
) = X
k
a(
1
X
) · X
m
b(
1
X
).
This says that f(X) is not irreducible and is a contradiction to the hypothesis. Hence f
∗
(X)
must be irreducible. Similarly, we can prove that if f
∗
(X) is irreducible, f(X) is also
irreducible. Consequently, f
∗
(X) is irreducible if and only if f(X) is irreducible.
3
(b) Suppose that f(X) is primitive but f
∗
(X) is not. Then there exists a positive integer k less
than 2
n
−1 such that f
∗
(X) divides X
k
+ 1. Let
X
k
+ 1 = f
∗
(X)q(X).
Taking the reciprocals of both sides of the above equality, we have
X
k
+ 1 = X
k
f
∗
(
1
X
)q(
1
X
)
= X
n
f
∗
(
1
X
) · X
k−n
q(
1
X
)
= f(X) · X
k−n
q(
1
X
).
This implies that f(X) divides X
k
+ 1 with k < 2
n
− 1. This is a contradiction to the
hypothesis that f(X) is primitive. Hencef
∗
(X) must be also primitive. Similarly, if f
∗
(X) is
primitive, f(X) must also be primitive. Consequently f
∗
(X) is primitive if and only if f(X)
is primitive.
2.15 We only need to show that β, β
2
, · · · , β
2
e−1
are distinct. Suppose that
β
2
i
= β
2
j
for 0 ≤ i, j < e and i < j. Then,
(β
2
j−i
−1
)
2
i
= 1.
Since the order β is a factor of 2
m
−1, it must be odd. For (β
2
j−i
−1
)
2
i
= 1, we must have
β
2
j−i
−1
= 1.
Since both i and j are less than e, j − i < e. This is contradiction to the fact that the e is the
smallest nonnegative integer such that
β
2
e
−1
= 1.
4
Hence β
2
i
= β
2
j
for 0 ≤ i, j < e.
2.16 Let n
be the order of β
2
i
. Then
(β
2
i
)
n
= 1
Hence
(β
n
)
2
i
= 1. (1)
Since the order n of β is odd, n and 2
i
are relatively prime. From(1), we see that n divides n
and
n
= kn. (2)
Now consider
(β
2
i
)
n
= (β
n
)
2
i
= 1
This implies that n
(the order of β
2
i
) divides n. Hence
n = n
(3)
From (2) and (3), we conclude that
n
= n.
2.20 Note that c · v = c · (0+v) = c · 0+c · v. Adding −(c · v) to both sides of the above equality,
we have
c · v + [−(c · v)] = c · 0 + c · v + [−(c · v)]
0 = c · 0 +0.
Since 0 is the additive identity of the vector space, we then have
c · 0 = 0.
2.21 Note that 0 · v = 0. Then for any c in F,
(−c + c) · v = 0
5
(−c) · v + c · v = 0.
Hence (−c) · v is the additive inverse of c · v, i.e.
−(c · v) = (−c) · v (1)
Since c · 0 = 0 (problem 2.20),
c · (−v +v) = 0
c · (−v) + c · v = 0.
Hence c · (−v) is the additive inverse of c · v, i.e.
−(c · v) = c · (−v) (2)
From (1) and (2), we obtain
−(c · v) = (−c) · v = c · (−v)
2.22 By Theorem 2.22, S is a subspace if (i) for any u and v in S, u + v is in S and (ii) for any c
in F and u in S, c · u is in S. The ﬁrst condition is now given, we only have to show that the
second condition is implied by the ﬁrst condition for F = GF(2). Let u be any element in S.
It follows from the given condition that
u +u = 0
is also in S. Let c be an element in GF(2). Then, for any u in S,
c · u =
0 for c = 0
u for c = 1
Clearly c · u is also in S. Hence S is a subspace.
2.24 If the elements of GF(2
m
) are represented by mtuples over GF(2), the proof that GF(2
m
) is
6
a vector space over GF(2) is then straightforward.
2.27 Let u and v be any two elements in S
1
∩ S
2
. It is clear the u and v are elements in S
1
, and u
and v are elements in S
2
. Since S
1
and S
2
are subspaces,
u +v ∈ S
1
and
u +v ∈ S
2
.
Hence,u + v is in S
1
∩ S
2
. Now let x be any vector in S
1
∩ S
2
. Then x ∈ S
1
, and x ∈ S
2
.
Again, since S
1
and S
2
are subspaces, for any c in the ﬁeld F, c · x is in S
1
and also in S
2
.
Hence c · v is in the intersection, S
1
∩ S
2
. It follows from Theorem 2.22 that S
1
∩ S
2
is a
subspace.
7
Chapter 3
3.1 The generator and paritycheck matrices are:
G =
0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1
H =
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
From the paritycheck matrix we see that each column contains odd number of ones, and no
two columns are alike. Thus no two columns sum to zero and any three columns sum to a 4
tuple with odd number of ones. However, the ﬁrst, the second, the third and the sixth columns
sum to zero. Therefore, the minimum distance of the code is 4.
3.4 (a) The matrix H
1
is an (n−k+1)×(n+1) matrix. First we note that the n−k rows of Hare
linearly independent. It is clear that the ﬁrst (n−k) rows of H
1
are also linearly independent.
The last row of H
1
has a
1
at its ﬁrst position but other rows of H
1
have a
0
at their ﬁrst
position. Any linear combination including the last row of H
1
will never yield a zero vector.
Thus all the rows of H
1
are linearly independent. Hence the row space of H
1
has dimension
n − k + 1. The dimension of its null space, C
1
, is then equal to
dim(C
1
) = (n + 1) − (n − k + 1) = k
Hence C
1
is an (n + 1, k) linear code.
(b) Note that the last row of H
1
is an allone vector. The inner product of a vector with odd
weight and the allone vector is
1
. Hence, for any odd weight vector v,
v · H
T
1
= 0
and v cannot be a code word in C
1
. Therefore, C
1
consists of only evenweight code words.
(c) Let v be a code word in C. Then v · H
T
= 0. Extend v by adding a digit v
∞
to its left.
8
This results in a vector of n + 1 digits,
v
1
= (v
∞
, v) = (v
∞
, v
0
, v
1
, · · · , v
n−1
).
For v
1
to be a vector in C
1
, we must require that
v
1
H
T
1
= 0.
First we note that the inner product of v
1
with any of the ﬁrst n−k rows of H
1
is 0. The inner
product of v
1
with the last row of H
1
is
v
∞
+ v
0
+ v
1
+ · · · + v
n−1
.
For this sum to be zero, we must require that v
∞
= 1 if the vector v has odd weight and
v
∞
= 0 if the vector v has even weight. Therefore, any vector v
1
formed as above is a code
word in C
1
, there are 2
k
such code words. The dimension of C
1
is k, these 2
k
code words are
all the code words of C
1
.
3.5 Let C
e
be the set of code words in C with even weight and let C
o
be the set of code words in
C with odd weight. Let x be any oddweight code vector from C
o
. Adding x to each vector in
C
o
, we obtain a set of C
e
of even weight vector. The number of vectors in C
e
is equal to the
number of vectors in C
o
, i.e. C
e
 = C
o
. Also C
e
⊆ C
e
. Thus,
C
o
 ≤ C
e
 (1)
Now adding x to each vector in C
e
, we obtain a set C
o
of odd weight code words. The number
of vectors in C
o
is equal to the number of vectors in C
e
and
C
o
⊆ C
o
Hence
C
e
 ≤ C
o
 (2)
From (1) and (2), we conclude that C
o
 = C
e
.
9
3.6 (a) From the given condition on G, we see that, for any digit position, there is a row in G
with a nonzero component at that position. This row is a code word in C. Hence in the code
array, each column contains at least one nonzero entry. Therefore no column in the code array
contains only zeros.
(b) Consider the th column of the code array. From part (a) we see that this column contains
at least one
1
. Let S
0
be the code words with a
0
at the th position and S
1
be the
codewords with a
1
at the th position. Let x be a code word from S
1
. Adding x to each
vector in S
0
, we obtain a set S
1
of code words with a
1
at the th position. Clearly,
S
1
 = S
0
 (1)
and
S
1
⊆ S
1
. (2)
Adding x to each vector in S
1
, we obtain a set of S
0
of code words with a
0
at the th
location. We see that
S
0
 = S
1
 (3)
and
S
0
⊆ S
0
. (4)
From (1) and (2), we obtain
S
0
 ≤ S
1
. (5)
From (3) and (4) ,we obtain
S
1
 ≤ S
0
. (6)
From (5) and (6) we have S
0
 = S
1
. This implies that the th column of the code array
consists 2
k−1
zeros and 2
k−1
ones.
(c) Let S
0
be the set of code words with a
0
at the th position. From part (b), we see that
S
0
consists of 2
k−1
code words. Let x and y be any two code words in S
0
. The sum x + y
also has a zero at the th location and hence is code word in S
0
. Therefore S
0
is a subspace
of the vector space of all ntuples over GF(2). Since S
0
is a subset of C, it is a subspace of C.
The dimension of S
0
is k − 1.
10
3.7 Let x, y and z be any three ntuples over GF(2). Note that
d(x, y) = w(x +y),
d(y, z) = w(y +z),
d(x, z) = w(x +z).
It is easy to see that
w(u) + w(v) ≥ w(u +v). (1)
Let u = x +y and v = y +z. It follows from (1) that
w(x +y) + w(y +z) ≥ w(x +y +y +z) = w(x +z).
From the above inequality, we have
d(x, y) + d(y, z) ≥ d(x, z).
3.8 From the given condition, we see that λ <
d
min
−1
2
. It follows from the theorem 3.5 that all
the error patterns of λ or fewer errors can be used as coset leaders in a standard array. Hence,
they are correctable. In order to show that any error pattern of or fewer errors is detectable,
we need to show that no error pattern x of or fewer errors can be in the same coset as an
error pattern y of λ or fewer errors. Suppose that x and y are in the same coset. Then x + y
is a nonzero code word. The weight of this code word is
w(x +y) ≤ w(x) + w(y) ≤ + λ < d
min
.
This is impossible since the minimum weight of the code is d
min
. Hence x and y are in
different cosets. As a result, when x occurs, it will not be mistaken as y. Therefore x is
detectable.
3.11 In a systematic linear code, every nonzero code vector has at least one nonzero component in
its information section (i.e. the rightmost k positions). Hence a nonzero vector that consists of
only zeros in its rightmost k position can not be a code word in any of the systematic code in Γ.
11
Now consider a nonzero vector v = (v
0
, v
1
, · · · , v
n−1
) with at least one nonzero component
in its k rightmost positions,say v
n−k+i
= 1 for 0 ≤ i < k. Consider a matrix of the following
form which has v as its ith row:
p
00
p
01
· · · p
0,n−k−1
1 0 0 0 · · · 0
p
10
p
11
· · · p
1,n−k−1
0 1 0 0 · · · 0
.
.
.
.
.
.
v
0
v
1
· · · v
n−k−1
v
n−k
v
n−k+1
· · · · · v
n−1
p
i+1,0
p
i+1,1
· · · p
i+1,n−k−1
0 0 · · 1 · · 0
.
.
.
.
.
.
p
k−1,0
p
k−1,1
· · · p
k−1,n−k−1
0 0 0 0 · · · 1
By elementary row operations, we can put G into systematic form G
1
. The code generated
by G
1
contains v as a code word. Since each p
ij
has 2 choices, 0 or 1, there are 2
(k−1)(n−k)
matrices G with v as the ith row. Each can be put into systematic form G
1
and each G
1
generates a systematic code containing v as a code word. Hence v is contained in 2
(k−1)(n−k)
codes in Γ.
3.13 The generator matrix of the code is
G = [P
1
I
k
P
2
I
k
]
= [G
1
G
2
]
Hence a nonzero codeword in C is simply a cascade of a nonzero codeword v
1
in C
1
and a
nonzero codeword v
2
in C
2
, i.e.,
(v
1
, v
2
).
Since w(v
1
) ≥ d
1
and w(v
2
) ≥ d
2
, hence w[(v
1
, v
2
)] ≥ d
1
+ d
2
.
3.15 It follows from Theorem 3.5 that all the vectors of weight t or less can be used as coset leaders.
There are
n
0
+
n
1
+ · · · +
n
t
12
such vectors. Since there are 2
n−k
cosets, we must have
2
n−k
≥
n
0
+
n
1
+ · · · +
n
t
.
Taking logarithm on both sides of the above inequality, we obtain the Hamming bound on t,
n − k ≥ log
2
{1 +
n
1
+ · · · +
n
t
}.
3.16 Arrange the 2
k
code words as a 2
k
× n array. From problem 6(b), each column of this code
array contains 2
k−1
zeros and 2
k−1
ones. Thus the total number of ones in the array is n· 2
k−1
.
Note that each nonzero code word has weight (ones) at least d
min
. Hence
(2
k
− 1) · d
min
≤ n · 2
k−1
This implies that
d
min
≤
n · 2
k−1
2
k
− 1
.
3.17 The number of nonzero vectors of length n and weight d − 1 or less is
d−1
i=1
n
i
From the result of problem 3.11, each of these vectors is contained in at most 2
(k−1)(n−k)
linear
systematic codes. Therefore there are at most
M = 2
(k−1)(n−k)
d−1
i=1
n
i
linear systematic codes contain nonzero codewords of weight d − 1 or less. The total number
of linear systematic codes is
N = 2
(k(n−k)
If M < N, there exists at least one code with minimum weight at least d. M < N implies
13
that
2
(k−1)(n−k)
d−1
i=1
n
i
< 2
k(n−k)
d−1
i=1
n
i
< 2
(n−k)
.
3.18 Let d
min
be the smallest positive integer such that
d
min
−1
i=1
n
i
< 2
(n−k)
≤
d
min
i=1
n
i
From problem 3.17, the ﬁrst inequality garantees the existence of a systematic linear code
with minimum distance d
min
.
14
Chapter 4
4.1 A paritycheck matrix for the (15, 11) Hamming code is
H =
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
Let r = (r
0
, r
1
, . . . , r
14
) be the received vector. The syndrome of r is (s
0
, s
1
, s
2
, s
3
) with
s
0
= r
0
+r
4
+r
7
+r
8
+r
10
+r
12
+r
13
+r
14
,
s
1
= r
1
+r
4
+r
5
+r
9
+r
10
+r
11
+r
13
+r
14
,
s
2
= r
2
+r
5
+r
6
+r
8
+r
10
+r
11
+r
12
+r
14
,
s
3
= r
3
+r
6
+r
7
+r
9
+r
11
+r
12
+r
13
+r
14
.
Set up the decoding table as Table 4.1. From the decoding table, we ﬁnd that
e
0
= s
0
¯ s
1
¯ s
2
¯ s
3
, e
1
= ¯ s
0
s
1
¯ s
2
¯ s
3
, e
2
= ¯ s
0
¯ s
1
s
2
¯ s
3
,
e
3
= ¯ s
0
¯ s
1
¯ s
2
s
3
, e
4
= s
0
s
1
¯ s
2
¯ s
3
, e
5
= ¯ s
0
s
1
s
2
¯ s
3
,
. . . , e
13
= s
0
s
1
¯ s
2
s
3
, e
14
= s
0
s
1
s
2
s
3
.
15
Table 4.1: Decoding Table
s
0
s
1
s
2
s
3
e
0
e
1
e
2
e
3
e
4
e
5
e
6
e
7
e
8
e
9
e
10
e
11
e
12
e
13
e
14
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
r
0
r
1
Buffer Register r
14
+
...
s
0
+
s
1
+
s
2
+
s
3
...
s
0
s
1
s
2
s
3
s
0
s
1
s
2
s
3
s
0
s
1
s
2
s
3
s
0
s
1
s
2
s
3
+
e
0
r
0
+
e
1
r
1
+
e
2
r
2
+
e
14
r
14
Decoded bits
... ... ...
16
4.3 From (4.3), the probability of an undetected error for a Hamming code is
P
u
(E) = 2
−m
{1 + (2
m
−1)(1 −2p)
2
m−1
} −(1 −p)
2
m
−1
= 2
−m
+ (1 −2
−m
)(1 −2p)
2
m−1
−(1 −p)
2
m
−1
. (1)
Note that
(1 −p)
2
≥ 1 −2p, (2)
and
(1 −2
−m
) ≥ 0. (3)
Using (2) and (3) in (1), we obtain the following inequality:
P
u
(E) ≤ 2
−m
+ (1 −2
−m
)
(1 −p)
2
2
m−1
−(1 −p)
2
m
−1
= 2
−m
+ (1 −p)
2
m
−1
{(1 −2
−m
)(1 −p) −1}
= 2
−m
−(1 −p)
2
m
−1
{(1 −(1 −p)(1 −2
−m
)}. (4)
Note that 0 ≤ 1 −p ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ 1 −2
−m
< 1. Clearly 0 ≤ (1 −p) · (1 −2
−m
) < 1, and
1 −(1 −p) · (1 −2
−m
) ≥ 0. (5)
Since (1 −p)
2
m
−1
≥ 0, it follows from (4) and (5) that P
u
(E) ≤ 2
−m
.
4.6 The generator matrix for the 1storder RM code RM(1,3) is
G =
v
0
v
3
v
2
v
1
=
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
(1)
The code generated by this matrix is a (8, 4) code with minimumdistance 4. Let (a
0
, a
3
, a
2
, a
1
)
17
be the message to be encoded. Then its corresponding codeword is
b = (b
0
, b
1
, b
2
, b
3
, b
4
, b
5
, b
6
, b
7
)
= a
0
v
0
+a
3
v
3
+a
2
v
2
+a
1
v
1
. (2)
From (1) and (2), we ﬁnd that
b
0
= a
0
, b
1
= a
0
+a
1
, b
2
= a
0
+a
2
, b
3
= a
0
+a
2
+a
1
,
b
4
= a
0
+a
3
, b
5
= a
0
+a
3
+a
1
, b
6
= a
0
+a
3
+a
2
,
b
7
= a
0
+a
3
+a
2
+a
1
. (3)
From (3), we ﬁnd that
a
1
= b
0
+b
1
= b
2
+b
3
= b
4
+b
5
= b
6
+b
7
,
a
2
= b
0
+b
2
= b
1
+b
3
= b
4
+b
6
= b
5
+b
7
,
a
3
= b
0
+b
4
= b
1
+b
5
= b
2
+b
6
= b
3
+b
7
,
a
0
= b
0
= b
1
+a
1
= b
2
+a
2
= b
3
+a
2
+a
1
= b
4
+a
3
= b
5
+a
3
+a
1
= b
6
+a
3
+a
2
= b
7
+a
3
+a
2
+a
1
.
Let r = (r
0
, r
1
, r
2
, r
3
, r
4
, r
5
, r
6
, r
7
) be the received vector. The checksum for decoding a
1
, a
2
and a
3
are:
(a
1
) (a
2
) (a
3
)
A
(0)
1
= r
0
+r
1
B
(0)
1
= r
0
+r
2
C
(0)
1
= r
0
+r
4
A
(0)
2
= r
2
+r
3
B
(0)
2
= r
1
+r
3
C
(0)
2
= r
1
+r
5
A
(0)
3
= r
4
+r
5
B
(0)
3
= r
4
+r
6
C
(0)
3
= r
2
+r
6
A
(0)
4
= r
6
+r
7
B
(0)
4
= r
5
+r
7
C
(0)
4
= r
3
+r
7
18
After decoding a
1
, a
2
and a
3
, we form
r
(1)
= r −a
1
v
1
−a
2
v
2
−a
3
v
3
= (r
(1)
0
, r
(1)
1
, r
(1)
2
, r
(1)
3
, r
(1)
4
, r
(1)
5
, r
(1)
6
, r
(1)
7
).
Then a
0
is equal to the value taken by the majority of the bits in r
(1)
.
For decoding (01000101), the four checksum for decoding a
1
, a
2
and a
3
are:
(1) A
(0)
1
= 1, A
(0)
2
= 0, A
(0)
3
= 1, A
(0)
4
= 1;
(2) B
(0)
1
= 0, B
(0)
2
= 1, B
(0)
3
= 0, B
(0)
4
= 0;
(3) C
(0)
1
= 0, C
(0)
2
= 0, C
(0)
3
= 0, C
(0)
4
= 1.
Based on these checksums, a
1
, a
2
and a
3
are decoded as 1, 0 and 0, respectively.
To decode a
0
, we form
r
(1)
= (01000101) −a
1
v
1
−a
2
v
2
−a
3
v
3
= (00010000).
From the bits of r
(1)
, we decode a
0
to 0. Therefore, the decoded message is (0001).
4.14
RM(1, 3) = { 0, 1, X
1
, X
2
, X
3
, 1 +X
1
, 1 +X
2
,
1 +X
3
, X
1
+X
2
, X
1
+X
3
, X
2
+X
3
,
1 +X
1
+X
2
, 1 +X
1
+X
3
, 1 +X
2
+X
3
,
X
1
+X
2
+X
3
, 1 +X
1
+X
2
+X
3
}.
4.15 The RM(r, m−1) and RM(r −1, m−1) codes are given as follows (from (4.38)):
RM(r, m−1) = {v(f) : f(X
1
, X
2
, . . . , X
m−1
) ∈ P(r, m−1)},
RM(r −1, m−1) = {v(g) : g(X
1
, X
2
, . . . , X
m−1
) ∈ P(r −1, m−1)}.
Then
19
RM(r, m)={v(h) : h = f(X
1
, X
2
, . . . , X
m−1
) +X
m
g(X
1
, X
2
, . . . , X
m−1
)
with f ∈ P(r, m−1) and g ∈ P(r −1, m−1)}.
20
Chapter 5
5.6 (a) A polynomial over GF(2) with odd number of terms is not divisible by X + 1, hence it
can not be divisible by g(X) if g(X) has (X +1) as a factor. Therefore, the code contains no
code vectors of odd weight.
(b) The polynomial X
n
+ 1 can be factored as follows:
X
n
+ 1 = (X + 1)(X
n−1
+X
n−2
+· · · + X + 1)
Since g(X) divides X
n
+1 and since g(X) does not have X+1 as a factor, g(X) must divide
the polynomial X
n−1
+ X
n−2
+ · · · + X + 1. Therefore 1 + X + · · · + X
n−2
+ X
n−1
is a
code polynomial, the corresponding code vector consists of all 1
s.
(c) First, we note that no X
i
is divisible by g(X). Hence, no code word with weight one.
Now, suppose that there is a code word v(X) of weight 2. This code word must be of the
form,
v(X) = X
i
+ X
j
with 0 ≤ i < j < n. Put v(X) into the following form:
v(X) = X
i
(1 + X
j−i
).
Note that g(X) and X
i
are relatively prime. Since v(X) is a code word, it must be divisible
by g(X). Since g(X) and X
i
are relatively prime, g(X) must divide the polynomial X
j−i
+1.
However, j − i < n. This contradicts the fact that n is the smallest integer such that g(X)
divides X
n
+ 1. Hence our hypothesis that there exists a code vector of weight 2 is invalid.
Therefore, the code has a minimum weight at least 3.
5.7 (a) Note that X
n
+ 1 = g(X)h(X). Then
X
n
(X
−n
+ 1) = X
n
g(X
−1
)h(X
−1
)
21
1 + X
n
=
X
n−k
g(X
−1
)
X
k
h(X
−1
)
= g
∗
(X)h
∗
(X).
where h
∗
(X) is the reciprocal of h(X). We see that g
∗
(X) is factor of X
n
+ 1. Therefore,
g
∗
(X) generates an (n, k) cyclic code.
(b) Let C and C
∗
be two (n, k) cyclic codes generated by g(X) and g
∗
(X) respectively. Let
v(X) = v
0
+ v
1
X + · · · + v
n−1
X
n−1
be a code polynomial in C. Then v(X) must be a
multiple of g(X), i.e.,
v(X) = a(X)g(X).
Replacing X by X
−1
and multiplying both sides of above equality by X
n−1
, we obtain
X
n−1
v(X
−1
) =
X
k−1
a(X
−1
)
X
n−k
g(X
−1
)
Note that X
n−1
v(X
−1
), X
k−1
a(X
−1
) and X
n−k
g(X
−1
) are simply the reciprocals of v(X),
a(X) and g(X) respectively. Thus,
v
∗
(X) = a
∗
(X)g
∗
(X). (1)
From (1), we see that the reciprocal v
∗
(X) of a code polynomial in C is a code polynomial in
C
∗
. Similarly, we can show the reciprocal of a code polynomial in C
∗
is a code polynomial in
C. Since v
∗
(X) and v(X) have the same weight, C
∗
and C have the same weight distribution.
5.8 Let C
1
be the cyclic code generated by (X + 1)g(X). We know that C
1
is a subcode of C
and C
1
consists all the evenweight code vectors of C as all its code vectors. Thus the weight
enumerator A
1
(z) of C
1
should consists of only the evenpower terms of A(z) =
n
i=0
A
i
z
i
.
Hence
A
1
(z) =
n/2
j=0
A
2j
z
2j
(1)
Consider the sum
A(z) + A(−z) =
n
i=0
A
i
z
i
+
n
i=0
A
i
(−z)
i
22
=
n
i=0
A
i
z
i
+ (−z)
i
.
We see that z
i
+ (−z)
i
= 0 if i is odd and that z
i
+ (−z)
i
= 2z
i
if i is even. Hence
A(z) + A(−z) =
n/2
j=0
2A
2j
z
2j
(2)
From (1) and (2), we obtain
A
1
(z) = 1/2 [A(z) + A(−z)] .
5.10 Let e
1
(X) = X
i
+ X
i+1
and e
2
(X) = X
j
+ X
j+1
be two different doubleadjacenterror
patterns such that i < j. Suppose that e
1
(X) and e
2
(X) are in the same coset. Then e
1
(X) +
e
2
(X) should be a code polynomial and is divisible by g(X) = (X + 1)p(X). Note that
e
1
(X) +e
2
(X) = X
i
(X + 1) + X
j
(X + 1)
= (X + 1)X
i
(X
j−i
+ 1)
Since g(X) divides e
1
(X) + e
2
(X), p(X) should divide X
i
(X
j−i
+ 1). However p(X) and
X
i
are relatively prime. Therefore p(X) must divide X
j−i
+ 1. This is not possible since
j −i < 2
m
−1 and p(X) is a primitive polynomial of degree m (the smallest integer n such
that p(X) divides X
n
+ 1 is 2
m
−1). Thus e
1
(X) +e
2
(X) can not be in the same coset.
5.12 Note that e
(i)
(X) is the remainder resulting from dividing X
i
e(X) by X
n
+ 1. Thus
X
i
e(X) = a(X)(X
n
+ 1) +e
(i)
(X) (1)
Note that g(X) divides X
n
+ 1, and g(X) and X
i
are relatively prime. From (1), we see that
if e(X) is not divisible by g(X), then e
(i)
(X) is not divisible by g(X). Therefore, if e(X) is
detectable, e
(i)
(X) is also detectable.
23
5.14 Suppose that does not divide n. Then
n = k · + r, 0 < r < .
Note that
v
(n)
(X) = v
(k·+r)
(X) = v(X) (1)
Since v
()
(X) = v(X),
v
(k·)
(X) = v(X) (2)
From (1) and (2), we have
v
(r)
(X) = v(X).
This is not possible since 0 < r < and is the smallest positive integer such that v
()
(X) =
v(X). Therefore, our hypothesis that does not divide n is invalid, hence must divide n.
5.17 Let n be the order of β. Then β
n
= 1, and β is a root of X
n
+ 1. It follows from Theorem
2.14 that φ(X) is a factor of X
n
+ 1. Hence φ(X) generates a cyclic code of length n.
5.18 Let n
1
be the order of β
1
and n
2
be the order of β
2
. Let n be the least common multiple of n
1
and n
2
, i.e. n = LCM(n
1
, n
2
). Consider X
n
+ 1. Clearly, β
1
and β
2
are roots of X
n
+ 1.
Since φ
1
(X) and φ
2
(X) are factors of X
n
+ 1. Since φ
1
(X) and φ
2
(X) are relatively prime,
g(X) = φ
1
(X) · φ
2
(X) divides X
n
+ 1. Hence g(X) = φ
1
(X) · φ
2
(X) generates a cyclic
code of length n = LCM(n
1
, n
2
).
5.19 Since every code polynomial v(X) is a multiple of the generator polynomial p(X), every root
of p(X) is a root of v(X). Thus v(X) has α and its conjugates as roots. Suppose v(X) is
a binary polynomial of degree 2
m
− 2 or less that has α as a root. It follows from Theorem
2.14 that v(X) is divisible by the minimal polynomial p(X) of α. Hence v(X) is a code
polynomial in the Hamming code generated by p(X).
5.20 Let v(X) be a code polynomial in both C
1
and C
2
. Then v(X) is divisible by both g
1
(X) and
g
2
(X). Hence v(X) is divisible by the least common multiple g(X) of g
1
(X) and g
2
(X),
i.e. v(X) is a multiple of g(X) = LCM(g
1
(X), g
2
(X)). Conversely, any polynomial of
degree n − 1 or less that is a multiple of g(X) is divisible by g
1
(X) and g
2
(X). Hence
v(X) is in both C
1
and C
2
. Also we note that g(X) is a factor of X
n
+ 1. Thus the code
24
polynomials common to C
1
and C
2
forma cyclic code of length n whose generator polynomial
is g(X) = LCM(g
1
(X), g
2
(X)). The code C
3
generated by g(X) has minimum distance
d
3
≥ max(d
1
, d
2
).
5.21 See Problem 4.3.
5.22 (a) First, we note that X
2
m
−1
+ 1 = p
∗
(X)h
∗
(X). Since the roots of X
2
m
−1
+ 1 are the
2
m
− 1 nonzero elements in GF(2
m
) which are all distinct, p
∗
(X) and h
∗
(X) are relatively
prime. Since every code polynomial v(X) in C
d
is a polynomial of degree 2
m
− 2 or less,
v(X) can not be divisible by p(X) (otherwise v(X) is divisible by p
∗
(X)h
∗
(X) = X
2
m
−1
+1
and has degree at least 2
m
−1). Suppose that v
(i)
(X) = v(X). It follows from (5.1) that
X
i
v(X) = a(X)(X
2
m
−1
+ 1) +v
(i)
(X)
= a(X)(X
2
m
−1
+ 1) +v(X)
Rearranging the above equality, we have
(X
i
+ 1)v(X) = a(X)(X
2
m
−1
+ 1).
Since p(X) divides X
2
m
−1
+ 1, it must divide (X
i
+ 1)v(X). However p(X) and v(X) are
relatively prime. Hence p(X) divides X
i
+ 1. This is not possible since 0 < i < 2
m
−1 and
p(X) is a primitive polynomial(the smallest positive integer n such that p(X) divides X
n
+1
is n = 2
m
−1). Therefore our hypothesis that, for 0 < i < 2
m
−1, v
(i)
(X) = v(X) is invalid,
and v
(i)
(X) = v(X).
(b) From part (a), a code polynomial v(X) and its 2
m
− 2 cyclic shifts form all the 2
m
− 1
nonzero code polynomials in C
d
. These 2
m
− 1 nonzero code polynomial have the same
weight, say w. The total number of nonzero components in the code words of C
d
is w·(2
m
−1).
Now we arrange the 2
m
code words in C
d
as an 2
m
×(2
m
−1) array. It follows from Problem
3.6(b) that every column in this array has exactly 2
m−1
nonzero components. Thus the total
nonzero components in the array is 2
m−1
· (2
m
−1). Equating w.(2
m
−1) to 2
m−1
· (2
m
−1),
we have
w = 2
m−1
.
25
5.25 (a) Any error pattern of double errors must be of the form,
e(X) = X
i
+ X
j
where j > i. If the two errors are not conﬁned to n −k = 10 consecutive positions, we must
have
j −i + 1 > 10,
15 −(j −i) + 1 > 10.
Simplifying the above inequalities, we obtain
j −i > 9
j −i < 6.
This is impossible. Therefore any double errors are conﬁned to 10 consecutive positions and
can be trapped.
(b) An error pattern of triple errors must be of the form,
e(X) = X
i
+ X
j
+ X
k
,
where 0 ≤ i < j < k ≤ 14. If these three errors can not be trapped, we must have
k −i > 9
j −i < 6
k −j < 6.
If we ﬁx i, the only solutions for j and k are j = 5 +i and k = 10 +i. Hence, for three errors
not conﬁned to 10 consecutive positions, the error pattern must be of the following form
e(X) = X
i
+ X
5+i
+X
10+i
26
for 0 ≤ i < 5. Therefore, only 5 error patterns of triple errors can not be trapped.
5.26 (b) Consider a doubleerror pattern,
e(X) = X
i
+ X
j
where 0 ≤ i < j < 23. If these two errors are not conﬁned to 11 consecutive positions, we
must have
j −i + 1 > 11
23 −(j −i −1) > 11
From the above inequalities, we obtain
10 < j −i < 13
For a ﬁxed i, j has two possible solutions, j = 11+i and j = 12+i. Hence, for a doubleerror
pattern that can not be trapped, it must be either of the following two forms:
e
1
(X) = X
i
+ X
11+i
,
e
1
(X) = X
i
+ X
12+i
.
There are a total of 23 error patterns of double errors that can not be trapped.
5.27 The coset leader weight distribution is
α
0
= 1, α
1
=
23
1
, α
2
=
23
2
, α
3
=
23
3
α
4
= α
5
= · · · = α
23
= 0
The probability of a correct decoding is
P(C) = (1 −p)
23
+
23
1
p(1 −p)
22
+
23
2
p
2
(1 −p)
21
27
+
23
3
p
3
(1 −p)
20
.
The probability of a decoding error is
P(E) = 1 −P(C).
5.29(a) Consider two singleerror patterns, e
1
(X) = X
i
and e
2
(X) = X
j
, where j > i. Suppose
that these two error patterns are in the same coset. Then X
i
+ X
j
must be divisible by
g(X) = (X
3
+ 1)p(X). This implies that X
j−i
+ 1 must be divisible by p(X). This is
impossible since j − i < n and n is the smallest positive integer such that p(X) divides
X
n
+ 1. Therefore no two singleerror patterns can be in the same coset. Consequently, all
singleerror patterns can be used as coset leaders.
Now consider a singleerror pattern e
1
(X) = X
i
and a doubleadjacenterror pattern e
2
(X) =
X
j
+ X
j+1
, where j > i. Suppose that e
1
(X) and e
2
(X) are in the same coset. Then
X
i
+X
j
+X
j+1
must be divisible by g(X) = (X
3
+1)p(X). This is not possible since g(X)
has X + 1 as a factor, however X
i
+ X
j
+ X
j+1
does not have X + 1 as a factor. Hence no
singleerror pattern and a doubleadjacenterror pattern can be in the same coset.
Consider two doubleadjacenterror patterns,X
i
+X
i+1
and X
j
+X
j+1
where j > i. Suppose
that these two error patterns are in the same cosets. Then X
i
+ X
i+1
+ X
j
+ X
j+1
must be
divisible by (X
3
+ 1)p(X). Note that
X
i
+ X
i+1
+X
j
+ X
j+1
= X
i
(X + 1)(X
j−i
+ 1).
We see that for X
i
(X + 1)(X
j−i
+ 1) to be divisible by p(X), X
j−i
+ 1 must be divisible
by p(X). This is again not possible since j − i < n. Hence no two doubleadjacenterror
patterns can be in the same coset.
Consider a single error pattern X
i
and a tripleadjacenterror pattern X
j
+ X
j+1
+ X
j+2
. If
these two error patterns are in the same coset, then X
i
+X
j
+X
j+1
+X
j+2
must be divisible
by (X
3
+1)p(X). But X
i
+X
j
+X
j+1
+X
j+2
= X
i
+X
j
(1 +X +X
2
) is not divisible by
X
3
+1 = (X+1)(X
2
+X+1). Therefore, no singleerror pattern and a tripleadjacenterror
pattern can be in the same coset.
Now we consider a doubleadjacenterror pattern X
i
+X
i+1
and a tripleadjacenterror pattern
28
X
j
+ X
j+1
+ X
j+2
. Suppose that these two error patterns are in the same coset. Then
X
i
+ X
i+1
+ X
j
+ X
j+1
+ X
j+2
= X
i
(X + 1) + X
j
(X
2
+ X + 1)
must be divisible by (X
3
+1)p(X). This is not possible since X
i
+X
i+1
+X
j
+X
j+1
+X
j+2
does not have X+1 as a factor but X
3
+1 has X+1 as a factor. Hence a doubleadjacenterror
pattern and a tripleadjacenterror pattern can not be in the same coset.
Consider two tripleadjacenterror patterns, X
i
+ X
i+1
+ X
i+2
and X
j
+ X
j+1
+ X
j+2
. If
they are in the same coset, then their sum
X
i
(X
2
+ X + 1)(1 + X
j−i
)
must be divisible by (X
3
+ 1)p(X), hence by p(X). Note that the degree of p(X) is 3 or
greater. Hence p(X) and (X
2
+ X + 1) are relatively prime. As a result, p(X) must divide
X
j−i
+1. Again this is not possible. Hence no two tripleadjacenterror patterns can be in the
same coset.
Summarizing the above results, we see that all the single, doubleadjacent, and triple
adjacenterror patterns can be used as coset leaders.
29
Chapter 6
6.1 (a) The elements β, β
2
and β
4
have the same minimal polynomial φ
1
(X). From table 2.9, we
ﬁnd that
φ
1
(X) = 1 + X
3
+ X
4
The minimal polynomial of β
3
= α
21
= α
6
is
φ
3
(X) = 1 + X + X
2
+ X
3
+ X
4
.
Thus
g
0
(X) = LCM(φ
1
(X), φ
2
(X))
= (1 + X
3
+X
4
)(1 + X + X
2
+ X
3
+X
4
)
= 1 + X + X
2
+ X
4
+ X
8
.
(b)
H =
1 β β
2
β
3
β
4
β
5
β
6
β
7
β
8
β
9
β
10
β
11
β
12
β
13
β
14
1 β
3
β
6
β
9
β
12
β
15
β
18
β
21
β
24
β
27
β
30
β
33
β
36
β
39
β
42
H =
1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0
0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
.
30
(c) The reciprocal of g(X) in Example 6.1 is
X
8
g(X
−1
) = X
8
(1 + X
−4
+ X
−6
+X
−7
+ X
−8
= X
8
+ X
4
+X
2
+ X + 1 = g
0
(X)
6.2 The table for GF(s
5
) with p(X) = 1 + X
2
+ X
5
is given in Table P.6.2(a). The minimal
polynomials of elements in GF(2
m
) are given in Table P.6.2(b). The generator polynomials
of all the binary BCH codes of length 31 are given in Table P.6.2(c)
Table P.6.2(a) Galois Field GF(2
5
) with p(α) = 1 + α
2
+ α
5
= 0
0 (0 0 0 0 0)
1 (1 0 0 0 0)
α (0 1 0 0 0)
α
2
(0 0 1 0 0)
α
3
(0 0 0 1 0)
α
4
(0 0 0 0 1)
α
5
= 1 + α
2
(1 0 1 0 0)
31
Table P.6.2(a) Continued
α
6
= α + α
3
(0 1 0 1 0)
α
7
= α
2
+ α
4
(0 0 1 0 1)
α
8
= 1 + α
2
+ α
3
(1 0 1 1 0)
α
9
= α + α
3
+ α
4
(0 1 0 1 1)
α
10
= 1 + α
4
(1 0 0 0 1)
α
11
= 1 + α + α
2
(1 1 1 0 0)
α
12
= α + α
2
+ α
3
(0 1 1 1 0)
α
13
= α
2
+ α
3
+ α
4
(0 0 1 1 1)
α
14
= 1 + α
2
+ α
3
+ α
4
(1 0 1 1 1)
α
15
= 1 + α + α
2
+ α
3
+ α
4
(1 1 1 1 1)
α
16
= 1 + α + α
3
+ α
4
(1 1 0 1 1)
α
17
= 1 + α + α
4
(1 1 0 0 1)
α
18
= 1 + α (1 1 0 0 0)
α
19
= α + α
2
(0 1 1 0 0)
α
20
= α
2
+ α
3
(0 0 1 1 0)
α
21
= α
3
+ α
4
(0 0 0 1 1)
α
22
= 1 + α
2
+ α
4
(1 0 1 0 1)
α
23
= 1 + α + α
2
+ α
3
(1 1 1 1 0)
α
24
= α + α
2
+ α
3
+ α
4
(0 1 1 1 1)
α
25
= 1 + α
3
+ α
4
(1 0 0 1 1)
α
26
= 1 + α + α
2
+ α
4
(1 1 1 0 1)
α
27
= 1 + α + α
3
(1 1 0 1 0)
α
28
= α + α
2
+ α
4
(0 1 1 0 1)
α
29
= 1 + + α
3
(1 0 0 1 0)
α
30
= α + α
4
(0 1 0 0 1)
32
Table P.6.2(b)
Conjugate Roots φ
i
(X)
1
α, α
2
, α
4
, α
8
, α
16
α
3
, α
6
, α
12
, α
24
, α
17
α
5
, α
10
, α
20
, α
9
, α
18
α
7
, α
14
, α
28
, α
25
, α
19
α
11
, α
22
, α
13
, α
26
, α
21
α
15
, α
30
, α
29
, α
27
, α
23
1 + X
1 + X
2
+ X
5
1 + X
2
+ X
3
+ X
4
+ X
5
1 + X + X
2
+ X
4
+ X
5
1 + X + X
2
+ X
3
+ X
5
1 + X + X
3
+ X
4
+ X
5
1 + X
3
+ X
5
Table P.6.2(c)
n k t g(X)
31 26 1 g
1
(X) = 1 + X
2
+X
5
21 2 g
2
(X) = φ
1
(X)φ
3
(X)
16 3 g
3
(X) = φ
1
(X)φ
3
(X)φ
5
(X)
11 5 g
4
(X) = φ
1
(X)φ
3
(X)φ
5
(X)φ
7
(X)
6 7 g
5
(X) = φ
1
(X)φ
3
(X)φ
5
(X)φ
7
(X)φ
11
(X)
6.3 (a) Use the table for GF(2
5
) constructed in Problem 6.2. The syndrome components of
r
1
(X) = X
7
+X
30
are:
S
1
= r
1
(α) = α
7
+ α
30
= α
19
S
2
= r
1
(α
2
) = α
14
+ α
29
= α
7
S
3
= r
1
(α
3
) = α
21
+ α
28
= α
12
33
S
4
= r
1
(α
4
) = α
28
+ α
27
= α
14
The iterative procedure for ﬁnding the error location polynomial is shown in Table P.6.3(a)
Table P.6.3(a)
µ σ
(µ)
(X) d
µ
µ
2µ −
µ
1/2 1 1 0 1
0 1 α
19
0 0
1 1 + α
19
X α
25
1 1(ρ = −1/2)
2 1 + α
19
X + α
6
X
2
– 2 2(ρ = 0)
Hence σ(X) = 1 + α
19
X + α
6
X
2
. Substituting the nonzero elements of GF(2
5
) into σ(X),
we ﬁnd that σ(X) has α and α
24
as roots. Hence the error location numbers are α
−1
= α
30
and α
−24
= α
7
. As a result, the error polynomial is
e(X) = X
7
+ X
30
.
The decoder decodes r
1
(X) into r
1
(X) +e(X) = 0.
(b) Now we consider the decoding of r
2
(X) = 1 +X
17
+X
28
. The syndrome components of
r
2
(X) are:
S
1
= r
2
(α) = α
2
,
S
2
= S
2
1
= α
4
,
S
4
= S
2
2
= α
8
,
S
3
= r
2
(α
3
) = α
21
.
The error location polynomial σ(X) is found by ﬁlling Table P.6.3(b):
34
Table P.6.3(b)
µ σ
(µ)
(X) d
µ
µ
2µ −
µ
1/2 1 1 0 1
0 1 α
2
0 0
1 1 + α
2
X α
30
1 1(ρ = −1/2)
2 1 + α
2
X + α
28
X
2
– 2 2(ρ = 0)
The estimated error location polynomial is
σ(X) = 1 + α
2
X + α
28
X
2
This polynomial does not have roots in GF(2
5
), and hence r
2
(X) cannot be decoded and must
contain more than two errors.
6.4 Let n = (2t + 1)λ. Then
(X
n
+ 1) = (X
λ
+ 1)(X
2tλ
+ X
(2t−1)λ
+ · · · + X
λ
+ 1
The roots of X
λ
+ 1 are 1, α
2t+1
, α
2(2t+1)
, · · · , α
(λ−1)(2t+1)
. Hence, α, α
2
, · · · , α
2t
are roots
of the polynomial
u(X) = 1 + X
λ
+ X
2λ
+ · · · + X
(2t−1)λ
+ X
2tλ
.
This implies that u(X) is code polynomial which has weight 2t + 1. Thus the code has
minimum distance exactly 2t + 1.
6.5 Consider the Galois ﬁeld GF(2
2m
). Note that 2
2m
− 1 = (2
m
− 1) · (2
m
+ 1). Let α be
a primitive element in GF(2
2m
). Then β = α
(2
m
−1)
is an element of order 2
m
+ 1. The
elements 1, β, β
2
, β
2
, β
3
, β
4
, · · · , β
2m
are all the roots of X
2
m
+1
+1. Let ψ
i
(X) be the minimal
35
polynomial of β
i
. Then a terrorcorrecting nonprimitive BCH code of length n = 2
m
+ 1 is
generated by
g(X) = LCM {ψ
1
(X), ψ
2
(X), · · · , ψ
2t
(X)} .
6.10 Use Tables 6.2 and 6.3. The minimal polynomial for β
2
= α
6
and β
4
= α
12
is
ψ
2
(X) = 1 + X +X
2
+ X
4
+ X
6
.
The minimal polynomial for β
3
= α
9
is
ψ
3
(X) = 1 + X
2
+ X
3
.
The minimal polynomial for β
5
= α
15
is
ψ
5
(X) = 1 + X
2
+ X
4
+ X
5
+X
6
.
Hence
g(X) = ψ
2
(X)ψ
3
(X)ψ
5
(X)
The orders of β
2
, β
3
and β
5
are 21,7 and 21 respectively. Thus the length is
n = LCM(21, 7, 21),
and the code is a doubleerrorcorrecting (21,6) BCH code.
6.11 (a) Let u(X) be a code polynomial and u
∗
(X) = X
n−1
u(X
−1
) be the reciprocal of u(X).
A cyclic code is said to be reversible if u(X) is a code polynomial then u
∗
(X) is also a code
polynomial. Consider
u
∗
(β
i
) = β
(n−1)i
u(β
−i
)
Since u(β
−i
) = 0 for −t ≤ i ≤ t, we see that u
∗
(β
i
) has β
−t
, · · · , β
−1
, β
0
, β
1
, · · · , β
t
as roots
36
and is a multiple of the generator polynomial g(X). Therefore u
∗
(X) is a code polynomial.
(b) If t is odd, t+1 is even. Hence β
t+1
is the conjugate of β
(t+1)/2
and β
−(t+1)
is the conjugate
of β
−(t+1)/2
. Thus β
t+1
and β
−(t+1)
are also roots of the generator polynomial. It follows from
the BCH bound that the code has minimum distance 2t + 4 (Since the generator polynomial
has (2t + 3 consecutive powers of β as roots).
37
Chapter 7
7.2 The generator polynomial of the doubleerrorcorrecting RS code over GF(2
5
) is
g(X) = (X + α)(X + α
2
)(X + α
3
)(X + α
4
)
= α
10
+ α
29
X + α
19
X
2
+ α
24
X
3
+ X
4
.
The generator polynomial of the tripleerrorcorrecting RS code over GF(2
5
) is
g(X) = (X + α)(X + α
2
)(X + α
3
)(X + α
4
)(X + α
5
)(X + α
6
)
= α
21
+ α
24
X + α
16
X
2
+ α
24
X
3
+ α
9
X
4
+ α
10
X
5
+ X
6
.
7.4 The syndrome components of the received polynomial are:
S
1
= r(α) = α
7
+ α
2
+ α = α
13
,
S
2
= r(α
2
) = α
10
+ α
10
+ α
14
= α
14
,
S
3
= r(α
3
) = α
13
+ α
3
+ α
12
= α
9
,
S
4
= r(α
4
) = α + α
11
+ α
10
= α
7
,
S
5
= r(α
5
) = α
4
+ α
4
+ α
8
= α
8
,
S
6
= r(α
6
) = α
7
+ α
12
+ α
6
= α
3
.
The iterative procedure for ﬁnding the error location polynomial is shown in Table P.7.4. The
error location polynomial is
σ(X) = 1 + α
9
X
3
.
The roots of this polynomial are α
2
, α
7
, and α
12
. Hence the error location numbers are α
3
, α
8
,
and α
13
.
From the syndrome components of the received polynomial and the coefﬁcients of the error
1
Table P.7.4
µ σ
µ
(X) d
µ
l
µ
µ − l
µ
−1 1 1 0 −1
0 1 α
13
0 0
1 1 + α
13
X α
10
1 0 (take ρ = −1)
2 1 + αX α
7
1 1 (take ρ = 0)
3 1 + α
13
X + α
10
X
2
α
9
2 1 (take ρ = 1)
4 1 + α
14
X + α
12
X
2
α
8
2 2 (take ρ = 2)
5 1 + α
9
X
3
0 3 2 (take ρ = 3)
6 1 + α
9
X
3
− − −
location polynomial, we ﬁnd the error value evaluator,
Z
0
(X) = S
1
+ (S
2
+ σ
1
S
1
)X + (S
3
+ σ
1
S
2
+ σ
2
S
1
)X
2
= α
13
+ (α
14
+ 0α
13
)X + (α
9
+ 0α
14
+ 0α
13
)X
2
= α
13
+ α
14
X + α
9
X
2
.
The error values at the positions X
3
, X
8
, and X
13
are:
e
3
=
−Z
0
(α
−3
)
σ
(α
−3
)
=
α
13
+ α
11
+ α
3
α
3
(1 + α
8
α
−3
)(1 + α
13
α
−3
)
=
α
7
α
3
= α
4
,
e
8
=
−Z
0
(α
−8
)
σ
(α
−8
)
=
α
13
+ α
6
+ α
8
α
8
(1 + α
3
α
−8
)(1 + α
13
α
−8
)
=
α
2
α
8
= α
9
,
e
13
=
−Z
0
(α
−13
)
σ
(α
−13
)
=
α
13
+ α + α
13
α
13
(1 + α
3
α
−13
)(1 + α
8
α
−13
)
=
α
α
13
= α
3
.
Consequently, the error pattern is
e(X) = α
4
X
3
+ α
9
X
8
+ α
3
X
13
.
and the decoded codeword is the allzero codeword.
2
7.5 The syndrome polynomial is
S(X) = α
13
+ α
14
X + α
9
X
2
+ α
7
X
3
+ α
8
X
4
+ α
3
X
5
Table P.7.5 displays the steps of Euclidean algorithm for ﬁnding the error location and error
value polynomials.
Table P.7.5
i Z
(i)
0
(X) q
i
(X) σ
i
(X)
−1 X
6
− 0
0 α
13
+ α
14
X + α
9
X
2
+ α
7
X
3
+ α
8
X
4
+ α
3
X
5
− 1
1 1 + α
8
X + α
5
X
3
+ α
2
X
4
α
2
+ α
12
X α
2
+ α
12
X
2 α + α
13
X + α
12
X
3
α
12
+ αX α
3
+ αX + α
13
X
2
3 α
7
+ α
8
X + α
3
X
2
α
8
+ α
5
X α
9
+ α
3
X
3
The error location and error value polynomials are:
σ(X) = α
9
+ α
3
X
3
= α
9
(1 + α
9
X
3
)
Z
0
(X) = α
7
+ α
8
X + α
3
X
2
= α
9
(α
13
+ α
14
X + α
9
X
2
)
From these polynomials, we ﬁnd that the error location numbers are α
3
, α
8
, and α
13
, and error
values are
e
3
=
−Z
0
(α
−3
)
σ
(α
−3
)
=
α
7
+ α
5
+ α
12
α
9
α
3
(1 + α
8
α
−3
)(1 + α
13
α
−3
)
=
α
α
12
= α
4
,
e
8
=
−Z
0
(α
−8
)
σ
(α
−8
)
=
α
7
+ 1 + α
2
α
9
α
8
(1 + α
3
α
−8
)(1 + α
13
α
−8
)
=
α
11
α
2
= α
9
,
e
13
=
−Z
0
(α
−13
)
σ
(α
−13
)
=
α
7
+ α
10
+ α
7
α
9
α
13
(1 + α
3
α
−13
)(1 + α
8
α
−13
)
=
α
10
α
7
= α
3
.
3
Hence the error pattern is
e(X) = α
4
X
3
+ α
9
X
8
+ α
3
X
13
.
and the received polynomial is decoded into the allzero codeword.
7.6 From the received polynomial,
r(X) = α
2
+ α
21
X
12
+ α
7
X
20
,
we compute the syndrome,
S
1
= r(α
1
) = α
2
+ α
33
+ α
27
= α
27
,
S
2
= r(α
2
) = α
2
+ α
45
+ α
47
= α,
S
3
= r(α
3
) = α
2
+ α
57
+ α
67
= α
28
,
S
4
= r(α
4
) = α
2
+ α
69
+ α
87
= α
29
,
S
5
= r(α
5
) = α
2
+ α
81
+ α
107
= α
15
,
S
6
= r(α
6
) = α
2
+ α
93
+ α
127
= α
8
.
Therefore, the syndrome polynomial is
S(X) = α
27
+ αX + α
28
X
2
+ α
29
X
3
+ α
15
X
4
+ α
8
X
5
Using the Euclidean algorithm, we ﬁnd
σ(X) = α
23
X
3
+ α
9
X + α
22
,
Z
0
(X) = α
26
X
2
+ α
6
X + α
18
,
as shown in the following table: The roots of σ(X) are: 1 = α
0
, α
11
and α
19
. From these
roots, we ﬁnd the error location numbers: β
1
= (α
0
)
−1
= α
0
, β
2
= (α
11
)
−1
= α
20
, and
4
i Z
(i)
0
(X) q
i
(X) σ
i
(X)
1 X
6
 0
0 S(X)  1
1 α
5
X
4
+ α
9
X
3
+ α
22
X
2
+ α
11
X + α
26
α
23
X + α
30
α
23
X + α
30
2 α
8
X
3
+ α
4
X + α
6
α
3
X + α
5
α
24
X
2
+ α
30
X + α
10
3 α
26
X
2
+ α
6
X + α
18
α
28
X + α α
23
X
3
+ α
9
X + α
22
β
3
= (α
19
)
−1
= α
12
. Hence the error pattern is
e(X) = e
0
+ e
12
X
12
+ e
20
X
20
.
The error location polynomial and its derivative are:
σ(X) = α
22
(1 + X)(1 + α
12
X)(1 + α
20
X),
σ
(X) = α
22
(1 + α
12
X)(1 + α
20
X) + α
3
(1 + X)(1 + α
20
X) + α
11
(1 + X)(1 + α
12
X).
The error values at the 3 error locations are given by:
e
0
=
−Z
0
(α
0
)
σ
(α
0
)
=
α
26
+ α
6
+ α
8
α
22
(1 + α
12
)(1 + α
20
)
= α
2
,
e
12
=
−Z
0
(α
−12
)
σ
(α
−12
)
=
α
2
+ α
25
+ α
18
α
3
(1 + α
19
)(1 + α
8
)
= α
21
,
e
20
=
−Z
0
(α
−20
)
σ
(α
−20
)
=
α
17
+ α
17
+ α
18
α
11
(1 + α
11
)(1 + α
23
)
= α
7
.
Hence, the error pattern is
e(X) = α
2
+ α
21
X
12
+ α
7
X
20
and the decoded codeword is
v(X) = r(X) −e(X) = 0.
5
7.9 Let g(X) be the generator polynomial of a tsymbol correcting RS code C over GF(q) with α,
α
2
, . . . , α
2t
as roots, where α is a primitive element of GF(q). Since g(X) divides X
q−1
− 1,
then
X
q−1
− 1 = g(X)h(X).
The polynomial h(X) has α
2t+1
, . . . , α
q−1
as roots and is called the parity polynomial. The
dual code C
d
of C is generated by the reciprocal of h(X),
h
∗
(X) = X
q−1−2t
h(X
−1
).
We see that h
∗
(X) has α
−(2t+1)
= α
q−2t−2
, α
−(2t+2)
= α
q−2t−3
, . . . , α
−(q−2)
= α, and
α
−(q−1)
= 1 as roots. Thus h
∗
(X) has the following consecutive powers of α as roots:
1, α, α
2
, . . . , α
q−2t−2
.
Hence C
d
is a (q − 1, 2t, q − 2t) RS code with minimum distance q − 2t.
7.10 The generator polynomial g
rs
(X) of the RS code C has α, α
2
, . . . , α
d−1
as roots. Note that
GF(2
m
) has GF(2) as a subﬁeld. Consider those polynomial v(X) over GF(2) with degree
2
m
−2 or less that has α, α
2
, . . . , α
d−1
(also their conjugates) as roots. These polynomials over
GF(2) form a primitive BCH code C
bch
with designed distance d. Since these polynomials are
also code polynomials in the RS code C
rs
, hence C
bch
is a subcode of C
rs
.
7.11 Suppose c(X) =
2
m
−2
i=0
c
i
X
i
is a minimum weight code polynomial in the (2
m
− 1, k) RS
code C. The minimum weight is increased to d + 1 provided
c
∞
= −c(1) = −
2
m
−2
i=0
c
i
= 0.
We know that c(X) is divisible by g(X). Thus c(X) = a(X)g(X) with a(X) = 0. Consider
c(1) = a(1)g(1).
Since 1 is not a root of g(X), g(1) = 0. If a(1) = 0, then c
∞
= −c(1) = 0 and the vector
(c
∞
, c
0
, c
1
, . . . , c
2
m
−2
) has weight d+1. Next we show that a(1) is not equal to 0. If a(1) = 0,
6
then a(X) has X − 1 as a factor and c(X) is a multiple of (X − 1)g(X) and must have a
weight at least d + 1. This contradicts to the hypothesis that c(X) is a minimum weight code
polynomial. Consequently the extended RS code has a minimum distance d + 1.
7.12 To prove the minimum distance of the doubly extended RS code, we need to show that no 2t
or fewer columns of H
1
sum to zero over GF(2
m
) and there are 2t + 1 columns in H
1
sum
to zero. Suppose there are δ columns in H
1
sum to zero and δ ≤ 2t. There are 4 case to be
considered:
(1) All δ columns are from the same submatrix H.
(2) The δ columns consist of the ﬁrst column of H
1
and δ − 1 columns from H.
(3) The δ columns consist of the second column of H
1
and δ − 1 columns from H.
(4) The δ columns consist of the ﬁrst two columns of H
1
and δ − 2 columns from H.
The ﬁrst case leads to a δ × δ Vandermonde determinant. The second and third cases lead to
a (δ − 1) × (δ − 1) Vandermonde determinant. The 4th case leads to a (δ − 2) × (δ − 2)
Vandermonde determinant. The derivations are exactly the same as we did in the book. Since
Vandermonde determinants are nonzero, δ columns of H
1
can not be sum to zero. Hence the
minimum distance of the extended RS code is at least 2t + 1. However, H generates an RS
code with minimum distance exactly 2t + 1. There are 2t + 1 columns in H (they are also in
H
1
), which sum to zero. Therefore the minimum distance of the extended RS code is exactly
2t + 1.
7.13 Consider
v(X) =
2
m
−2
i=0
a(α
i
)X
i
=
2
m
−2
i=0
(
k−1
j=0
a
j
α
ij
)X
i
Let α be a primitive element in GF(2
m
). Replacing X by α
q
, we have
v(α
q
) =
2
m
−2
i=0
k−1
j=0
a
j
α
ij
α
iq
=
k−1
j=0
a
j
(
2
m
−2
i=0
α
i(j+q)
).
7
We factor 1 + X
2
−
1
as follows:
1 + X
2
m
−1
= (1 + X)(1 + X + X
2
+ · · · + X
2
m
−2
)
Since the polynomial 1 + X + X
2
+ · · · + X
2
m
−2
has α, α
2
, . . . , α
2
m
−2
as roots, then for
1 ≤ l ≤ 2
m
− 2,
2
m
−2
i=0
α
li
= 1 + α
l
+ α
2l
+ · · · + α
(2
m
−2)l
= 0.
Therefore,
2
m
−2
i=0
α
i(j+q)
= 0 when 1 ≤ j + q ≤ 2
m
− 2.
This implies that
v(α
q
) = 0 for 0 ≤ j < k and 1 ≤ q ≤ 2
m
− k − 1.
Hence v(X) has α, α
2
, . . . , α
2
m
−k−1
as roots. The set {v(X)} is a set of polynomial over
GF(2
m
) with 2
m
−k−1 consecutive powers of α as roots and hence it forms a (2
m
−1, k, 2
m
−
k) cyclic RS code over GF(2
m
).
8
Chapter 8
8.2 The order of the perfect difference set {0, 2, 3} is q = 2.
(a) The length of the code n = 2
2
+ 2 + 1 = 7.
(b) Let z(X) = 1 +X
2
+X
3
. Then the paritycheck polynomial is
h(X) = GCD{1 +X
2
+X
3
, X
7
+ 1} = 1 +X
2
+X
3
.
(c) The generator polynomial is
g(X) =
X
7
+ 1
h(X)
= 1 +X
2
+X
3
+X
4
.
(d) From g(X), we ﬁnd that the generator matrix in systematic form is
G =
1 0 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 1 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 1 0 0 1
.
The paritycheck matrix in systematic form is
H =
1 0 0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 1 1 0 1
.
The checksums orthogonal on the highest order error digit e
6
are:
A
1
= s
0
+s
2
,
A
2
= s
1
,
A
3
= s
3
.
Based on the above checksum, a type1 decoder can be implemented.
8.4 (a) Since all the columns of H are distinct and have odd weights, no two or three columns
can sum to zero, hence the minimum weight of the code is at least 4. However, the ﬁrst,
1
the second, the third and the 6th columns sum to zero. Therefore the minimum weight,
hence the minimum distance, of the code is 4.
(b) The syndrome of the error vector e is
s = (s
0
, s
1
, s
2
, s
3
, s
4
) = eH
T
with
s
0
= e
0
+e
5
+e
6
+e
7
+e
8
+e
9
+e
10
,
s
1
= e
1
+e
5
+e
6
+e
8
,
s
2
= e
2
+e
5
+e
7
+e
9
,
s
3
= e
3
+e
6
+e
7
+e
10
,
s
4
= e
4
+e
8
+e
9
+e
10
.
(c) The checksums orthogonal on e
10
are:
A
1,10
= s
0
+s
1
+s
2
= e
0
+e
1
+e
2
+e
5
+e
10
,
A
2,10
= s
3
= e
3
+e
6
+e
7
+e
10
,
A
3,10
= s
4
= e
4
+e
8
+e
9
+e
10
.
The checksums orthogonal on e
9
are:
A
1,9
= s
0
+s
1
+s
3
,
A
2,9
= s
2
,
A
3,9
= s
4
.
The checksums orthogonal on e
8
are:
A
1,8
= s
0
+s
2
+s
3
,
A
2,8
= s
1
,
A
3,8
= s
4
.
2
The checksums orthogonal on e
7
are:
A
1,7
= s
0
+s
1
+s
4
,
A
2,7
= s
2
,
A
3,7
= s
3
.
The checksums orthogonal on e
6
are:
A
1,6
= s
0
+s
2
+s
4
,
A
2,6
= s
1
,
A
3,6
= s
3
.
The checksums orthogonal on e
5
are:
A
1,5
= s
0
+s
3
+s
4
,
A
2,5
= s
1
,
A
3,5
= s
2
.
(d) Yes, the code is completely orthogonalizable, since there are 3 checksums orthogonal
on each message bit and the minimum distance of the code is 4.
8.5 For m = 6, the binary radix2 form of 43 is
43 = 1 + 2 + 2
3
+ 2
5
.
The nonzeroproper descendants of 43 are:
1, 2, 8, 32, 3, 9, 33, 10, 34, 40, 11, 35, 41, 42.
8.6
α
∞
α
0
α
1
α
2
α
3
α
4
α
5
α
6
α
7
α
8
α
9
α
10
α
11
α
12
α
13
α
14
u = ( 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 )
Applying the permutation Z = α
3
Y +α
11
to the above vector, the component at the location
α
i
is permute to the location α
3
α
i
+α
11
. For example, the 1component at the location Y = α
8
is permuted to the location α
3
α
8
+ α
11
= α
11
+ α
11
= α
∞
. Performing this permutation to
3
the each component of the above vector, we obtain the following vector
α
∞
α
0
α
1
α
2
α
3
α
4
α
5
α
6
α
7
α
8
α
9
α
10
α
11
α
12
α
13
α
14
v = ( 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 )
8.7 For J = 9 and L = 7, X
63
+ 1 can be factor as follows:
X
63
+ 1 = (1 +X
9
)(1 +X
9
+X
18
+X
27
+X
36
+X
45
+X
54
).
Then π(X) = 1+X
9
+X
18
+X
27
+X
36
+X
45
+X
54
. Let α be a primitive element in GF(2
6
)
whose minimal polynomial is φ
1
(X) = 1+X+X
6
. Because α
63
= 1, the polynomial 1+X
9
has α
0
, α
7
, α
14
, α
21
, α
28
, α
35
, α
42
, α
49
, and α
56
as all it roots. Therefore, the polynomial π(X)
has α
h
as a root when h is not a multiple of 7 and 0 < h < 63. From the conditions (Theorem
8.2) on the roots of H(X), we can ﬁnd H(X) as: H(X) = LCM{minimal polynomials φ
i
(X)
of the roots of H(X)}. As the result,
H(X) = φ
1
(X)φ
3
(X)φ
5
(X)φ
9
(X)φ
11
(X)φ
13
(X)φ
27
(X),
where φ
1
= 1 + X + X
6
, φ
3
= 1 + X + X
2
+ X
4
+ X
6
, φ
5
= 1 + X + X
2
+ X
5
+ X
6
,
φ
9
= 1 + X
2
+ X
3
, φ
11
= 1 + X
2
+ X
3
+ X
5
+ X
6
, φ
13
= 1 + X + X
3
+ X
4
+ X
6
, and
φ
27
= 1 +X +X
3
. Then, we can ﬁnd G(X),
G(X) =
X
63
+ 1
H(X)
=
(1 +X
9
)π(X)
H(X)
= (1 +X
9
)(1 +X
2
+X
4
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
4
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X
5
+X
6
).
For type1 DTI code of length 63 and J = 9, the generator polynomial is:
g
1
(X) =
X
27
G(X
−1
)
1 +X
=
(1 +X
9
)(1 +X +X
2
+X
4
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
2
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
6
)
1 +X
= (1 +X +X
2
+X
3
+X
4
+X
5
+X
6
+X
7
+X
8
)(1 +X +X
2
+X
4
+X
6
)
(1 +X +X
2
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
6
).
Represent the polynomials π(X), Xπ(X), X
2
π(X), X
3
π(X), X
4
π(X), X
5
π(X), X
6
π(X),
X
7
π(X), and X
8
π(X) by 63tuple location vectors. Add an overall paritycheck digit and
apply the afﬁne permutation, Y = αX +α
62
, to each of these location vectors. Then, remove
the overall paritycheck digits of all location vectors. By removing one vector with odd weight,
4
we can obtain the polynomials orthogonal on the digit position X
62
. They are:
X
11
+X
16
+X
18
+X
24
+X
48
+X
58
+X
59
+X
62
,
X
1
+X
7
+X
31
+X
41
+X
42
+X
45
+X
57
+X
62
,
X
23
+X
33
+X
34
+X
37
+X
49
+X
54
+X
56
+X
62
,
X
2
+X
14
+X
19
+X
21
+X
27
+X
51
+X
61
+X
62
,
X
0
+X
3
+X
15
+X
20
+X
22
+X
28
+X
52
+X
62
,
X
9
+X
10
+X
13
+X
25
+X
30
+X
32
+X
38
+X
62
,
X
4
+X
6
+X
12
+X
36
+X
46
+X
47
+X
50
+X
62
,
X
5
+X
29
+X
39
+X
40
+X
43
+X
55
+X
60
+X
62
.
8.8 For J = 7 and L = 9,
X
63
+ 1 = (1 +X
7
)(1 +X
7
+X
14
+X
21
+X
28
+X
35
+X
42
+X
49
+X
56
)
and π(X) = 1+X
7
+X
14
+X
21
+X
28
+X
35
+X
42
+X
49
+X
56
. Let α be a primitive element in
GF(2
6
) whose minimal polynomial is φ
1
(X) = 1+X+X
6
. Because α
63
= 1, the polynomial
1 +X
7
has α
0
, α
9
, α
18
, α
27
, α
36
, α
45
, and α
54
as all it roots. Therefore, the polynomial π(X)
has α
h
as a root when h is not a multiple of 9 and 0 < h < 63. From the conditions (Theorem
8.2) on the roots of H(X), we can ﬁnd H(X) as: H(X) = LCM{minimal polynomials φ
i
(X)
of the roots of H(X)}. As the result,
H(X) = φ
1
(X)φ
3
(X)φ
5
(X)φ
7
(X)φ
21
(X),
where φ
1
= 1 + X + X
6
, φ
3
= 1 + X + X
2
+ X
4
+ X
6
, φ
5
= 1 + X + X
2
+ X
5
+ X
6
,
φ
7
= 1 +X
3
+X
6
, and φ
21
= 1 +X +X
2
. Then, we can ﬁnd G(X),
G(X) =
X
63
+ 1
H(X)
=
(1 +X
7
)π(X)
H(X)
= (1 +X
7
)(1 +X
2
+X
3
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
3
+X
4
+X
6
)
(1 +X
2
+X
4
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
4
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X
5
+X
6
).
5
For type1 DTI code of length 63 and J = 7, the generator polynomial is:
g
1
(X) =
X
37
G(X
−1
)
1 +X
=
(1 +X
7
)(1 +X +X
3
+X
4
+X
6
)(1 +X
2
+X
3
+X
5
+X
6
)
1 +X
(1 +X +X
2
+X
4
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
2
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
6
)
= (1 +X +X
2
+X
3
+X
4
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
3
+X
4
+X
6
)(1 +X
2
+X
3
+X
5
+X
6
)
(1 +X +X
2
+X
4
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
2
+X
5
+X
6
)(1 +X +X
6
).
Represent the polynomials π(X), Xπ(X), X
2
π(X), X
3
π(X), X
4
π(X), X
5
π(X), and
X
6
π(X) by 63tuple location vectors. Add an overall paritycheck digit and apply the afﬁne
permutation, Y = αX + α
62
, to each of these location vectors. By removing one vector with
odd weight, we can obtain the polynomials orthogonal on the digit position X
62
. They are:
X
11
+X
14
+X
32
+X
36
+X
43
+X
44
+X
45
+X
52
+X
56
+X
62
,
X
3
+X
8
+X
13
+X
19
+X
31
+X
33
+X
46
+X
48
+X
60
+X
62
,
X
2
+X
10
+X
23
+X
24
+X
26
+X
28
+X
29
+X
42
+X
50
+X
62
,
X
1
+X
6
+X
9
+X
15
+X
16
+X
35
+X
54
+X
55
+X
61
+X
62
,
X
0
+X
4
+X
7
+X
17
+X
27
+X
30
+X
34
+X
39
+X
58
+X
62
,
X
5
+X
21
+X
22
+X
38
+X
47
+X
49
+X
53
+X
57
+X
59
+X
62
.
8.9 The generator polynomial of the maximumlength sequence code of length n = 2
m
− 1 is
g(X) = (X
n
+ 1)/p(X) = (X + 1)(1 +X +X
2
+. . . +X
n−1
)/p(X),
where p(X) is a primitive polynomial of degree m over GF(2). Since p(X) and (X + 1) are
relatively prime, g(X) has 1 as a root. Since the allone vector 1 + X + X
2
+ . . . + X
n−1
does not have 1 as a root, it is not divisible by g(X). Therefore, the allone vector is not a
codeword in a maximumlength sequence code.
8.17 There are ﬁve 1ﬂats that pass through the point α
7
. The 1ﬂats passing through α
7
can be
represented by α
7
+ βa
1
, where a
1
is linearly independent of α
7
and β ∈ GF(2
2
). They are
6
ﬁve 1ﬂats passing through α
7
which are:
L
1
= {α
7
, α
9
, α
13
, α
6
},
L
2
= {α
7
, α
14
, α
10
, α
8
},
L
3
= {α
7
, α
12
, 0, α
2
},
L
4
= {α
7
, α
4
, α
11
, α
5
},
L
5
= {α
7
, α
3
, 1, α}.
8.18 (a) There are twenty one 1ﬂats that pass through the point α
63
. They are:
L
1
= {α
63
, 0, α
42
, α
21
}
L
2
= {α
63
, α
6
, α
50
, α
39
}
L
3
= {α
63
, α
12
, α
15
, α
37
}
L
4
= {α
63
, α
32
, α
4
, α
9
}
L
5
= {α
63
, α
24
, α
11
, α
30
}
L
6
= {α
63
, α
62
, α
7
, α
17
}
L
7
= {α
63
, α
1
, α
18
, α
8
}
L
8
= {α
63
, α
26
, α
41
, α
38
}
L
9
= {α
63
, α
48
, α
60
, α
22
}
L
10
= {α
63
, α
45
, α
46
, α
53
}
L
11
= {α
63
, α
61
, α
34
, α
14
}
L
12
= {α
63
, α
25
, α
3
, α
51
}
L
13
= {α
63
, α
2
, α
16
, α
36
}
L
14
= {α
63
, α
35
, α
31
, α
40
}
L
15
= {α
63
, α
52
, α
13
, α
19
}
L
16
= {α
63
, α
23
, α
54
, α
58
}
L
17
= {α
63
, α
33
, α
44
, α
57
}
L
18
= {α
63
, α
47
, α
49
, α
20
}
7
L
19
= {α
63
, α
27
, α
43
, α
29
}
L
20
= {α
63
, α
56
, α
55
, α
10
}
L
21
= {α
63
, α
59
, α
28
, α
5
}
(b) There are ﬁve 2ﬂats that intersect on the 1ﬂat, {α
63
+ ηα}, where η ∈ GF(2
2
). They
are:
F
1
= {1, α
6
, α
50
, α
39
, 0, α, α
22
, α
43
, α
42
, α
29
, α
18
, α
48
, α
21
, α
60
, α
27
, α
8
}
F
2
= {1, α
6
, α
50
, α
39
, α
12
, α
26
, α
10
, α
46
, α
15
, α
53
, α
41
, α
56
, α
37
, α
55
, α
45
, α
38
}
F
3
= {1, α
6
, α
50
, α
39
, α
32
, α
35
, α
20
, α
57
, α
4
, α
33
, α
31
, α
47
, α
9
, α
49
, α
44
, α
40
}
F
4
= {1, α
6
, α
50
, α
39
, α
24
, α
16
, α
34
, α
17
, α
11
, α
62
, α
36
, α
14
, α
30
, α
61
, α
7
, α
2
}
F
5
= {1, α
6
, α
50
, α
39
, α
25
, α
5
, α
54
, α
52
, α
3
, α
13
, α
59
, α
58
, α
51
, α
23
, α
19
, α
28
}
8.19 The 1ﬂats that pass through the point α
21
are:
L
1
= {α
21
, α
42
, α
11
, α
50
, α
22
, α
44
, α
25
, α
37
}
L
2
= {α
21
, α
60
, α
35
, α
31
, α
47
, α
54
, α
32
, α
52
}
L
3
= {α
21
, α
58
, α
9
, α
26
, α
6
, α
5
, α
28
, α
34
}
L
4
= {α
21
, α
30
, α
57
, 0, α
3
, α
48
, α
39
, α
12
}
L
5
= {α
21
, α
51
, α
61
, α
27
, α
19
, α
14
, α
62
, α
2
}
L
6
= {α
21
, α
38
, α
40
, α
33
, α
46
, α
17
, α
18
, α
7
}
L
7
= {α
21
, α
29
, α
16
, α
53
, α
23
, α
0
, α
4
, α
1
}
L
8
= {α
21
, α
59
, α
15
, α
45
, α
56
, α
8
, α
55
, α
13
}
L
9
= {α
21
, α
43
, α
41
, α
20
, α
10
, α
36
, α
24
, α
49
}
8.20 a. The radix2
3
expansion of 47 is expressed as follows:
47 = 7 + 5 · 2
3
.
8
Hence, the 2
3
weight of 47
W
2
3(47) = 7 + 5 = 12.
b.
W
2
3(47
(0)
) = W
2
3(47) = 7 + 5 = 12,
W
2
3(47
(1)
) = W
2
3(31) = 7 + 3 = 10,
W
2
3(47
(2)
) = W
2
3(62) = 6 + 7 = 13.
Hence,
max
0≤l<3
W
2
3(47
(l)
) = 13.
c. All the positive integers h less than 63 such that
0 < max
0≤l<3
W
2
3(h
(l)
) ≤ 2
3
− 1.
are
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17, 20,
21, 24, 28, 32, 33, 34, 35, 40, 42, 48, 49, 56.
9
Chapter 11
Convolutional Codes
11.1 (a) The encoder diagram is shown below.
u
v
( 1 )
v
( 2 )
v
( 0 )
(b) The generator matrix is given by
G =
_
¸
¸
¸
_
111 101 011
111 101 011
111 101 011
.
.
.
.
.
.
_
¸
¸
¸
_
.
(c) The codeword corresponding to u = (11101) is given by
v = u · G = (111, 010, 001, 110, 100, 101, 011).
11.2 (a) The generator sequences of the convolutional encoder in Figure 11.3 on page 460 are given in
(11.21).
1
2
(b) The generator matrix is given by
G =
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
1111 0000 0000
0101 0110 0000
0011 0100 0011
1111 0000 0000
0101 0110 0000
0011 0100 0011
.
.
.
.
.
.
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
.
(c) The codeword corresponding to u = (110, 011, 101) is given by
v = u · G = (1010, 0000, 1110, 0111, 0011).
11.3 (a) The generator matrix is given by
G(D) =
_
1 +D 1 +D
2
1 +D +D
2
¸
.
(b) The output sequences corresponding to u(D) = 1 +D
2
+D
3
+D
4
are
V(D) =
_
v
(0)
(D), v
(1)
(D), v
(2)
(D)
_
=
_
1 +D +D
2
+D
5
, 1 +D
3
+D
5
+D
6
, 1 +D +D
4
+D
6
¸
,
and the corresponding codeword is
v(D) = v
(0)
(D
3
) +Dv
(1)
(D
3
) +D
2
v
(2)
(D
3
)
= 1 +D +D
2
+D
3
+D
5
+D
6
+D
10
+D
14
+D
15
+D
16
+D
19
+D
20
.
11.4 (a) The generator matrix is given by
G(D) =
_
1 +D D 1 +D
D 1 1
_
and the composite generator polynomials are
g
1
(D) = g
(0)
1
(D
3
) + Dg
(1)
1
(D
3
) +D
2
g
(2)
1
(D
3
)
= 1 +D
2
+D
3
+D
4
+D
5
and
g
2
(D) = g
(0)
2
(D
3
) + Dg
(1)
2
(D
3
) +D
2
g
(2)
2
(D
3
)
= D + D
2
+D
3
.
(b) The codeword corresponding to the set of input sequences U(D) =
_
1 +D +D
3
, 1 +D
2
+D
3
¸
is
v(D) = u
(1)
(D
3
)g
1
(D) +u
(2)
(D
3
)g
2
(D)
= 1 +D +D
3
+D
4
+D
6
+D
10
+D
13
+D
14
.
3
11.5 (a) The generator matrix is given by
G =
_
¸
¸
¸
_
111 001 010 010 001 011
111 001 010 010 001 011
111 001 010 010 001 011
.
.
.
.
.
.
_
¸
¸
¸
_
.
(b) The parity sequences corresponding to u = (1101) are given by
v
(1)
(D) = u(D) · g
(1)
(D)
= (1 +D +D
3
)(1 +D
2
+D
3
+D
5
)
= 1 +D +D
2
+D
3
+D
4
+D
8
,
and
v
(2)
(D) = u(D) · g
(2)
(D)
= (1 +D +D
3
)(1 +D +D
4
+D
5
)
= 1 +D
2
+D
3
+D
6
+D
7
+D
8
.
Hence,
v
(1)
= (111110001)
v
(2)
= (101100111).
11.6 (a) The controller canonical form encoder realization, requiring 6 delay elements, is shown below.
v
( 0 )
v
( 1 )
v
u
( 1 )
u
( 2 )
( 2 )
4
(b) The observer canonical form encoder realization, requiring only 3 delay elements, is shown below.
v
(2)
v
(1)
v
(0)
u
(2)
u
(1)
11.14 (a) The GCD of the generator polynomials is 1.
(b) Since the GCD is 1, the inverse transfer function matrix G
−1
(D) must satisfy
G(D)G
−1
(D) =
_
1 +D
2
1 +D +D
2
¸
G
−1
(D) = I.
By inspection,
G
−1
(D) =
_
1 +D
D
_
.
11.15 (a) The GCD of the generator polynomials is 1 +D
2
and a feedforward inverse does not exist.
(b) The encoder state diagram is shown below.
S
2
S
5
1/10
0/00 S
7
S
6
S
3
S
0
S
4
S
1
0/01
0/10
1/10
0/11
0/01 1/11
0/00
1/00
1/11
1/01
1/00
1/01
0/10
0/11
(c) The cycles S
2
S
5
S
2
and S
7
S
7
both have zero output weight.
(d) The inﬁniteweight information sequence
u(D) =
1
1 +D
2
= 1 +D
2
+D
4
+D
6
+D
8
+· · ·
5
results in the output sequences
v
(0)
(D) = u(D)
_
1 +D
2
_
= 1
v
(1)
(D) = u(D)
_
1 +D +D
2
+D
3
_
= 1 +D,
and hence a codeword of ﬁnite weight.
(e) This is a catastrophic encoder realization.
11.16 For a systematic (n, k, ν) encoder, the generator matrix G(D)is a k ×n matrix of the form
G(D) = [I
k
P(D)] =
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
1 0 · · · 0 g
(k)
1
(D) · · · g
(n−1)
1
(D)
0 1 · · · 0 g
(k)
2
(D) · · · g
(n−1)
2
(D)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 0 · · · 1 g
(k)
k
(D) · · · g
(n−1)
k
(D)
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
.
The transfer function matrix of a feedforward inverse G
−1
(D) with delay l = 0 must be such that
G(D)G
−1
(D) = I
k
.
A matrix satisfying this condition is given by
G
−1
(D) =
_
I
k
0
(n−k)×k
_
=
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
1 0 · · · 0
0 1 · · · 0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 0 · · · 1
0 0 · · · 0
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0 0 · · · 0
_
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
¸
_
.
6
11.19 (a) The encoder state diagram is shown below.
S
2
S
1
S
3
S
0
0/000
1/001
1/111
0/011
1/100
0/110
1/010
0/101
(b) The modiﬁed state diagram is shown below.
S
3
X
X
X
S
1
S
2
S
0
S
0
X
2
X
2
X
3
X
2
(c) The WEF function is given by
A(X) =
i
F
i
∆
i
∆
.
7
There are 3 cycles in the graph:
Cycle 1: S
1
S
2
S
1
C
1
= X
3
Cycle 2: S
1
S
3
S
2
S
1
C
2
= X
4
Cycle 3: S
3
S
3
C
3
= X.
There is one pair of nontouching cycles:
Cycle pair 1: (Cycle 1, Cycle 3) C
1
C
3
= X
4
.
There are no more sets of nontouching cycles. Therefore,
∆ = 1 −
i
C
i
+
i
,j
C
i
C
j
= 1 −(X +X
3
+X
4
) +X
4
= 1 −X −X
3
.
There are 2 forward paths:
Forward path 1: S
0
S
1
S
2
S
0
F
1
= X
7
Forward path 2: S
0
S
1
S
3
S
2
S
0
F
2
= X
8
.
Only cycle 3 does not touch forward path 1, and hence
∆
1
= 1 −X.
Forward path 2 touches all the cycles, and hence
∆
2
= 1.
Finally, the WEF is given by
A(X) =
X
7
(1 −X) +X
8
1 −X −X
3
=
X
7
1 −X −X
3
.
Carrying out the division,
A(X) = X
7
+X
8
+X
9
+ 2X
10
+· · · ,
indicating that there is one codeword of weight 7, one codeword of weight 8, one codeword of
weight 9, 2 codewords of weight 10, and so on.
(d) The augmented state diagram is shown below.
(e) The IOWEF is given by
A(W, X, L) =
i
F
i
∆
i
∆
.
There are 3 cycles in the graph:
Cycle 1: S
1
S
2
S
1
C
1
= WX
3
L
2
Cycle 2: S
1
S
3
S
2
S
1
C
2
= W
2
X
4
L
3
Cycle 3: S
3
S
3
C
3
= WXL.
8
S
1
S
2
S
0 S
0
W X
3
L X
2
L
X
2
L
X
2
L
S
3
WXL
WXL
WXL
There is one pair of nontouching cycles:
Cycle pair 1: (Cycle 1, Cycle 3) C
1
C
3
= W
2
X
4
L
3
.
There are no more sets of nontouching cycles. Therefore,
∆ = 1 −
i
C
i
+
i
,j
C
i
C
j
= 1 −WX
3
L
2
+W
2
X
4
L
3
+WXL +W
2
X
4
L
3
.
There are 2 forward paths:
Forward path 1: S
0
S
1
S
2
S
0
F
1
= WX
7
L
3
Forward path 2: S
0
S
1
S
3
S
2
S
0
F
2
= W
2
X
8
L
4
.
Only cycle 3 does not touch forward path 1, and hence
∆
1
= 1 −WXL.
Forward path 2 touches all the cycles, and hence
∆
2
= 1.
Finally, the IOWEF is given by
A(W, X, L) =
WX
7
L
3
(1 −WXL) +W
2
X
8
L
4
1 −(WX
3
L
2
+W
2
X
4
L
3
+WXL) +X
4
Y
2
Z
3
=
WX
7
L
3
1 −WXL −WX
3
L
2
.
Carrying out the division,
A(W, X, L) = WX
7
L
3
+W
2
X
8
L
4
+W
3
X
9
L
5
+· · · ,
indicating that there is one codeword of weight 7 with an information weight of 1 and length 3,
one codeword of weight 8 with an information weight of 2 and length 4, and one codeword of
weight 9 with an information weight of 3 and length 5.
9
11.20 Using state variable method described on pp. 505506, the WEF is given by
A(X)=
−X
4
(−1−2X
4
+X
3
+9X
20
−42X
18
+78X
16
+38X
12
+3X
17
+5X
13
+9X
11
−9X
15
−2X
7
−74X
14
−14X
10
−9X
9
+X
6
+6X
8
)
1−X+2X
4
−X
3
−X
2
+3X
24
+X
21
−3X
20
+32X
18
−8X
22
−X
19
−45X
16
−8X
12
−5X
17
−6X
11
+9X
15
+2X
7
+27X
14
+3X
10
−2X
9
−4X
6
+X
8
.
Performing the division results in
A(X) = X
4
+X
5
+ 2X
6
+ 3X
7
+ 6X
8
+ 9X
9
+· · · ,
which indicates that there is one codeword of weight 4, one codeword of weight 5, two codewords of
weight 6, and so on.
11.28 (a) From Problem 11.19(c), the WEF of the code is
A(X) = X
7
+X
8
+X
9
+ 2X
10
+· · · ,
and the free distance of the code is therefore d
free
= 7, the lowest power of X in A(X).
(b) The complete CDF is shown below.
0 1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5 6 7
d
d
min
= 5
d
free
=7
(c) The minimum distance is
d
min
= d
l

l=m=2
= 5.
10
11.29 (a) By examining the encoder state diagram in Problem 11.15 and considering only paths that begin
and end in state S
0
(see page 507), we ﬁnd that the free distance of the code is d
free
= 6. This
corresponds to the path S
0
S
1
S
2
S
4
S
0
and the input sequence u = (1000).
(b) The complete CDF is shown below.
0 1 2 3 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
d
d
free
= 6
d
min
= 3
(c) The minimum distance is
d
min
= d
l

l=m=3
= 3.
11.31 By deﬁnition, the free distance d
free
is the minimum weight path that has diverged from and remerged
with the allzero state. Assume that [v]
j
represents the shortest remerged path through the state
diagram with weight free d
free
. Letting [d
l
]
re
be the minimum weight of all remerged paths of length
l, it follows that [d
l
]
re
= d
free
for all l ≥ j. Also, for a noncatastrophic encoder, any path that remains
unmerged must accumulate weight. Letting [d
l
]
un
be the minimum weight of all unmerged paths of
length l, it follows that
lim
l→∞
[d
l
]
un
→∞.
Therefore
lim
l→∞
d
l
= min
_
lim
l→∞
[d
l
]
re
, lim
l→∞
[d
l
]
un
_
= d
free
.
Q. E. D.
Chapter 12
Optimum Decoding of Convolutional
Codes
12.1 (Note: The problem should read “ for the (3,2,2) encoder in Example 11.2 ”rather than “ for the (3,2,2)
code in Table 12.1(d)”.) The state diagram of the encoder is given by:
01/111
11/101
00/000
01/011
00/100
10/101
S
3
S
1
S
2
S
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
0
00/111
10/010
10/001
01/100
11/001
10/110
11/010
01/000
1
2
From the state diagram, we can draw a trellis diagram containing h +m+ 1 = 3 + 1 + 1 = 5 levels as
shown below:
00/000
1
0
/
1
0
1 0
1
/
0
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
0
10/010
0
0
/
1
1
1
0
1
/
1
0
0
1
1
/
0
0
1
01/111
1
0
/
0
0
1
1
1
/
0
1
0
0
0
/
1
0
0
11/101
0
1
/
0
0
0
1
0
/
1
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
S
3
S
1
S
2
S
0
S
0
00/000
1
0
/
1
0
1 0
1
/
0
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
0
10/010
0
0
/
1
1
1
0
1
/
1
0
0
1
1
/
0
0
1
01/111
1
0
/
0
0
1
1
1
/
0
1
0
0
0
/
1
0
0
11/101
0
1
/
0
0
0
1
0
/
1
1
0
S
0
S
3
S
1
S
2
0
0
/
0
1
1
S
0
S
3
S
1
S
2
00/000
1
0
/
1
0
1 0
1
/
0
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
0
00/000
0
0
/
1
1
1
0
0
/
1
0
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
S
0
Hence, for u = (11, 01, 10),
v
(0)
= (1001)
v
(1)
= (1001)
v
(2)
= (0011)
and
v = (110, 000, 001, 111),
agreeing with (11.16) in Example 11.2. The path through the trellis corresponding to this codeword is
shown highlighted in the ﬁgure.
3
12.2 Note that
N−1
l=0
c
2
[log P(r
l
v
l
) +c
1
] =
N−1
l=0
[c
2
log P(r
l
v
l
) +c
2
c
1
]
= c
2
N−1
l=0
log P(r
l
v
l
) +Nc
2
c
1
.
Since
max
v
_
c
2
N−1
l=0
log P(r
l
v
l
) +Nc
2
c
1
_
= c
2
max
v
_
N−1
l=0
log P(r
l
v
l
)
_
+Nc
2
c
1
if C
2
is positive, any path that maximizes
N−1
l=0
log P(r
l
v
l
) also maximizes
N−1
l=0
c
2
[log P(r
l
v
l
) +
c
1
].
12.3 The integer metric table becomes:
0
1
0
2
1
2
1
1
0 6 5 3 0
1 0 3 5 6
The received sequence is r = (1
1
1
2
0
1
, 1
1
1
1
0
2
, 1
1
1
1
0
1
, 1
1
1
1
1
1
, 0
1
1
2
0
1
, 1
2
0
2
1
1
, 1
2
0
1
1
1
). The decoded se
quence is shown in the ﬁgure below, and the ﬁnal survivor is
ˆ v = (111, 010, 110, 011, 000, 000, 000),
which yields a decoded information sequence of
ˆ u = (11000).
This result agrees with Example 12.1.
4
0/000
1
/
1
1
1
0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
0
/
1
0
1
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
1/001
0
/
1
1
0
1/001 1/001
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
1
/
1
0
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
S
3
S
1
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
2
S
2
S
2
S
3
S
2
S
3
S
3
S
2
S
0
0 9 13 26 52 67 75 84
11 24 32 46 57
22 36 42 63
20 40 48 53 73
5
12.4 For the given channel transition probabilities, the resulting metric table is:
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
0 −0.363 −0.706 −0.777 −0.955 −1.237 −1.638 −2.097 −2.699
1 −2.699 −2.097 −1.638 −1.237 −0.955 −0.777 −0.706 −0.363
To construct an integer metric table, choose c
1
= 2.699 and c
2
= 4.28. Then the integer metric table
becomes:
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
0 10 9 8 7 6 5 3 0
1 0 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
12.5 (a) Referring to the state diagram of Figure 11.13(a), the trellis diagram for an information sequence
of length h = 4 is shown in the ﬁgure below.
(b) After Viterbi decoding the ﬁnal survivor is
ˆ v = (11, 10, 01, 00, 11, 00).
This corresponds to the information sequence
ˆ u = (1110).
6
0/00
0
0/00 0/00 0/00 0/00 0/00 0/00
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
1
/
1
0
1
/
1
0
1
/
1
0
S
1
S
0
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
1
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
4
S
4
S
4
S
4
S
2
S
2
S
2
S
2
S
6
S
6
S
6
S
5
S
5
S
1
S
1
S
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
S
3
S
3
S
3
3
19 12 21 42
22
38
16
1
/
0
0
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
1
/
0
0
1
/
0
1
1
/
0
1
0
/
1
0
0
/
1
0
0
/
1
0
46 51
S
7
S
7
20 48
1/10
1
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
1
0
0
/
1
0
40
61
1
/
0
0
1
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
53 71 66
20 45 79
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
27 68 83 94
34 49 80 98 115
S
0
S
0
7
12.6 Combining the soft decision outputs yields the following transition probabilities:
0 1
0 0.909 0.091
1 0.091 0.909
For hard decision decoding, the metric is simply Hamming distance. For the received sequence
r = (11, 10, 00, 01, 10, 01, 00),
the decoding trellis is as shown in the ﬁgure below, and the ﬁnal survivor is
ˆ v = (11, 10, 01, 01, 00, 11, 00),
which corresponds to the information sequence
ˆ u = (1110).
This result matches the result obtained using soft decisions in Problem 12.5.
8
0/00
0
0/00 0/00 0/00 0/00 0/00 0/00
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
1
/
1
0
1
/
1
0
1
/
1
0
S
1
S
0
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
1
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
4
S
4
S
4
S
4
S
2
S
2
S
2
S
2
S
6
S
6
S
6
S
5
S
5
S
1
S
1
S
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
S
3
S
3
S
3
2
0 3 5 4
2
0
3
1
/
0
0
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
1
/
0
0
1
/
0
1
1
/
0
1
0
/
1
0
0
/
1
0
0
/
1
0
1 3
S
7
S
7
4 2
1/10
1
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
0
1
0
/
1
0
0
/
1
0
2
3
1
/
0
0
1
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
0
/
0
0
1 1 2
4 4 3
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
0
/
1
1
4 2 2 3
3 4 3 3 3
S
0
S
0
9
12.9 Proof: For d even,
P
d
=
1
2
_
d
d/2
_
p
d/2
(1 −p)
d/2
+
d
e=(d/2)+1
_
d
e
_
p
e
(1 −p)
d−e
<
d
e=(d/2)
_
d
e
_
p
e
(1 −p)
d−e
<
d
e=(d/2)
_
d
e
_
p
d/2
(1 −p)
d/2
= p
d/2
(1 −p)
d/2
d
e=(d/2)
_
d
e
_
< 2
d
p
d/2
(1 −p)
d/2
and thus (12.21) is an upper bound on P
d
for d even. Q. E. D.
12.10 The event error probability is bounded by (12.25)
P(E) <
∞
d=d
free
A
d
P
d
< A(X)
X=2
√
p(1−p)
.
From Example 11.12,
A(X) =
X
6
+X
7
−X
8
1 −2X −X
3
= X
6
+ 3X
7
+ 5X
8
+ 11X
9
+ 25X
10
+· · · ,
which yields
(a) P(E) < 1.2118 ×10
−4
for p = 0.01,
(b) P(E) < 7.7391 ×10
−8
for p = 0.001.
The bit error probability is bounded by (12.29)
P
b
(E) <
∞
d=d
free
B
d
P
d
< B(X)
X=2
√
p(1−p)
=
1
k
∂A(W, X)
∂W
¸
¸
¸
¸
X=2
√
p(1−p),W=1
.
From Example 11.12,
A(W, X) =
WX
7
+W
2
(X
6
−X
8
)
1 −W(2X +X
3
)
= WX
7
+W
2
_
X
6
+X
8
+X
10
_
+W
3
_
2X
7
+ 3X
9
+ 3X
11
+X
13
_
+· · · .
Hence,
∂A(W, X)
∂W
=
X
7
+ 2W(X
6
−3X
8
−X
10
) −3W
2
(2X
7
−X
9
−X
11
)
(1 −2WX −WX
3
)
2
+· · ·
and
∂A(W, X)
∂W
¸
¸
¸
¸
W=1
=
2X
6
− X
7
−2X
8
+X
9
+X
11
(1 −2X −X
3
)
2
= 2X
6
+ 7X
7
+ 18X
8
+· · · .
10
This yields
(a) P
b
(E) < 3.0435 ×10
−4
for p = 0.01,
(b) P
b
(E) < 1.6139 ×10
−7
for p = 0.001.
12.11 The event error probability is given by (12.26)
P(E) ≈ A
d
free
_
2
_
p(1 −p)
_
d
free
≈ A
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
and the bit error probability (12.30) is given by
P
b
(E) ≈ B
d
free
_
2
_
p(1 −p)
_
d
free
≈ B
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
.
From Problem 12.10,
d
free
= 6, A
d
free
= 1, B
d
free
= 2.
(a) For p = 0.01,
P(E) ≈ 1 · 2
6
· (0.01)
6/2
= 6.4 ×10
−5
P
b
(E) ≈ 2 · 2
6
· (0.01)
6/2
= 1.28 ×10
−4
.
(b) For p = 0.001,
P(E) ≈ 1 · 2
6
· (0.001)
6/2
= 6.4 ×10
−8
P
b
(E) ≈ 2 · 2
6
· (0.001)
6/2
= 1.28 ×10
−7
.
12.12 The (3, 1, 2) encoder of (12.1) has d
free
= 7 and B
d
free
= 1. Thus, expression (12.36) becomes
P
b
(E) ≈ B
d
free
2
d
free
/2
e
−
(Rd
free
/2)·(E
b
/No)
= 2
(7/2)
e
−
(7/6)·(E
b
/No)
and (12.37) remains
P
b
(E) ≈
1
2
e
−E
b
/No
.
These expressions are plotted versus E
b
/N
o
in the ﬁgure below.
11
0 5 10 15
10
16
10
14
10
12
10
10
10
8
10
6
10
4
10
2
10
0
10
2
E
b
/N
o
(dB)
P
b
(
E
)
12.36 (Coded)
12.37 (Uncoded)
12
Equating the above expressions and solving for E
b
/N
o
yields
2
(7/2)
e
−
(7/6)·(E
b
/No)
=
1
2
e
−E
b
/No
1 = 2
(9/2)
e
−(1/6)(E
b
/No)
e
(−1/6)(E
b
/No)
= 2
−(9/2)
(−1/6)(E
b
/N
o
) = ln(2
−(9/2)
)
E
b
/N
o
= −6 ln(2
−(9/2)
) = 18.71,
which is E
b
/N
o
= 12.72dB, the coding threshold. The coding gain as a function of P
b
(E) is plotted
below.
10
10
10
9
10
8
10
7
10
6
10
5
10
4
10
3
10
2
10
1
6
4
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
P
b
E
b
/
N
o
(
d
B
)
Reguired SNR, Coded
Required SNR, Uncoded
Gain
( E )
Note that in this example, a short constraint length code (ν = 2) with hard decision decoding, the
approximate expressions for P
b
(E) indicate that a positive coding gain is only achieved at very small
values of P
b
(E), and the asymptatic coding gain is only 0.7dB.
12.13 The (3, 1, 2) encoder of Problem 12.1 has d
free
= 7 and B
d
free
= 1. Thus, expression (12.46) for the
unquantized AWGN channel becomes
P
b
(E) ≈ B
d
free
e
−Rd
free
E
b
/No
= e
−
(7/3)·(E
b
/No)
and (12.37) remains
P
b
(E) ≈
1
2
e
−E
b
/No
.
These expressions are plotted versus E
b
/N
o
in the ﬁgure below.
13
0 5 10 15
10
35
10
30
10
25
10
20
10
15
10
10
10
5
10
0
E
b
/N
o
(dB)
P
b
(
E
)
12.46 (Coded)
12.37 (Uncoded)
Equating the above expressions and solving for E
b
/N
o
yields
e
−(7/3)·(E
b
/No)
=
1
2
e
−E
b
/No
1 =
1
2
e
(4/3)(E
b
/No)
e
(4/3)(E
b
/No)
= 2
(4/3)(E
b
/N
o
) = ln(2)
E
b
/N
o
= (3/4) ln(2) = 0.5199,
which is E
b
/N
o
= −2.84dB, the coding threshold. (Note: If the slightly tighter bound on Q(x) from
(1.5) is used to form the approximate expressin for P
b
(E), the coding threshold actually moves to
−∞dB. But this is just an artifact of the bounds, which are not tight for small values of E
b
/N
o
.)
The coding gain as a function of P
b
(E) is plotted below. Note that in this example, a short constraint
length code (ν = 2) with soft decision decoding, the approximate expressions for P
b
(E) indicate that
a coding gain above 3.0 dB is achieved at moderate values of P
b
(E), and the asymptotic coding gain
is 3.7 dB.
14
10
10
10
9
10
8
10
7
10
6
10
5
10
4
10
3
10
2
10
1
2
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
P
b
E
b
/
N
o
(
d
B
)
Reguired SNR, Coded
Required SNR, Uncoded
Gain
( E )
15
12.14 The IOWEF function of the (3, 1, 2) encoder of (12.1) is
A(W, X) =
WX
7
1 −WX −WX
3
and thus (12.39b) becomes
P
b
(E) < B(X)
X=Do
=
1
k
∂A(W, X)
∂W
¸
¸
¸
¸
X=D0,W=1
=
X
7
(1 −WX − WX
3
)
2
¸
¸
¸
¸
X=D0,W=1
.
For the DMC of Problem 12.4, D
0
= 0.42275 and the above expression becomes
P
b
(E) < 9.5874 ×10
−3
.
If the DMC is converted to a BSC, then the resulting crossover probability is p = 0.091. Using (12.29)
yields
P
b
(E) < B(X)
X=Do
=
1
k
∂A(W, X)
∂W
¸
¸
¸
¸
X=2
√
p(1−p),W=1
=
X
7
(1 −WX −WX
3
)
2
¸
¸
¸
¸
X=2
√
p(1−p),W=1
= 3.7096×10
−1
,
about a factor of 40 larger than the soft decision case.
12.16 For the optimum (2, 1, 7) encoder in Table 12.1(c), d
free
= 10, A
d
free
= 1, and B
d
free
= 2.
(a) From Table 12.1(c)
γ = 6.99dB.
(b) Using (12.26) yields
P(E) ≈ A
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
= 1.02 ×10
−7
.
(c) Using (12.30) yields
P
b
(E) ≈ B
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
= 2.04 ×10
−7
.
(d) For this encoder
G
−1
=
_
D
2
1 +D
+
D
2
_
and the ampliﬁcation factor is A = 4.
For the quicklookin (2, 1, 7) encoder in Table 12.2, d
free
= 9, A
d
free
= 1, and B
d
free
= 1.
(a) From Table 12.2
γ = 6.53dB.
(b) Using (12.26) yields
P(E) ≈ A
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
= 5.12 ×10
−7
.
(c) Using (12.30) yields
P
b
(E) ≈ B
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
= 5.12 ×10
−7
.
16
(d) For this encoder
G
−1
=
_
1
1
_
and the ampliﬁcation factor is A = 2.
12.17 The generator matrix of a rate R = 1/2 systematic feedforward encoder is of the form
G =
_
1 g
(1)
(D)
_
.
Letting g
(1)
(D) = 1 +D+D
2
+D
5
+D
7
achieves d
free
= 6 with B
d
free
= 1 and A
d
free
= 1.
(a) The softdecision asymptotic coding gain is
γ = 4.77dB.
(b) Using (12.26) yields
P(E) ≈ A
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
= 6.4 ×10
−5
.
(c) Using (12.30) yields
P
b
(E) ≈ B
d
free
2
d
free
p
d
free
/2
= 6.4 ×10
−5
.
(d) For this encoder (and all systematic encoders)
G
−1
=
_
1
0
_
and the ampliﬁcation factor is A = 1.
12.18 The generator polynomial for the (15, 7) BCH code is
g(X) = 1 +X
4
+X
6
+X
7
+X
8
and d
g
= 5. The generator polynomial of the dual code is
h(X) =
X
15
+ 1
X
8
+X
7
+X
6
+X
4
+ 1
= X
7
+X
6
+X
4
+ 1
and hence d
h
≥ 4.
(a) The rate R = 1/2 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = 1 +D
4
+D
6
+D
7
+D
8
has
generator matrix
G(D) =
_
1 +D
2
+D
3
+D
4
D
3
¸
and d
free
≥ min(5, 8) = 5.
(b) The rate R = 1/4 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = g(D
2
) +Dh(D
2
) = 1 +D+
D
8
+D
9
+D
12
+D
13
+D
14
+D
15
+D
16
has generator matrix
G(D) =
_
1 +D
2
+D
3
+D
4
1 +D
2
+D
3
D
3
D
3
¸
and d
free
≥ min(d
g
+d
h
, 3d
g
, 3d
h
) = min(9, 15, 12) = 9.
17
The generator polynomial for the (31, 16) BCH code is
g(X) = 1 +X + X
2
+ X
3
+X
5
+X
7
+X
8
+X
9
+X
10
+X
11
+X
15
and d
g
= 7. The generator polynomial of the dual code is
h(X) =
X
15
+ 1
g(X)
= X
16
+X
12
+X
11
+X
10
+X
9
+X
4
+X + 1
and hence d
h
≥ 6.
(a) The rate R = 1/2 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = 1 + D + D
2
+ D
3
+ D
5
+
D
7
+D
8
+D
9
+D
10
+D
11
+D
15
has generator matrix
G(D) =
_
1 +D+D
4
+D
5
1 +D +D
2
+D
3
+D
4
+D
5
+D
7
¸
and d
free
≥ min(7, 12) = 7.
(b) The rate R = 1/4 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = g(D
2
) +Dh(D
2
) = 1 +D+
D
2
+D
3
+D
4
+D
6
+D
9
+D
10
+D
14
+D
16
+D
18
+D
19
+D
20
+D
21
+D
22
+D
23
has generator
matrix
G(D) =
_
1 +D +D
4
+D
5
1 +D
2
+D
5
+D
6
+D
8
1 +D+D
2
+D
3
+D
4
+D
5
+D
7
1 +D
5
¸
and d
free
≥ min(d
g
+d
h
, 3d
g
, 3d
h
) = min(13, 21, 18) = 13.
12.20 (a) The augmented state diagram is shown below.
S
1
S
2
S
3
S
0
S
0
WX
3
L X
2
L
X
2
L WXL
WXL
X
2
L
WXL
The generating function is given by
A(W, X, L) =
i
F
i
∆
i
∆
.
There are 3 cycles in the graph:
18
Cycle 1: S
1
S
2
S
1
C
1
= WX
3
L
2
Cycle 2: S
1
S
3
S
2
S
1
C
2
= W
2
X
4
L
3
Cycle 3: S
3
S
3
C
3
= WXL.
There is one pair of nontouching cycles:
Cycle pair 1: (loop 1, loop 3) C
1
C
3
= W
2
X
4
L
3
.
There are no more sets of nontouching cycles. Therefore,
∆ = 1 −
i
C
i
+
i
,j
C
i
C
j
= 1 −(WX
3
L
2
+W
2
X
4
L
3
+WXL) +W
2
X
4
L
3
.
There are 2 forward paths:
Forward path 1: S
0
S
1
S
2
S
0
F
1
= WX
7
L
3
Forward path 2: S
0
S
1
S
3
S
2
S
0
F
2
= W
2
X
8
L
4
.
Only cycle 3 does not touch forward path 1, and hence
∆
1
= 1 −WXL.
Forward path 2 touches all the cycles, and hence
∆
2
= 1.
Finally, the WEF A(W, X, L) is given by
A(W, X, L) =
WX
7
L
3
(1 −WXL) +W
2
X
8
L
4
1 −(WX
3
L
2
+W
2
X
4
L
3
+WXL) +W
2
X
4
L
3
=
WX
7
L
3
1 −WXL −WX
3
L
2
and the generating WEF’s A
i
(W, X, L) are given by:
A
1
(W, X, L) =
WX
3
L(1 −WXL)
∆
=
WX
3
L(1 −WXL)
1 −WXL −WX
3
L
2
= W X
3
L +W
2
X
6
L
3
+W
3
X
7
L
4
+ (W
3
X
9
+W
4
X
8
) L
5
+ (2 W
4
, X
10
+W
5
X
9
) L
6
+· · ·
A
2
(W, X, L) =
WX
5
L
2
(1 −WXL) +W
2
X
6
L
3
∆
=
WX
5
L
2
1 −WXL −WX
3
L
2
= W X
5
L
2
+W
2
X
6
L
3
+ (W
2
X
8
+W
3
X
7
) L
4
+ (2 W
3
X
9
+W
4
X
8
) L
5
+(W
3
X
11
+ 3 W
4
X
10
+W
5
X
9
)L
6
+ · · ·
A
3
(W, X, L) =
W
2
X
4
L
2
∆
=
W
2
X
4
L
2
1 −WXL −WX
3
L
2
= W
2
X
4
L
2
+W
3
X
5
L
3
+ (W
3
X
7
+W
4
X
6
) L
4
+ (2 W
4
X
8
+W
5
X
7
) L
5
+(W
4
X
10
+ 3 W
5
X
9
+W
6
X
8
)L
6
· · ·
(b) This code has d
free
= 7, so τ
min
is the minimum value of τ for which d(τ) = d
free
+ 1 =
8. Examining the series expansions of A
1
(W, X, L), A
2
(W, X, L), and A
3
(W, X, L) above yields
τ
min
= 5.
19
(c) A table of d(τ) and A
d(τ)
is given below.
τ d(τ) A
d(τ)
0 3 1
1 4 1
2 5 1
3 6 1
4 7 1
5 8 1
(d) From part (c) and by looking at the series expansion of A
3
(W, X, L), it can be seen that
lim
τ→∞
d(τ) = τ + 3.
12.21 For a BSC, the trellis diagram of Figure 12.6 in the book may be used to decode the three possible 21
bit subequences using the Hamming metric. The results are shown in the three ﬁgures below. Since the
r used in the middle ﬁgure (b) below has the smallest Hamming distance (2) of the three subsequences,
it is the most likely to be correctly synchronized.
0/000
1
/
1
1
1
0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
0
/
1
0
1
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
1/001
0
/
1
1
0
1/001 1/001
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
1
/
1
0
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
S
3
S
1
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
2
S
2
S
3
S
2
S
3
S
3
S
2
S
0
0 2 3 4 4 6 4 6
1 4 3 5 5
3 5 3 6
2 3 6 3 7 S
2
r 011 100 110 010 110 010 001
(a)
20
0/000
1
/
1
1
1
0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
0
/
1
0
1
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
1/001
0
/
1
1
0
1/001 1/001
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
1
/
1
0
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
S
3
S
1
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
2
S
2
S
3
S
2
S
3
S
3
S
2
S
0
0 3 4 4 5 4 5 2
0 5 1 4 1
2 4 4 6
1 3 1 5 2 S
2
r 111 001 100 101 100 100 011
(b)
21
0/000
1
/
1
1
1
0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000 0/000
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
1
/
1
1
1
0
/
1
0
1
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
1
/
0
1
0
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
0
/
1
0
1
1/001
0
/
1
1
0
1/001 1/001
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
0
/
1
1
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
1
/
1
0
0
1
/
1
0
0
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
0
/
0
1
1
S
3
S
1
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
0
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
1
S
2
S
2
S
3
S
2
S
3
S
3
S
2
S
0
0 2 4 4 4 5 5 6
1 3 5 5 6
2 2 3 3
3 4 4 6 5 S
2
r 110 011 001 011 001 000 111
(c)
Chapter 13
Suboptimum Decoding of
Convolutional Codes
13.1 (a) Referring to the state diagram of Figure 11.13a, the code tree for an information sequence of
length h = 4 is shown below.
(b) For u = (1001), the corresponding codeword is v = (11, 01, 11, 00, 01, 11, 11), as shown below.
11
10
01
00
11
00
01
10
10
01
11
00
00
11
10 01 00 11
01 00 11 10
11
00
10
11 00 00
11 11
01
10
10
11
11
11
00
00
11 11 01 00
11 00 00 00
01 00 11 01
00 11 10 10
10
11 00 00
11 11 00
11
10
11
11
11
00
00
10
01
00 00 00 00
11 11 11 01
1
2
13.2 Proof: A binaryinput, Qaryoutput DMC is symmetric if
P(r
= j0) = P(r
= Q−1 −j1) (a1)
for j = 0, 1, . . . , Q−1. The output probability distribution may be computed as
P(r
= j) =
1
i=0
P(r
= ji)P(i),
where i is the binary input to the channel. For equally likely input signals, P(1) = P(0) = 0.5 and
P(r
= j) = P(r
= j0)P(0) + P(r
= j1)P(1)
= 0.5 [P(r
= j0) + P(r
= j1)]
= 0.5 [P(r
= Q−1 −j0) + P(r
= Q−1 −j1)] [using (a1)]
= P(r
= Q−1 −j).
Q. E. D.
13.3 (a) Computing the Fano metric with p = 0.045 results in the metric table:
0 1
0 0.434 −3.974
1 −3.974 0.434
Dividing by 0.434 results in the following integer metric table:
0 1
0 1 −9
1 −9 1
(b) Decoding r = (11, 00, 11, 00, 01, 10, 11) using the stack algorithm results in the following eight
steps:
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8
1(2) 11(6) 10(6) 100(4) 1001(2) 10010(0) 100100(8) 1001000(6)
0(18) 10(6) 111(14) 111(14) 111(14)
0(18) 110(14) 110(14) 110(14)
0(18) 0(18) 0(18)
101(24) 1000(22)
101(24)
The decoded sequence is ˆ v = (11, 01, 11, 00, 01, 11, 11) and ˆ u = [1001]. The Viterbi algorithm
requires ﬁfteen steps to decode the same sequence.
(c) Decoding r = (11, 10, 00, 01, 10, 01, 00) using the stack algorithm results in the following sixteen
steps:
3
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8
1(2) 11(4) 111(4) 1110(2) 110(4) 11100(10) 1100(12) 1101(12)
0(18) 10(16) 110(4) 110(4) 11100(10) 1100(12) 1101(12) 10(16)
0(18) 10(16) 10(16) 10(16) 1101(12) 10(16) 111000(18)
0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 10(16) 111000(18) 0(16)
1111(22) 1111(22) 0(18) 0(18) 11000(20)
Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16
11010(10) 10(16) 101(14) 1011(12) 10110(10) 101100(18) 111000(18) 1110000(16)
10(16) 111000(18) 111000(18) 111000(18) 111000(18) 111000(18) 110100(18) 110100(18)
111000(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 0(18) 0(18)
0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 11000(20) 11000(20)
11000(20) 11000(20) 11000(20) 11000(20) 11000(20) 11000(20) 1010(32) 1010(32)
100(34) 1010(32) 1010(32) 1010(32) 100(34) 100(34)
100(34) 100(34) 100(34) 1011000(36) 1011000(36)
The decoded sequence is ˆ v = (11, 10, 01, 01, 00, 11, 00) and ˆ u = (1110). This agrees with the result
of Problem 12.6.
13.4 (a) Computing the Fano metric using
M(r
v
) = log
2
P(r
v
)
P(r
)
−R
with R = 1/2 and
P(0
1
) = P(1
1
) = 0.218
P(0
2
) = P(1
2
) = 0.1025
P(0
3
) = P(1
3
) = 0.095
P(0
4
) = P(1
4
) = 0.0845
results in
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
0 0.494 0.443 0.314 −0.106 −1.043 −2.66 −4.07 −7.268
1 −7.268 −4.07 −2.66 −1.043 −0.106 0.314 0.443 0.494
Multiplying by 3/0.106 yields the following integer metric table:
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
0 14 12 9 −3 −30 −75 −115 −167
1 −167 −115 −75 −30 −3 9 12 14
4
(b) Decoding r = (1
2
1
1
, 1
2
0
1
, 0
3
0
1
, 0
1
1
3
, 1
2
0
2
, 0
3
1
1
, 0
3
0
2
) using the stack algorithm results in the
following thirteen steps:
Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7
1(26) 11(52) 110(9) 1100(70) 111(106) 1110(83) 1101(167)
0(282) 10(256) 111(106) 111(106) 1101(167) 11000(173) 11100(186)
0(282) 10(256) 1101(167) 11000(173) 11000(173) 11100(186)
0(252) 10(256) 10(256) 10(256) 10(256)
0(282) 0(282) 0(282) 0(282)
1111(348) 1111(348)
Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13
11010(143) 11000(173) 11100(186) 110100(204) 111000(247) 1110000(226)
11000(173) 11100(186) 110100(204) 111000(247) 10(256)
11100(186) 110100(204) 10(256) 10(256) 0(282)
10(256) 10(256) 0(282) 0(282) 110000(348)
0(282) 0(282) 110000(331) 110000(331) 1111(348)
1111(348) 1111(348) 1111(348) 1111(348) 1101000(394)
The decoded sequence is ˆ v = (11, 10, 01, 01, 00, 11, 00) and ˆ u = (1110). This agrees with the result
of Problem 12.5(b).
13.6 As can be seen from the solution to Problem 13.3, the ﬁnal decoded path never falls below the second
stack entry (part (b)) or the fourth stack entry (part(c)). Thus, for a stacksize of 10 entries, the ﬁnal
decoded path is not eﬀected in either case.
13.7 From Example 13.5, the integer metric table is
0 1
0 1 −5
1 −5 1
5
(a) Decoding the received sequence r = (010, 010, 001, 110, 100, 101, 011) using the stack bucket algo
rithm with an interval of 5 results in the following decoding steps:
Interval 1 Interval 2 Interval 3 Interval 4 Interval 5 Interval 6 Interval 7
9 to 5 4 to 0 1 to 5 6 to 10 11 to 15 16 to 20 21 to 25
Step 1 0(3) 1(9)
Step 2 00(6) 01(12)
1(9)
Step 3 1(9) 000(12)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 4 11(6) 000(12) 10(24)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 5 111(3) 000(12) 110(21)
001(15) 10(24)
01(12)
Step 6 1110(0) 000(12) 1111(18) 110(21)
001(15) 10(24)
01(12)
Step 7 11101(3) 11100(15) 1111(18) 110(21)
000(12) 10(24)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 8 111010(6) 11100(15) 1111(18) 110(21)
000(12) 10(24)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 9 1110100(6) 11100(15) 1111(18) 110(21)
000(12) 10(24)
001(15)
01(12)
The decoded sequence is ˆ v = (111, 010, 001, 110, 100, 101, 011) and ˆ u = (11101), which agrees with
the result of Example 13.5.
6
(b) Decoding the received sequence r = (010, 010, 001, 110, 100, 101, 011) using the stack bucket algo
rithm with an interval of 9 results in the following decoding steps.
Interval 1 Interval 2 Interval 3 Interval 4
8 to 0 1 to 9 10 to 18 19 to 27
Step 1 0(3)
1(9)
Step 2 00(6) 01(12)
1(9)
Step 3 1(9) 000(12)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 4 11(6) 000(12) 10(24)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 5 111(3) 000(12) 110(21)
001(15) 10(24)
01(12)
Step 6 1110(0) 1111(18) 110(21)
000(12) 10(24)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 7 11101(3) 11100(15) 110(21)
1111(18) 10(24)
000(12)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 8 111010(6) 11100(15) 110(21)
1111(18) 10(24)
000(12)
001(15)
01(12)
Step 9 1110100(9) 11100(15) 110(21)
1111(18) 10(24)
000(12)
001(15)
01(12)
The decoded sequence is ˆ v = (111, 010, 001, 110, 100, 101, 011) and ˆ u = (11101), which agrees with
the result of Example 13.5 and part (a).
7
13.8 (i) = 5
Step Look M
F
M
B
Node Metric T
0    X 0 0
1 LFB 3 −∞ X 0 5
2 LFB 3  0 3 5
3 LFB 6 0 X 0 5
4 LFNB 9 −∞ X 0 10
5 LFB 3  0 3 10
6 LFB 6  00 6 10
7 LFB 9  000 9 10
8 LFB 12 9 00 6 10
9 LFNB 15 3 0 3 10
10 LFNB 12 0 X 0 10
11 LFNB 9  1 9 10
12 LFB 6  11 6 10
13 LFB 3  111 3 5
14 LFB 0  1110 0 0
15 LFB 3  11101 3 0
16 LFB 6  111010 6 5
17 LFB 9  1110100 9 Stop
The decoded sequence is ˆ v = (111, 010, 001, 110, 100, 101, 011) and ˆ u = [11101] which agrees with the
result of Example 13.5.
(ii) = 10
Step Look M
F
M
B
Node Metric T
0    X 0 0
1 LFB 3 −∞ X 0 10
2 LFB 3  0 3 10
3 LFB 6  00 6 10
4 LFB 9  000 9 10
5 LFB 12 6 00 6 10
6 LFNB 15 3 0 3 10
7 LFNB 12 0 X 0 10*
8 LFNB 9  1 9 10
9 LFB 6  11 6 10
10 LFB 3  111 3 10
11 LFB 0  1110 0 0
12 LFB 3  11101 3 0
13 LFB 6  111010 6 0
14 LFB 9  1110100 9 Stop
* Not the ﬁrst visit. Therefore no tightening is done.
Note: The ﬁnal decoded path agrees with the results of Examples 13.7 and 13.8 and Problem 13.7.
The number of computations in both cases is reduced compared to Examples 13.7 and 13.8.
8
13.20 (a)
g
(1)
(D) = 1 + D + D
3
+ D
5
+ D
8
+ D
9
+ D
10
+ D
11
Therefore:
H =
1 1
1 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1 1
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
.
.
.
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
.
.
.
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
.
.
.
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
.
.
.
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
.
.
.
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
.
.
.
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 1 1
(b) Using the parity triangle of the code, we obtain:
s
0
= e
(0)
0
+e
(1)
0
s
1
= e
(0)
0
+e
(0)
1
+e
(1)
1
s
2
= +e
(0)
1
+e
(0)
2
+e
(1)
2
s
3
= e
(0)
0
+e
(0)
2
+e
(0)
3
+e
(1)
3
s
4
= +e
(0)
1
+e
(0)
3
+e
(0)
4
+e
(1)
4
s
5
= e
(0)
0
+e
(0)
2
+e
(0)
4
+e
(0)
5
+e
(1)
5
s
6
= +e
(0)
1
+e
(0)
3
+e
(0)
5
+e
(0)
6
+e
(1)
6
s
7
= +e
(0)
2
+e
(0)
4
+e
(0)
6
+e
(0)
7
+e
(1)
7
s
8
= e
(0)
0
+e
(0)
3
+e
(0)
5
+e
(0)
7
+e
(0)
8
+e
(1)
8
s
9
= e
(0)
0
+e
(0)
1
+e
(0)
4
+e
(0)
6
+e
(0)
8
+e
(0)
9
+e
(1)
9
s
10
= e
(0)
0
+e
(0)
1
+e
(0)
2
+e
(0)
5
+e
(0)
7
+e
(0)
9
+e
(0)
10
+e
(1)
10
s
11
= e
(0)
0
+e
(0)
1
+e
(0)
2
+e
(0)
3
+e
(0)
6
+e
(0)
8
+e
(0)
10
+e
(0)
11
+e
(1)
11
9
(c) The eﬀect of error bits prior to time unit are removed. Thus, the modiﬁed syndrome bits are
given by the following equations:
s
= e
(0)
s
+1
= e
(0)
+e
(0)
+1
+e
(1)
+1
s
+2
= +e
(0)
+1
+e
(0)
+2
+e
(1)
+2
s
+3
= e
(0)
+e
(0)
+2
+e
(0)
+3
+e
(1)
+3
s
+4
= +e
(0)
+1
+e
(0)
+3
+e
(0)
+4
+e
(1)
+4
s
+5
= e
(0)
+e
(0)
+2
+e
(0)
+4
+e
(0)
+5
+e
(1)
+5
s
+6
= +e
(0)
+1
+e
(0)
+3
+e
(0)
+5
+e
(0)
+6
+e
(1)
+6
s
+7
= +e
(0)
+2
+e
(0)
+4
+e
(0)
+6
+e
(0)
+7
+e
(1)
+7
s
+8
= e
(0)
+e
(0)
+3
+e
(0)
+5
+e
(0)
+7
+e
(0)
+8
+e
(1)
+8
s
+9
= e
(0)
+e
(0)
+1
+e
(0)
+4
+e
(0)
+6
+e
(0)
+8
+e
(0)
+9
+e
(1)
+9
s
+10
= e
(0)
+e
(0)
+1
+e
(0)
+2
+e
(0)
+5
+e
(0)
+7
+e
(0)
+9
+e
(0)
+10
+e
(1)
+10
s
+11
= e
(0)
+e
(0)
+1
+e
(0)
+2
+e
(0)
+3
+e
(0)
+6
+e
(0)
+8
+e
(0)
+10
+e
(0)
+11
+e
(1)
+11
13.28 (a) Using either of the methods described in Examples 13.15 and 13.16, we arrive at the conclusion
that d
min
= 7.
(b) From the parity triangle, we can see that this code is not selforthogonal (for instance, s
3
and s
5
both check information error bit e
(0)
2
).
(c) From the parity triangle shown below, we see that the maximum number of orthogonal parity
checks that can be formed on e
(0)
0
is 4: {s
0
, s
1
, s
2
+ s
11
, s
5
}.
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1 1
(d) So, because of (c), this code is not completely orthogonalizable.
10
13.32 (a) According to Table 13.2(a), there is only one rate R = 1/2 self orthogonal code with d
min
= 9:
the (2,1,35) code with
g
(1)
(D) = 1 + D
7
+ D
10
+ D
16
+ D
18
+ D
30
+ D
31
+ D
35
and m
(a)
= 35.
(b) According to Table 13.3(a), there is only one rate R = 1/2 orthogonalizable code with d
min
= 9:
the (2,1,21) code with
g
(1)
(D) = 1 + D
11
+ D
13
+ D
16
+ D
17
+ D
19
+ D
20
+ D
21
and m
(b)
= 21.
(c) The best rate R = 1/2 systematic code with d
min
= 9 is the (2,1,15) code with
g
(1)
(D) = 1 + D + D
3
+ D
5
+ D
7
+ D
8
+ D
11
+ D
13
+ D
14
+ D
15
and m
(c)
= 15
∗
.
(d) According to Table 12.1(c), the best rate R = 1/2 nonsystematic code with d
free
= 9 (actually,
10 in this case) is the (2,1,6) code with
g
(0)
(D) = 1 + D + D
2
+ D
3
+ D
6
, g
(1)
(D) = 1 + D
2
+ D
3
+ D
5
+ D
6
, and m
(d)
= 6.
Thus m
(d)
< m
(c)
< m
(b)
< m
(a)
.
* This generator polynomial can be found in Table 13.1 of the ﬁrst edition of this text.
13.34 (a) This self orthogonal code with g
(1)
(D) = 1+D
2
+D
7
+D
13
+D
16
+D
17
yields the parity triangle:
→ 1
0 1
→ 1 0 1
0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 0 1
→ 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
→ 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
→ 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
→ 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
The orthogonal check sums on e
(0)
0
are {s
0
, s
2
, s
7
, s
13
, s
16
, s
17
}.
11
(b) The block diagram of the feedback majority logic decoder for this code is:
+
+ + + + + +
+
MAJORITY GATE
) 1 (
17 "
r
) 0 (
17 "
r
) 0 (
ˆ
"
e
"
sc
"
uˆ ) 0 (
"
r
17 "
s
13.37 (a) These orthogonalizable code with g
(1)
(D) = 1 + D
6
+ D
7
+ D
9
+ D
10
+ D
11
yields the parity
triangle:
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1 1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
The orthogonal check sums on e
(0)
0
are {s
0
, s
6
, s
7
, s
9
, s
1
+ s
3
+ s
10
, s
4
+ s
8
+ s
11
}.
12
(b) The block diagram of the feedback majority logic decoder for this code is:
+
+ + + +
+
+
MAJORITY GATE
+
+
+
) 0 (
11 "
r
) 1 (
11 "
r 11 "
s
"
sc
) 0 (
"
r
"
uˆ
) 0 (
ˆ
"
e
Chapter 16
Turbo Coding
16.1 Let u = [u
0
, u
1
, . . . , u
K−1
] be the input to encoder 1. Then
v
(1)
= [v
(1)
0
, v
(1)
1
, . . . , v
(1)
K−1
] = u G
(1)
is the output of encoder 1, where G
(1)
is the K ×K parity generator matrix for encoder 1, i.e.,
v
(1)
= uG
(1)
is the parity sequence produced by encoder 1. For example, for the (2,1,2) systematic
feedbacK encoder with
G
(1)
(D) =
_
1
1 +D
2
1 +D +D
2
_
,
the parity generator matrix is given by
G
(1)
=
_
¸
¸
¸
_
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
_
¸
¸
¸
_
. (K ×K)
Now let u
= [u
0
, u
1
, . . . , u
K−1
] be the (interleaved) input to encoder 2. Then we can write
u
= u T,
where T is a K×K permutation matrix with a single one in each row and column. (If T is the identity
matrix, then u
= u.)
The output of encoder 2 is then given by
v
(2)
= [v
(2)
0
, v
(2)
1
, . . . , v
(2)
K−1
] = u
G
(2)
= u T G
(2)
,
where G
(2)
is the K ×K parity generator matrix for encoder 2.
1
2
Now consider two input sequences u
1
and u
2
, both of length K. The corresponding encoder outputs
in each case are given by the 3tuples
[u
1
, u
1
G
(1)
, u
1
G
(2)
] = [u
1
, u
1
G
(1)
, u
1
T G
(2)
]
=y
1
and
[u
2
, u
2
G
(1)
, u
2
G
(2)
] = [u
2
, u
2
G
(1)
, u
2
T G
(2)
]
=y
2
.
Now consider the input sequence u = u
1
+u
2
. The encoder output 3tuple in this case is given by
[u, u G
(1)
, u
G
(2)
] = [u, u G
(1)
, u T G
(2)
]
= [u
1
+u
2
, u
1
G
(1)
+u
2
G
(2)
, u
1
T G
(2)
+u
2
T G
(2)
]
= [u
1
, u
1
G
(1)
, u
1
T G
(2)
] + [u
2
, u
2
G
(2)
, u
2
T G
(2)
]
= y
1
+y
2
.
Thus superposition holds and the turbo encoder is linear.
16.3 Deﬁne C
1
to be the (7,4,3) Hamming code and C
2
to be the (8,4,4) extended Hamming code.
C
1
Codeword list:
0000000
1101000
0111001
1010001
1011010
0110010
1100011
0001011
1110100
0011100
1001101
1000101
0101110
1000110
1000111
1111111
The CWEF for C
1
is given by
A
C
1
1
(Z) = 3Z
2
+Z
3
A
C
1
2
(Z) = 3Z + 3Z
2
A
C
1
3
(Z) = 1 + 3Z
A
C
1
4
(Z) = Z
3
3
C
2
Codeword list:
0000 0000
11010001
01110010
10100011
10110100
01100101
11000110
00010111
11101000
00111001
10011010
10001011
01011100
10001101
10001110
11111111
The CWEF for C
2
is given by
A
C
2
1
(Z) = 4Z
3
A
C
2
2
(Z) = 6Z
2
A
C
2
3
(Z) = 4Z
A
C
2
4
(Z) = Z
4
The CWEF for the PCBC is given by equation (16.23) as
A
PC
w
(Z) = A
C
1
w
(Z) ∗ A
C
2
w
(Z)/
_
K
w
_
A
PC
1
(Z) = (3Z
2
+Z
3
)(4Z
3
)/4 = 3Z
5
+Z
6
A
PC
2
(Z) = (3Z + 3Z
2
)(6Z
2
)/6 = 3Z
3
+ 3Z
4
A
PC
3
(Z) = (1 + 3Z)(4Z)/4 = Z + 3Z
2
A
PC
4
(Z) = (Z
3
)(Z
4
)/1 = Z
7
The bit CWEF’s are given by
B
PC
w
(Z) =
_
w
K
_
A
PC
w
(Z)
B
PC
1
(Z) =
_
1
4
_
(3Z
5
+Z
6
) = .75 Z
5
+.25 Z
6
B
PC
2
(Z) =
_
2
4
_
(3Z
3
+ 3Z
4
) = 1.5Z
3
+ 1.5Z
4
B
PC
3
(Z) =
_
3
4
_
(Z + 3Z
2
) = .75Z
3
+ 2.25Z
2
4
B
PC
4
(Z) =
_
4
4
_
(Z
7
) = Z
7
The IRWEF’s are given by
A
PC
(W, Z) = W(3Z
5
+Z
6
) +W
2
(3Z
3
+ 3Z
4
) +W
3
(Z + 3Z
2
) +W
7
Z
7
B
PC
(W, Z) = W(.75Z
5
+.25Z
6
) +W
2
(1.5Z
3
+ 1.5Z
4
) +W
3
(.75Z + 2.25Z
2
) +W
4
Z
7
To ﬁnd the WEF’s, set W = Z = X:
A
PC
(X) = X
4
+ 6X
5
+ 6X
6
+X
7
+X
11
B
PC
(X) = .75X
4
+ 3.75X
5
+ 2.25X
6
+.25X
7
+X
11
16.4 The codeword IRWEF can be found from equation (16.34) as follows:
A
PC
(W, Z) = W(4.5Z
4
+ 3Z
5
+ 0.5Z
6
) +
W
2
(1.29Z
2
+ 2.57Z
3
+ 1.29Z
4
+ 3.86Z
5
+ 6.43Z
6
+ 3Z
7
+
3.32Z
8
+ 3.86Z
9
+ 1.93Z
10
+ 0.43Z
11
+ 0.04Z
12
) +
W
3
(0.07 + 0.43Z + 0.64Z
2
+ 1.29Z
3
+ 5.57Z
4
+ 5.57Z
5
+
7.07Z
6
+ 15.43Z
7
+ 14.14Z
8
+ 5.14Z
9
+ 0.64Z
10
) +
W
4
(3.21Z
4
+ 17.14Z
5
+ 29.29Z
6
+ 17.14Z
7
+ 3.21Z
8
) +
W
5
(0.64Z
2
+ 5.14Z
3
+ 14.14Z
4
+ 15.43Z
5
+ 7.07Z
6
+ 5.57Z
7
+
5.57Z
8
+ 1.29Z
9
+ 0.64Z
10
+ 0.43Z
11
+ 0.07Z
12
) +
W
6
(0.04 + 0.43Z + 1.93Z
2
+ 3.86Z
3
+ 3.32Z
4
+ 3Z
5
+
6.43Z
6
+ 3.86Z
7
+ 1.29Z
8
+ 2.57Z
9
+ 1.29Z
10
) +
W
7
(0.05Z
6
+ 3Z
7
+ 4.5Z
8
) +W
8
Z
12
To ﬁnd the bit IRWEF, take each term in the expression for A
PC
(W, Z) and divide by w/8, where w
is the exponent of W.
B
PC
(W, Z) = W(0.56Z
4
+ 0.38Z
5
+ 0.06Z
6
) +
W
2
(0.32Z
2
+ 0.64Z
3
+ 0.32Z
4
+ 0.97Z
5
+ 1.61Z
6
+.75Z
7
+
0.83Z
8
+ 0.97Z
9
+ 0.48Z
10
+ 0.11Z
11
+ 0.01Z
12
) +
W
3
(0.003 + 0.16Z + 0.24Z
2
+ 0.48Z
3
+ 2.09Z
4
+ 2.09Z
5
+
2.65Z
6
+ 5.79Z
7
+ 5.30Z
8
+ 1.93Z
9
+ 0.24Z
10
) +
W
4
(1.61Z
4
+ 8.57Z
5
+ 14.65Z
6
+ 8.57Z
7
+ 1.61Z
8
) +
W
5
(0.40Z
2
+ 3.21Z
3
+ 8.84Z
4
+ 9.64Z
5
+ 4.42Z
6
+ 3.48Z
7
3.48Z
8
+ 0.81Z
9
+ 0.40Z
10
+ 0.27Z
11
+ 0.04Z
12
) +
W
6
(0.03 + 0.32Z + 1.45Z
2
+ 2.90Z
3
+ 2.49Z
4
+ 2.25Z
5
4.82Z
6
+ 2.90Z
7
+ 0.97Z
8
+ 1.93Z
9
+ 0.97Z
10
5
W
7
(0.04Z
6
+ 2.63Z
7
+ 3.94Z
8
) +W
8
Z
12
To ﬁnd the WEF’s, substitute X=W=Z into the equations for the IRWEF’s, as shown below.
A
PC
(X) = 0.07X
3
+ 1.71X
4
+ 7.71X
5
+ 5.61X
6
+ 11X
7
+ 22.29X
8
+ 45.21X
9
+
66.79X
10
+ 44.79X
11
+ 20.14X
12
+ 9.71X
13
+ 9.46X
14
+ 5.14X
15
+ 3X
16
+
0.07X
17
+ 1.29X
18
+X
20
B
PC
(X) = 0.03X
3
+ 0.48X
4
+ 1.45X
5
+ 1.21X
6
+ 3.84X
7
+ 9.96X
8
+ 23.71X
9
+
33.39X
10
+ 21.19X
11
+ 10.71X
12
+ 5.82X
13
+ 5.04X
14
+ 0.96X
15
+ 2.20X
16
+
0.04X
17
+ 0.96X
18
+X
20
16.5 Consider using an hrepeated (n, k, d
min
) = (7, 4, 3) Hamming code as the constituent code, forming
an (h[2n − k], k) = (10h, 4h) PCBC. The output consists of the original input bits u, the parity bits
from the noninterleaved encoder v
(1)
, and the parity bits from the interleaved encoder v
(2)
. For the
h = 4repeated PCBC, the IRWEF of the (28,16) constituent code is
A(W, Z) = [1 +W(3Z
2
+Z
3
) +W
2
(3Z + 3Z
2
) +W
3
(1 + 3Z) +W
4
Z
3
]
4
− 1
= W(12Z
2
+ 4Z
3
) +
W
2
(12Z + 12Z
2
+ 54Z
4
+ 36Z
5
+ 6Z
6
) +
W
3
(4 + 12Z + 108Z
3
+ 144Z
4
+ 36Z
5
+ 108Z
6
+
108Z
7
+ 36Z
8
+ 4Z
9
) +
W
4
(90Z
2
+ 232Z
3
+ 90Z
4
+ 324Z
5
+ 540Z
6
+
252Z
7
+ 117Z
8
+ 108Z
9
+ 54Z
10
+ 12Z
11
+Z
12
) +
W
5
(36Z + 144Z
2
+ 108Z
3
+ 432Z
4
+ 1188Z
5
+ 780Z
6
+
468Z
7
+ 648Z
8
+ 432Z
9
+ 120Z
10
+ 12Z
11
) +
W
6
(6 + 36Z + 54Z
2
+ 324Z
3
+ 1296Z
4
+ 1296Z
5
+
918Z
6
+ 1836Z
7
+ 1620Z
8
+ 556Z
9
+ 66Z
10
) +
W
7
(144Z
2
+ 780Z
3
+ 1188Z
4
+ 1080Z
5
+ 2808Z
6
+ 3456Z
7
+
1512Z
8
+ 324Z
9
+ 108Z
10
+ 36Z
11
+ 4Z
12
) +
W
8
(36Z + 252Z
2
+ 540Z
3
+ 783Z
4
+ 2592Z
5
+ 4464Z
6
+
2592Z
7
+ 783Z
8
+ 540Z
9
+ 252Z
10
+ 36Z
11
) +
6
W
9
(4 + 36Z + 108Z
2
+ 324Z
3
+ 1512Z
4
+ 3456Z
5
+
2808Z
6
+ 1080Z
7
+ 1188Z
8
+ 780Z
9
+ 144Z
10
) +
W
10
(66Z
2
+ 556Z
3
+ 1620Z
4
+ 1836Z
5
+ 918Z
6
+ 1296Z
7
+
1296Z
8
+ 324Z
9
+ 54Z
10
+ 36Z
11
+ 6Z
12
) +
W
11
(12Z + 120Z
2
+ 432Z
3
+ 648Z
4
+ 468Z
5
+ 780Z
6
+
1188Z
7
+ 432Z
8
+ 108Z
9
+ 144Z
10
+ 36Z
11
) +
W
12
(1 + 12Z + 54Z
2
+ 108Z
3
+ 117Z
4
+ 252Z
5
+
540Z
6
+ 324Z
7
+ 90Z
8
+ 232Z
9
+ 90Z
10
) +
W
13
(4Z
3
+ 36Z
4
+ 108Z
5
+ 108Z
6
+ 36Z
7
+
144Z
8
+ 108Z
9
+ 12Z
11
+ 4Z
12
) +
W
14
(6Z
6
+ 36Z
7
+ 54Z
8
+ 12Z
10
+ 12Z
11
) +
W
15
(4Z
9
+ 12Z
10
) +
W
16
Z
12
.
The IRWEF’s of the (40,16) PCBC are found, using A
PC
w
(Z) =
_
K
w
_
−1
[A
w
(Z)]
2
, where K = hk = 16
is the interleaver (and input) length, to be:
A
PC
1
(Z) = 9Z
4
+ 6Z
5
+Z
6
A
PC
2
(Z) = 1.2Z
2
+ 2.4Z
3
+ 1.2Z
4
+ 10.8Z
5
+ 18Z
6
+ 8.4Z
7
+ 25.5Z
8
+ 32.4Z
9
+ 16.2Z
10
+
3.6Z
11
+ 0.3Z
12
A
PC
3
(Z) = 0.029 + 0.171Z + 0.257Z
2
+ 1.543Z
3
+ 6.686Z
4
+ 6.686Z
5
+ 23.914Z
6
+ 61.714Z
7
+
56.057Z
8
+ 61.771Z
9
+ 99.686Z
10
+ 83.314Z
11
+ 54.771Z
12
+ 48.343Z
13
+
35.229Z
14
+ 15.429Z
15
+ 3.857Z
16
+ 0.514Z
17
+ 0.029Z
18
A
PC
4
(Z) = 4.451Z
4
+ 22.945Z
5
+ 38.475Z
6
+ 54.989Z
7
+ 140.459Z
8
+ 194.637Z
9
+ 186.903Z
10
+
257.697Z
11
+ 294.389Z
12
+ 216.831Z
13
+ 151.273Z
14
+ 117.156Z
15
+ 73.844Z
16
+
36.316Z
17
+ 17.268Z
18
+ 8.229Z
19
+ 3.155Z
20
+ 0.831Z
21
+
0.138Z
22
+ 0.013Z
23
+ 0.001Z
24
A
PC
5
(Z) = 0.297Z
2
+ 2.374Z
3
+ 6.527Z
4
+ 14.242Z
5
+ 50.736Z
6
+ 112.549Z
7
+ 160.615Z
8
+
315.099Z
9
+ 550.385Z
10
+ 579.363Z
11
+ 551.505Z
12
+ 611.802Z
13
+ 540.89Z
14
+
360.791Z
15
+ 238.088Z
16
+ 158.176Z
17
+ 80.901Z
18
+ 27.297Z
19
+
5.670Z
20
+ 0.659Z
21
+ 0.033Z
22
7
A
PC
6
(Z) = 0.004 + 0.054Z + 0.243Z
2
+ 0.971Z
3
+ 5.219Z
4
+ 17.964Z
5
+ 43.615Z
6
+
133.355Z
7
+ 345.929Z
8
+ 533.928Z
9
+ 682.391Z
10
+ 1030.59Z
11
+ 1269.74Z
12
+
1130.6Z
13
+ 993.686Z
14
+ 891.674Z
15
+ 597.803Z
16
+ 255.219Z
17
+ 65.307Z
18
+
9.165Z
19
+ 0.544Z
20
A
PC
7
(Z) = 1.813Z
4
+ 19.636Z
5
+ 83.089Z
6
+ 189.189Z
7
+ 341.333Z
8
+ 694.221Z
9
+
1194.5Z
10
+ 1462.3Z
11
+ 1702.7Z
12
+ 2064.99Z
13
+ 1874.92Z
14
+ 1101.01Z
15
+
456.243Z
16
+ 169.326Z
17
+ 61.439Z
18
+ 18.05Z
19
+ 4.116Z
20
+ 0.906Z
21
+
0.189Z
22
+ 0.025Z
23
+ 0.001Z
24
A
PC
8
(Z) = 0.101Z
2
+ 1.41Z
3
+ 7.955Z
4
+ 25.527Z
5
+ 67.821Z
6
+ 192.185Z
7
+
454.462Z
8
+ 795.877Z
9
+ 1316.39Z
10
+ 2201.74Z
11
+ 2743.06Z
12
+ 2201.74Z
13
+
1316.39Z
14
+ 795.877Z
15
+ 454.462Z
16
+ 192.185Z
17
+ 67.821Z
18
+ 25.527Z
19
+
7.955Z
20
+ 1.41Z
21
+ 0.101Z
22
A
PC
9
(Z) = 0.001 + 0.025Z + 0.189Z
2
+ 0.906Z
3
+ 4.116Z
4
+ 18.05Z
5
+ 61.439Z
6
+
169.326Z
7
+ 456.243Z
8
+ 1101.01Z
9
+ 1874.92Z
10
+ 2064.99Z
11
+ 1702.7Z
12
+
1462.3Z
13
+ 1194.5Z
14
+ 694.221Z
15
+ 341.333Z
16
+ 189.189Z
17
+
83.089Z
18
+ 19.636Z
19
+ 1.813Z
20
A
PC
10
(Z) = 0.544Z
4
+ 9.165Z
5
+ 65.307Z
6
+ 255.219Z
7
+ 597.803Z
8
+ 891.674Z
9
+
993.686Z
10
+ 1130.6Z
11
+ 1269.74Z
12
+ 1030.59Z
13
+ 682.391Z
14
+ 533.928Z
15
+
345.929Z
16
+ 133.355Z
17
+ 43.615Z
18
+ 17.964Z
19
+ 5.219Z
20
+ 0.971Z
21
+
0.243Z
22
+ 0.054Z
23
+ 0.004Z
24
A
PC
11
(Z) = 0.033Z
2
+ 0.659Z
3
+ 5.67Z
4
+ 27.297Z
5
+ 80.901Z
6
+ 158.176Z
7
+
238.088Z
8
+ 360.791Z
9
+ 540.89Z
10
+ 611.802Z
11
+ 551.505Z
12
+ 579.363Z
13
+
550.385Z
14
+ 315.099Z
15
+ 160.615Z
16
+ 112.549Z
17
+ 50.736Z
18
+ 14.242Z
19
+
6.527Z
20
+ 2.374Z
21
+ 0.297Z
22
A
PC
12
(Z) = 0.001 + 0.013Z + 0.138Z
2
+ 0.831Z
3
+ 3.155Z
4
+ 8.229Z
5
+ 17.268Z
6
+
36.316Z
7
+ 73.844Z
8
+ 117.156Z
9
+ 151.273Z
10
+ 216.831Z
11
+ 294.389Z
12
+
257.697Z
13
+ 186.903Z
14
+ 194.637Z
15
+ 140.459Z
16
+ 54.989Z
17
+
38.475Z
18
+ 22.945Z
19
+ 4.451Z
20
A
PC
13
(Z) = 0.029Z
6
+ 0.514Z
7
+ 3.857Z
8
+ 15.429Z
9
+ 35.229Z
10
+ 48.343Z
11
+ 54.771Z
12
+
83.314Z
13
+ 99.686Z
14
+ 61.771Z
15
+ 56.057Z
16
+ 61.714Z
17
+ 23.914Z
18
+
8
6.686Z
19
+ 6.686Z
20
+ 1.543Z
21
+ 0.257Z
22
+ 0.171Z
23
+ 0.029Z
24
A
PC
14
(Z) = 0.3Z
12
+ 3.6Z
13
+ 16.2Z
14
+ 32.4Z
15
+ 25.5Z
16
+ 8.4Z
17
+ 18Z
18
+
10.8Z
19
+ 1.2Z
20
+ 2.4Z
21
+ 1.2Z
22
A
PC
15
(Z) = Z
18
+ 6Z
19
+ 9Z
20
A
PC
16
(Z) = Z
24
.
Using a 4x4 rowcolumn (block) interleaver, the minimum distance of the PCBC is 5. This comes
from a weight 1 input, resulting in w
H
(u) = 1, w
H
(v
(1)
) = 2, and w
H
(v
(2)
) = 2, where w
H
(x) is the
Hamming weight of x.
16.7 On page 791 in the text, it is explained that “...any multiple error event in a codeword belonging
to a terminated convolutional code can be viewed as a succession of single error events separated by
sequences of 0’s.” Another way to look at it is that for convolutional codewords, we start in the zero
state and end in the zero state and any multiple error event can be seen as a series of deviations from
the zero state. These deviations from the zero state can be separated by any amount of time spent
in the zero state. For example, the codeword could have a deviation starting and another deviation
ending at the same zero state, or the codeword could stay in the zero state for several input zeros.
Likewise the ﬁrst input bit could take the codeword out of the zero state or the last input bit could be
the one to return the codeword to the zero state.
So, if there are h error events with total length λ in a block codeword length K, then there must be
K−λ times that state 0 occurs or, as explained in the text, K−λ 0’s. Now, in the codeword, there are
K−λ +h places where an error event can start, since the remaining λ −h places are then determined
by the error events. Since there are h events, the number of ways to choose h elements from N −λ+h
places gives the multiplicity of block codewords for herror events.
16.8 The IRWEF and WEF for the PCCC in Example 16.6 is found in the same manner as for a PCBC.
The following combines the equations in (16.49) for the CWEF’s:
A
PC
(W, Z) = W
2
(4Z
8
+ 4Z
10
+Z
12
) +W
3
(1.81Z
4
+ 6.74Z
6
+ 9.89Z
8
+ 6.74Z
10
+ 1.81Z
12
) +
W
4
(0.93Z
4
+ 5.93Z
4
+ 10.59Z
8
+ 4.67Z
10
+ 3.89Z
12
+ 0.67Z
14
+ 0.33Z
16
) +
W
5
(0.33Z
4
+ 2.22Z
6
+ 6.37Z
8
+ 9.33Z
10
+ 6.81Z
12
+ 1.78Z
14
+ 0.15Z
16
) +
W
6
(0.04Z
4
+ 1.04Z
6
+ 8.15Z
8
+ 12.44Z
10
+ 5.33Z
12
) +W
7
(5.44Z
8
+ 3.11Z
10
+
0.44Z
12
) +W
9
(Z
12
)
A
PC
(X) = 1.81X
7
+ 0.93X
8
+ 7.07X
9
+ 9.97X
10
+ 12.11X
11
+ 15.63X
12
+ 13.11X
13
+
13.82X
14
+ 15.95X
15
+ 16.33X
16
+ 9.92X
17
+ 6X
18
+ 2.22X
19
+ 0.33X
20
+ 1.15X
21
9
16.9 The bit IRWEF is given by:
B
PC
(W, Z) = W
2
(0.89Z
8
+ 0.89Z
10
+ 0.22Z
12
) +W
3
(0.60Z
4
+ 2.25Z
6
+ 3.30Z
8
+
2.25Z
10
+ 0.60Z
12
) +W
4
(0.41Z
4
+ 2.63Z
6
+ 4.71Z
8
+ 2.07Z
10
+ 1.73Z
12
+
0.30Z
14
+ 0.15Z
16
) +W
5
(0.19Z
4
+ 1.23Z
6
+ 3.54Z
8
+ 5.18Z
10
+ 3.79Z
12
+
0.99Z
14
+ 0.08Z
16
) +W
6
(0.02Z
4
+ 0.69Z
6
+ 5.43Z
8
+ 8.30Z
10
+ 3.55Z
12
) +
W
7
(4.23Z
8
+ 2.42Z
10
+ 0.35Z
12
) +W
9
Z
12
The bit WEF is given by:
B
PC
(X) = 0.60X
7
+ 0.41X
8
+ 2.43X
9
+ 3.55X
10
+ 4.53X
11
+ 6.29X
12
+ 5.79X
13
+ 7.73X
14
10.02X
15
+ 10.02X
16
+ 6.20X
17
+ 3.85X
18
+ 1.33X
19
+ 0.15X
20
+ 1.08X
21
16.10 Redrawing the encoder block diagram and the IRWEF state diagram for the reversed generators, we
see that the state diagram is essentially the same except that W and Z are switched. Thus, we can
use equation (16.41) for the new IRWEF with W and Z reversed.
A(W, Z, L) = L
3
W
2
Z
3
+L
4
W
4
Z
2
+L
5
(W
4
Z
3
+W
2
Z
4
) +L
6
(2W
4
Z
3
+W
4
Z
4
) +L
7
(W
2
Z
5
+
2W
4
Z
4
+W
4
Z
5
+W
6
Z
2
) +L
8
(W
4
Z
5
+ 3W
4
Z
4
+ 2W
4
Z
5
+ 2W
6
Z
3
) +L
9
(W
2
Z
6
+
3W
4
Z
5
+ 2W
4
Z
6
+W
4
Z
7
+ 3W
6
Z
3
+ 3W
6
Z
4
).
After dropping all terms of order larger than L
9
, the singleerror event enumerators are obtained as
follows:
A
(1)
2,3
= Z
3
A
(1)
2,5
= Z
4
A
(1)
2,7
= Z
5
A
(1)
2,9
= Z
6
A
(1)
4,4
= Z
2
A
(1)
4,5
= Z
3
A
(1)
4,6
= 2Z
3
+Z
4
A
(1)
4,7
= 2Z
4
+Z
5
A
(1)
4,8
= 3Z
4
+ 2Z
5
+Z
6
A
(1)
4,9
= 3Z
5
+ 2Z
6
+Z
7
A
(1)
6,7
= Z
2
A
(1)
6,8
= 2Z
3
A
(1)
6,9
= 3Z
3
+ 2Z
4
The doubleerror event IRWEF is
A
2
(W, Z, L) = [A(W, Z, L)]
2
= L
6
W
4
Z
6
+ 2L
7
W
6
Z
5
+L
8
(2W
4
Z
7
+ 2W
6
Z
6
+W
8
Z
4
) +L
9
(6W
6
Z
6
+ 2W
6
Z
7
+
2W
8
Z
5
) +. . .
Dropping all terms of order greater than L
9
gives the doubleerror event enumerators A
(2)
2,
(Z):
A
(2)
4,6
= Z
6
A
(2)
4,8
= 2Z
7
A
(2)
6,7
= 2Z
5
A
(2)
6,8
= 2Z
6
A
(2)
6,9
= 6Z
6
+ 2Z
7
A
(2)
8,8
= Z
4
A
(2)
8,9
= 2Z
5
10
Following the same procedure, the tripleerror event IRWEF is given by A
(3)
(W, Z, L) = [A(W, Z, L)]
3
=
L
9
W
6
Z
9
+. . ., and the tripleerror event enumerator is given by A
(3)
6,9
(Z) = Z
9
.
Before ﬁnding the CWEF’s we need to calculate h
max
. Notice that there are no doubleerror events of
weight less than 4 and that the only tripleerror event has weight 6. Also notice that, for the terminated
encoder, odd input weights don’t appear. So for weight 2, h
max
= 1. For weight 4 and 8, h
max
= 2.
For weight 6, h
max
= 3. Now we can use equations (16.37) and (16.39) to ﬁnd the CWEF’s as follows:
A
2
(Z) = c[3, 1]A
(1)
2,3
(Z) +c[5, 1]A
(1)
2,5
(Z) +c[7, 1]A
(1)
2,7
(Z) +c[9, 1]A
(1)
2,9
(Z)
= 3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 5Z
4
+Z
6
A
4
(Z) = c[4, 1]A
(1)
4,4
(Z) +c[5, 1]A
(1)
4,5
(Z) +c[6, 1]A
(1)
4,6
(Z) +c[7, 1]A
(1)
4,7
(Z) +c[8, 1]A
(1)
4,8
(Z) +
c[9, 1]A
(1)
4,9
(Z) +c[6, 2]A
(2)
4,6
(Z) +c[8, 2]A
(2)
4.8
(Z)
= 6Z
2
+ 13Z
3
+ 16Z
4
+ 10Z
5
+ 14Z
6
+ 7Z
7
A
6
(Z) = c[7, 1]A
(1)
6,7
(Z) +c[8, 1]A
(1)
6,8
(Z) +c[9, 1]A
(1)
6,9
(Z) +C[6, 2]A
(2)
6,7
(Z) +c[8, 2]A
(2)
6,8
(Z) +
c[9, 2]A
(2)
6,9
(Z) +c[9, 3]A
(3)
6,9
(Z)
= 3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 3Z
4
+ 12Z
5
+ 12Z
6
+ 2Z
7
+Z
9
A
8
(Z) = c[8, 2]A
(2)
8,8
(Z) +c[9, 2]A
(2)
8,9
(Z)
= 3Z
4
+ 2Z
5
A quick calculation shows that the CWEF’s include a total of 127 nonzero codewords, the correct
number for an (18,7) code.
The IRWEF and WEF are given by:
A(W, Z) = W
2
(3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 5Z
4
+Z
6
) +W
4
(6Z
2
+ 13Z
3
+ 16Z
4
+ 10Z
5
+ 14Z
6
+ 7Z
7
) +
W
6
(3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 3Z
4
+ 12Z
5
+ 12Z
6
+ 2Z
7
+Z
9
) +W
8
(3Z
4
+ 2Z
5
)
A(X) = 3X
4
+ 7X
5
+ 11X
6
+ 13X
7
+ 20X
8
+ 17X
9
+ 17X
10
+ 20X
11
+ 15Z
12
+ 4X
13
+X
15
This convolutional code has minimum distance 4, one less than for the code of Example 6.6. As in the
example, we must modify the concept of the uniform interleaver because we are using convolutional
constituent codes. Therefore, note that for weight 2, there are 16 valid input sequences. For weight 4,
there are 66. For weight 6, there are 40, and for weight 8, there are 5. For all other weights, there are
no valid input sequences.
11
The CWEF’s of the (27,7) PCCC can be found as follows:
A
PC
2
(Z) = (3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 5Z
4
+Z
6
)
2
/16
= 0.56Z
4
+ 2.62Z
5
+ 4.94Z
6
+ 4.37Z
7
+ 1.94Z
8
+ 0.87Z
9
+ 0.62Z
10
+ 0.06Z
12
A
PC
4
(Z) = (6Z
2
+ 13Z
3
+ 16Z
4
+ 10Z
5
+ 14Z
6
+ 7Z
7
)
2
/66
= 0.55Z
4
+ 2.36Z
5
+ 5.47Z
6
+ 8.12Z
7
+ 10.36Z
8
+ 11.63Z
9
+ 11.06Z
10
+ 7.65Z
11
5.09Z
12
+ 2.97Z
13
+ 0.74Z
14
A
PC
6
(Z) = (3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 3Z
4
+ 12Z
5
+ 12Z
6
+ 2Z
7
+Z
9
)
2
/40
= 0.22Z
4
+ 1.05Z
5
+ 1.67Z
6
+ 2.85Z
7
+ 6.22Z
8
+ 6.3Z
9
+ 6.1Z
10
+ 7.65Z
11
+
5.15Z
12
+ 1.35Z
13
+ 0.7Z
14
+ 0.6Z
15
+ 0.1Z
16
+ 0.02Z
18
A
PC
8
(Z) = (3Z
4
+ 2Z
5
)
2
/5
= 1.8Z
8
+ 2.4Z
9
+ 0.8Z
10
16.11 As noted in Problem 16.10, odd input weights do not appear. For weight 2, h
max
= 1 and equation
(16.55) simpliﬁes to
A
PC
2
(Z) = 2[A
(1)
2
(Z)]
2
and B
PC
2
(Z) =
4
K
[A
(1)
2
(Z)]
2
.
For weight 4 and 8, h
max
= 2, so we have
A
PC
4
(Z) = 6[A
(2)
4
(Z)]
2
and B
PC
4
(Z) =
24
K
[A
(2)
4
(Z)]
2
.
A
PC
8
(Z) =
10080
K
4
[A
(2)
8
(Z)]
2
and B
PC
4
(Z) =
80640
K
5
[A
(2)
8
(Z)]
2
.
For weight 6, h
max
= 3, so
A
PC
6
(Z) = 20[A
(3)
6
(Z)]
2
and B
PC
6
(Z) =
120
K
[A
(3)
6
(Z)]
2
.
Including only these terms in the approximate IRWEF’s for the PCCC gives
A(W, Z) = 2W
2
[A
2
(Z)]
2
+ 6W
4
[A
4
(Z)]
2
+ 20W
6
[A
6
(Z)]
2
+
10080W
8
K
4
[A
8
(Z)]
2
≈ 2W
2
[A
2
(Z)]
2
+ 6W
4
[A
4
(Z)]
2
+ 20W
6
[A
6
(Z)]
2
B(W, Z) =
4W
2
K
[A
2
(Z)]
2
+
24W
4
K
[A
4
(Z)]
2
+
120W
6
K
[A
6
(Z)]
2
+
80640W
8
K
5
[A
8
(Z)]
2
≈
4W
2
K
[A
2
(Z)]
2
+
24W
4
K
[A
4
(Z)]
2
+
120W
6
K
[A
6
(Z)]
2
.
12
The approximate CWEF’s from the previous problem are:
A
2
(Z) ≈ 3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 5Z
4
+Z
6
A
4
(Z) ≈ 6Z
2
+ 13Z
3
+ 16Z
4
+ 10Z
5
+ 14Z
6
+ 7Z
7
A
6
(Z) ≈ 3Z
2
+ 7Z
3
+ 3Z
4
+ 12Z
5
+ 12Z
6
+ 2Z
7
+Z
9
A
8
(Z) ≈ 3Z
4
+ 2Z
5
.
Now we obtain the approximate IRWEF’s as:
A(W, Z) ≈ 2W
2
Z
4
(3 + 7Z + 5Z
2
+Z
4
)
2
+ +6W
4
Z
4
(6 + 13Z + 16Z
2
+ 10Z
3
+ 14Z
4
+ 7Z
5
)
2
+
20W
6
Z
4
(3 + 7Z + 3Z
2
+ 12Z
3
+ 12Z
4
+ 2Z
5
+Z
7
)
2
B(W, Z) ≈ (4W
2
Z
4
(3 + 7Z + 5Z
2
+Z
4
)
2
+ 24W
4
Z
4
(6 + 13Z + 16Z
2
+ 10Z
3
+ 14Z
4
+ 7Z
5
)
2
+
120W
6
Z
4
(3 + 7Z + 3Z
2
+ 12Z
3
+ 12Z
4
+ 2Z
5
+Z
7
)
2
)/K
and the approximate WEF’s are given by:
A
PC
(X) ≈ 18X
6
+ 84X
7
+ 374X
8
+ 1076X
9
+ 2408X
10
+ 4084X
11
+ 5464X
12
+ 6888X
13
+
9362X
14
+ 8064X
15
+ 6896X
16
+ 7296X
17
+ 4414X
18
+ 1080X
19
+ 560X
20
+
480X
21
+ 80X
22
+ 20X
24
B
PC
(X) ≈ 36X
6
/K + 168X
7
/K + 1180X
8
/K + 4024X
9
/K + 9868X
10
/K + 17960X
11
/K +
24496X
12
/K + 32112X
13
/K + 47404X
14
/K + 42336X
15
/K + 37344X
16
/K +
41424X
17
/K + 25896X
18
/K + 6480X
19
/K + 3360X
20
/K + 2880X
21
/K +
480X
22
/K + 120X
24
/K
16.13 First constituent encoder: G
(1)
ff
(D) = [1 +D +D
2
1 +D
2
]
Second constituent encoder: G
(2)
ff
(D) = [1 1 +D +D
2
]
For the ﬁrst constituent encoder, the IOWEF is given by
A
C
1
(W, X, L) = WX
5
L
3
+W
2
L
4
(1 +L)X
6
+W
3
L
5
(1 +L)
2
X
7
+. . . ,
and for the second one the IRWEF can be computed as
A
C
2
(W, Z, L) = WZ
3
L
3
+W
2
Z
2
L
4
+W
2
Z
4
L
5
+. . . ,
The eﬀect of uniform interleaving is represented by
A
PC
w
(X, Z) =
A
C
1
w
(X) ∗ A
C
2
w
(Z)
_
K
w
_
13
and for large K, this can be approximated as
A
PC
w
(X, Z) ≈
1≤ h
1
≤ h
max
1≤ h
2
≤ h
max
c[h
1
]c[h
2
]
_
K
w
_ A
(h
1
)
w
(X)A
(h
2
)
w
(Z),
where A
(h
1
)
w
(X) and A
(h
2
)
w
(Z) are the conditional IO and IR herror event WEF’s of the nonsystematic
and systematic constituent encoders, C
1
and C
2
, respectively. With further approximations, we obtain
A
PC
w
(X, Z) ≈
w!
h
1max!
h
2max!
K
(h
1max
+h
2max
−w)
A
(h
1max
)
w
(X)A
(h
2max
)
w
(Z)
and
B
PC
w
(X, Z) ≈
w
K
A
PC
w
(X, Z).
Going directly to the large K case, for any input weight w, w ≥ 1, h
max
= w, since the weight 1 single
error event can be repeated w times. It follows that
A
(w)
w
(X) = X
5w
, w ≥ 1
and
A
(w)
w
(Z) = Z
3w
, w ≥ 1.
Hence
A
PC
w
(X, Z) ≈
w!
w!w!
K
(w+w−w)
X
5w
Z
3w
=
K
w
w!
X
5w
Z
3w
and
B
PC
w
(X, Z) ≈
K
(w−1)
(w − 1)!
X
5w
Z
3w
.
Therefore
A
PC
(W, X) ≈
1≤w≤K
W
w
K
w
w!
X
8w
= KWX
8
+
K
2
2
W
2
X
16
+
K
6
3
W
3
X
24
−. . . ,
B
PC
(W, X) ≈ WX
8
+KW
2
X
16
+
K
2
2
W
3
X
24
+. . . ,
the average WEF’s are
14
A
PC
(X) = KX
8
+
K
2
2
X
16
+
K
3
6
X
24
+. . . ,
B
PC
(X) = X
8
+KX
16
+
K
2
2
X
24
+. . . ,
and the free distance of the code is 8.
16.14 The encoder and augmented modiﬁed state diagram for this problem are shown below:
S
0 S
2
S
0
S
3
S
1
LWZ
LW
LWZ
LW L
LZ
LZ
(a) (b)
(a) Encoder and (b) Augmented Modiﬁed State Diagram for G(D) =
1+D+D
2
1+D
Note that in order to leave from and return to state S
0
(i.e., terminating a K −2 bit input sequence),
an even overallinput (including termination bits) weight is required. Examination of the state diagram
reveals 6 paths that contain overallinput weight W < 6 (“· · ·” means an indeﬁnite loop around S
3
):
Path Function
{S
0
, S
1
, S
2
, S
0
} L
3
W
2
Z
3
{S
0
, S
1
, S
2
, S
1
, S
2
, S
0
} L
5
W
4
Z
4
{S
0
, S
1
, S
3
, · · · , S
3
, S
2
, S
0
}
L
4
W
2
Z
2
1−ZL
{S
0
, S
1
, S
2
, S
1
, S
3
, · · · , S
3
, S
2
, S
0
}
L
6
W
4
Z
3
1−ZL
{S
0
, S
1
, S
3
, · · · , S
3
, S
2
, S
1
, S
2
, S
0
}
L
6
W
4
Z
3
1−ZL
{S
0
, S
1
, S
3
, · · · , S
3
, S
2
, S
1
, S
3
, · · · , S
3
, S
2
, S
0
}
L
7
W
4
Z
2
(1−ZL)
2
resulting in the single error event IRWEF for W < 6 of
A
(1)
(W, Z, L) = L
3
W
2
Z
3
+L
5
W
4
Z
4
+
L
4
W
2
Z
2
+ 2L
6
W
4
Z
3
1 −ZL
+
L
7
W
4
Z
2
(1 −ZL)
2
,
and for both W < 6 and L < 10,
15
A
(1)
(W, Z, L) = L
3
W
2
Z
3
+L
5
W
4
Z
4
+
_
5
n=0
L
4+n
W
2
Z
2+n
_
+
_
2
3
n=0
L
6+n
W
4
Z
3+n
_
+
_
2
n=0
(n + 1)L
7+n
W
4
Z
2+n
_
.
The IRWEF for double error events for W < 6 is then
A
(2)
(W, Z, L) = [A
(1)
(W, Z, L)]
2
= L
6
W
4
Z
6
+
2L
7
W
4
Z
5
1 −ZL
+
L
8
W
4
Z
4
(1 −ZL)
2
,
and for both W < 6 and L < 10,
A
(2)
(W, Z, L) = L
6
W
4
Z
6
+
_
2
2
n=0
L
7+n
W
4
Z
5+n
_
+
_
1
n=0
(n + 1)L
8+n
W
4
Z
4+n
_
.
Thus the single and doubleerror event enumerators for W < 6 and L < 10 are
A
(1)
2,3
(Z) = Z
3
A
(1)
2,4+n
(Z) = Z
2+n
A
(1)
4,5
(Z) = Z
4
A
(1)
4,6+n
(Z) = 2Z
3+n
A
(1)
4,7
(Z) = Z
2
A
(1)
4,8
(Z) = 2Z
3
A
(1)
4,9
(Z) = 3Z
4
A
(2)
4,6
(Z) = Z
6
A
(2)
4,7+n
(Z) = 2Z
5+n
A
(2)
4,8
(Z) = Z
4
A
(2)
4,9
(Z) = 2Z
5
,
and thus, up to Z
7
,
A
(1)
2
(Z) = Z
3
+
Z
2
1 −Z
= Z
3
+
K−4
n=0
Z
2+n
= Z
2
+ 2Z
3
+Z
4
+Z
5
+Z
6
+Z
7
+ · · · +Z
n
+ · · ·
A
(2)
4
(Z) = Z
6
+
2Z
5
1 −Z
+
Z
4
(1 −Z)
2
= Z
6
+ 2
K−7
n=0
Z
5+n
+
K−8
n=0
(n + 1)Z
4+n
= Z
4
+ 4Z
5
+ 6Z
6
+ 6Z
7
+ · · · + (n − 1)Z
n
+ · · · .
The multiple turbo code, as shown in Figure 16.2, contains 3 encoders, and it is assumed that the
interleavers are uniformly distributed, the block size K is large, and the code uses the same constituent
encoders. Assume that a particular input sequence of weight w enters the ﬁrst encoder, generating
the parity weight enumerator A
PC
w
(Z). Then, by the deﬁnition of the uniform interleaver, the second
and third encoders will generate any of the weights in A
PC
w
(Z) with equal probability. The codeword
CWEF of this (4K, K − 2) terminated multiple turbo code is given by
A
PC
w
(Z) =
_
h
max
h
1
=1
c[h
1
, w]A
(h
1
)
w
(Z)
__
h
max
h
2
=1
c[h
2
, w]
_
K
w
_
−1
A
(h
2
)
w
(Z)
__
h
max
h
3
=1
c[h
3
, w]
_
K
w
_
−1
A
(h
3
)
w
(Z)
_
=
h
max
h
1
=1
h
max
h
2
=1
h
max
h
3
=1
_
K
w
_
−2
c[h
1
, w] c[h
2
, w] c[h
3
, w] A
(h
1
)
w
(Z) A
(h
2
)
w
(Z) A
(h
3
)
w
(Z) ,
16
where h
max
is the maximum number of error events for the particular choice of w and c[h, w] =
_
K −h +w
w
_
. With K h and K w, c[h, w] ≈
_
K
h
_
≈
K
h
h!
, and h
max
=
w
2
. These
approximations, along with keeping only the highest power of K, i.e., the term corresponding to
h
1
= h
2
= h
3
= h
max
, result in the codeword CWEF
A
PC
w
(Z) ≈
(w!)
2
(h
max
!)
3
K
(3h
max
−2w)
_
A
(h
max
)
w
(Z)
_
3
and the bit CWEF
B
PC
w
(Z) =
w
K
A
PC
w
(Z) ≈
w (w!)
2
(h
max
!)
3
K
(3h
max
−2w−1)
_
A
(h
max
)
w
(Z)
_
3
.
Then, for w < 6, the approximate IRWEF’s for this PCCC are
A
PC
(W, Z) ≈
5
w=2
W
w
A
PC
w
(Z) and B
PC
(W, Z) ≈
5
w=2
W
w
B
PC
w
(Z),
and the WEF’s are A
PC
(X) = A
PC
(X, X) and B
PC
(X) = B
PC
(X, X). From the above,
_
A
(1)
2
(Z)
_
3
= Z
9
+
3Z
8
1 −Z
+
3Z
7
(1 −Z)
2
+
Z
6
(1 −Z)
3
= Z
6
+ 6Z
7
+ 15Z
8
+ 23Z
9
+ 30Z
10
+ 39Z
11
+ · · · +
_
n
2
− 3n − 10
2
_
Z
n
+ · · ·
and
_
A
(2)
4
(Z)
_
3
= Z
18
+
6Z
17
1 −Z
+
15Z
16
(1 −Z)
2
+
20Z
15
(1 −Z)
3
+
16Z
14
(1 −Z)
4
+
6Z
13
(1 −Z)
5
+
Z
12
(1 −Z)
6
= Z
12
+ 12Z
13
+ 66Z
14
+ 226Z
15
+ 561Z
16
+ 1128Z
17
+ 1995Z
18
+ 3258Z
19
+
5028Z
20
+ · · · +
_
−21720 − 7046n + 3015n
2
− 155n
3
− 15n
4
+n
5
120
_
Z
n
+ · · · .
(a) Using the above, the approximate CWEF’s up to Z
14
are
A
PC
2
(Z) ≈
4
K
_
A
(1)
2
(Z)
_
3
=
4
K
Z
6
+
24
K
Z
7
+
60
K
Z
8
+
92
K
Z
9
+
120
K
Z
10
+
156
K
Z
11
+
196
K
Z
12
+
240
K
Z
13
+
288
K
Z
14
+ · · · + 2
_
n
2
−3n−10
K
_
Z
n
+ · · ·
A
PC
4
(Z) ≈
72
K
2
_
A
(2)
4
(Z)
_
3
≈
72
K
2
Z
12
+
864
K
2
Z
13
+
4752
K
2
Z
14
+ · · ·
A
PC
3
(Z) = A
PC
5
(Z) = 0
B
PC
2
(Z) =
2
K
_
A
PC
2
(Z)
¸
≈
8
K
2
Z
6
+
48
K
2
Z
7
+
120
K
2
Z
8
+
184
K
2
Z
9
+
240
K
2
Z
10
+
312
K
2
Z
11
+
392
K
2
Z
12
+
480
K
2
Z
13
+
576
K
2
Z
14
+ · · · + 4
_
n
2
−3n−10
K
2
_
Z
n
+ · · ·
B
PC
4
(Z) =
4
K
_
A
PC
4
(Z)
¸
≈
288
K
3
Z
12
+
3456
K
3
Z
13
+
19008
K
3
Z
14
+ · · ·
B
PC
3
(Z) = B
PC
5
(Z) = 0
17
(b) Using the above, the approximate IRWEF’s up to W
5
and Z
14
are
A
PC
(W, Z) ≈ W
2
_
4
K
Z
6
+
24
K
Z
7
+
60
K
Z
8
+
92
K
Z
9
+
120
K
Z
10
+
156
K
Z
11
+
196
K
Z
12
+
240
K
Z
13
+
288
K
Z
14
+ · · · + 2
_
n
2
−3n−10
K
_
Z
n
+ · · ·
_
+
W
4
_
72
K
2
Z
12
+
864
K
2
Z
13
+
4752
K
2
Z
14
+ · · ·
¸
and
B
PC
(W, Z) ≈ W
2
_
8
K
2
Z
6
+
48
K
2
Z
7
+
120
K
2
Z
8
+
184
K
2
Z
9
+
240
K
2
Z
10
+
312
K
2
Z
11
+
392
K
2
Z
12
+
480
K
2
Z
13
+
576
K
2
Z
14
+ · · · + 4
_
n
2
−3n−10
K
2
_
Z
n
+ · · ·
_
+
W
4
_
288
K
3
Z
12
+
3456
K
3
Z
13
+
19008
K
3
Z
14
+ · · ·
¸
(c) Using the above, the approximate WEF’s up to X
14
, neglecting any higher power of K terms, are
A
PC
(X) ≈
4
K
X
8
+
24
K
X
9
+
60
K
X
10
+
92
K
X
11
+
120
K
X
12
+
156
K
X
13
+
196
K
X
14
+ · · ·
and
B
PC
(X) ≈
8
K
2
X
8
+
48
K
2
X
9
+
120
K
2
X
10
+
184
K
2
X
11
+
240
K
2
X
12
+
312
K
2
X
13
+
392
K
2
X
14
+ · · ·
(d) The union bounds on the BER and WER for K = 10
3
and K = 10
4
, assuming a binary input,
unquantized output AWGN channel are shown below. The plots were created using the loose bounds
WER ≤ A
PC
(X)
¸
¸
¸
¸
X=e
−
RE
b
N
0
and BER ≤ B
PC
(X)
¸
¸
¸
¸
X=e
−
RE
b
N
0
where R = 1/4 is the code rate and
E
b
N
0
is the SNR.
10
2
10
3
10
1
10
4
10
5
10
6
10
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
     N = 1000
______ N = 10000
E
b
/N
0
(dB)
(a) Word Error Rate
18
E
b
/N
0
(dB)
(b) Bit Error Rate
10
5
10
6
10
4
10
7
10
8
10
9
10
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
     N = 1000
______ N = 10000
16.15 (a)
_
1
1
1+D
_
i. Weight 2
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D.
Corresponding parity weight = 1.
In a PCCC (rate 1/3) we therefore have (assuming a similar input after interleaving):
Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 1 + 1 = 2; Total weight = 4.
ii. Weight 3
For this encoder a weight 3 input does not terminate the encoder and hence is not possible.
(b)
_
1
1+D
2
1+D+D
2
_
i. Weight 2
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D
3
.
Corresponding parity weight = 4.
In a PCCC we therefore have:
Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 10.
ii. Weight 3
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D +D
2
.
Corresponding parity weight = 2.
In a PCCC we therefore have:
Information weight = 3; Parity weight = 2 + 2 = 4; Total weight = 7.
(c)
_
1
1+D
2
+D
3
1+D+D
3
_
i. Weight 2
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D
7
.
Corresponding parity weight = 6.
In a PCCC we therefore have:
Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 6 + 6 = 12; Total weight = 14.
19
ii. Weight 3
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D +D
3
.
Corresponding parity weight = 4.
In a PCCC we therefore have:
Information weight = 3; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 11.
(d)
_
1
1+D+D
2
+D
4
1+D
3
+D
4
_
i. Weight 2
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D
15
.
Corresponding parity weight = 10.
In a PCCC we therefore have:
Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 10 + 10 = 20; Total weight = 22.
ii. Weight 3
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D
3
+D
4
.
Corresponding parity weight = 4.
In a PCCC we therefore have:
Information weight = 3; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 11.
(e)
_
1
1+D
4
1+D+D
2
+D
3
+D
4
_
i. Weight 2
Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 +D
5
.
Corresponding parity weight = 4.
In a PCCC we therefore have:
Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 10.
ii. Weight 3
For this encoder a weight 3 input does not terminate the encoder and hence is not possible.
In all cases the input weight two sequence gives the free distance codeword for large K.
16.16 For a systematic feedforward encoder, for input weight w, the single error event for input weight 1 can
occur w times. Therefore h
max
, the largest number of error events associated with a weight w input
sequence, is equal to w. That is, the maximum number of error events produced by a weight w input
sequence occurs by repeating the single error event for input weight 1 w times. Thus,
A
(w)
w
(Z) = [A
(1)
1
(Z)]
w
.
This is not true for feedback encoders. Feedback encoders require at least a weight 2 input sequence
to terminate. Thus, for an input sequence of weight 2w, h
max
= w, i.e., we have a maximum of w error
events. This occurs when an error event caused by a weight 2 input sequence is repeated w times (for
a total input weight of 2w).
Therefore
A
2w
(w)
(Z) = [A
Z
(1)
(Z)]
w
.
20
m
0
m
1
m
2
u
v
(())
V
(2)
V
(n1)
V
(1)
Q
m
1
16.19 An (n, 1, v) systematic feedback encoder can be realized by the following diagram:
In the ﬁgure, the dashed lines indicate potential connections that depend on the encoder realization.
It can be seen from the encoder structure that the register contents are updated as
m
i,t
= m
i−1,t−1
, i = 1, 2, . . . , v − 1
and
m
0,t
= m
v−1,t−1
+u
t
+
v−2
i=0
a
i
m
i,t−1
,
where t is the time index, u
t
represents the input bit at time t, and the coeﬃcients a
i
depend on the
particular encoder realization. When the encoder is in state S
2
v−1 = (0 0 . . . 1) at time t −1, it follows
from the given relations that
m
i,t
= m
i−1,t−1
= 0, i = 1, 2, . . . , v − 1
and
m
0,t
= m
v−1,t−1
+u
t
+
v−2
i=0
a
i
m
i,t−1
= 1 +u
t
.
Thus if the input bit u
t
= 1, the ﬁrst memory position at time t is also 0, and the encoder is in the
allzero state.
16.20 For the primitive encoder D with G
p
(D) =
_
1
D
4
+D
2
+D+1
D
4
+D
3
+1
_
, the shortest terminating weight 2 input
sequence is
u(D) = 1 +D
2
4
−1
= 1 +D
15
,
21
which generates the parity sequence
v(D) = (1 +D
3
+D
4
+D
6
+D
8
+D
9
+D
10
+D
11
)(D
4
+D
2
+D + 1)
= 1 +D +D
2
+D
3
+D
4
+D
8
+D
11
+D
12
+D
14
+D
15
.
Thus
Z
min
= 10
and
d
eff
= 2 + 2 Z
min
= 2 + 2 × 10 = 22.
For the nonprimitive encoder E with G
np
(D) =
_
1
D
4
+1
D
4
+D
3
+D
2
+D+1
_
, the shortest terminating weight
2 input sequence is u(D) = 1 +D
5
, which generates the parity sequence
v(D) = (D + 1)(D
4
+ 1) = 1 +D +D
4
+D
5
.
Thus Z
min
= 4 and d
eff
= 2 + 2Z
min
= 10.
Chapter 20
20.1 If an (n, k) code C is designed to correct all the bursts of length l or less and simultaneously to
detect all the bursts of length d or less with d ≥ l, then no burst of length l + d or less can be
a codeword. Suppose there is a burst x of length l +d or less that is a codeword in C. We can
decompose this burst x into two bursts y and z such that: (1) x = y + z; (2) the length of y
is l or less and the length of z is d or less. Since the code is designed to correct all the bursts
of length l or less, y must be a coset leader in a standard array for the code. Since y +z = x
is codeword, then z must be in the same coset as y. As a results, z has the same syndrome as
y. In this case, if z occurs as an error burst during the transmission of a codeword in C, then
y will be taken as the error burst for correction. This will result in an incorrect decoding and
hence the decoder will fail to detect z which contradicts to the fact that the code is designed
to correct all the bursts of lengths l or less and simultaneously to detect all the bursts of length
d or less with d ≥ l. Therefore, a burst of length l + d or less can not be a codeword. Then it
follows from Theorem 20.2 that n −k ≥ l + d.
20.2 An errortrapping decoder is shown in Figure P20.2.
Gate 1 Buffer Register Gate 2
+
Gate 4
Gate 3
+
Syndrome Register
. . .
Test All 0’s
. . .
l stages
Figure P20.2 An errortrapping decoder.
The decoding operation is given below:
1
Step 1. The received polynomial r(x) is shifted into the buffer and syndrome registers simulta
neously with Gates 1 and 3 turned on and all the other gates turned off.
Step 2. As soon as the entire r(x) has been shifted into the syndrome register, the contents of the
syndrome form the syndrome S
(n−k)
(x) of r
(n−k)
(x). If the n −k −l leftmost stages of
the syndrome register contain all zeros, the error burst is conﬁned to the positions X
n−l
,
. . ., Xn −1. Gate 2 and Gate 4 are activated. The received information digits are read
out of the buffer register and connected by the error digits shifted out from the syndrome
register. If n −k −l leftmost stages of the syndrome register does not contain all zeros,
go to step 3.
Step 3. The syndrome register starts to shift with Gate 3 on. As soon as its n − k − l leftmost
stages contain only zeros, its l rightmost stages contain the bursterror pattern. The error
correction begins. there are three cases to be considered.
Step 4. If the n −k −l leftmost stages of the syndrome register contains all zeros after ith shift
0 < i ≤ 2k −n (Assume 2k −n ≥ 0, otherwise, no this step), the error burst is conﬁned
to positions X
n−i−1−l
, . . ., X
n−i−1
. In this event, Gate 2 is ﬁrst activated and the i high
position information digits are shifted out. Then Gate 4 is activated, the rest information
digits are read out and corrected by the error digit shifted out from the syndrome register.
Step 5. If the n − k − l leftmost stages of the syndrome register contains all zeros after the ith
shift k ≤ i ≤ n−l, the errors of the burst e(x) are conﬁned to the paritycheck positions
of r(x). In this event, the k received information digits in the buffer are error free. Gate
2 is activated and the k errorfree information digits in the buffer are shifted out to the
data sink.
Step 6. if the n−k−l leftmost stages of the syndrome register contains all zeros after (n−l+i)th
shift 0 < i < l, the error burst is conﬁned to positions X
n−i
, . . ., X
n−1
, X
0
, X
l−i−1
. In
this event, the l −i digits contained in the l −i rightmost stages of the syndrome register
match the errors at the paritycheck positions of r(X), and the i digits contained int the
next i stages of the syndrome register match the errors at the positions X
n−i
, . . ., X
n−1
of r(X). At this instant, a clock starts to count from (n − l + i + 1). The syndrome
register is then shifted with Gate 3 turned off. As soon as the clock has counted up to n,
the i rightmost digits in the syndrome register match the errors at the positions X
n−i
, . . .,
X
n−l
, X
n−1
of r(X). Gate 4 and Gate 2 are then activated. The received information
digits are read out of the buffer register and corrected by the error digits shifted out from
2
the syndrome register.
If the n − k − l stages of the syndrome never contain all zeros after all the steps above,
an uncorrectable burst of errors has been detected.
20.4 The generator polynomial of the desired Fire code is
g(X) = (X
2l−1
+ 1)p(X)
Since the code is designed to correct all the bursts of length 4 or less, l = 4. Hence
g(X) = (X
7
+ 1)(1 + X +X
4
) = 1 + X + X
4
+ X
7
+ X
8
+ X
11
.
Since p(X) is a primitive polynomial of degree 4, its period ρ is 2
4
− 1 = 15. Hence the
length of the code is n = LCM(7, 15) = 105. Since the degree of the generator polynomial
of the code is 11 which is the number of parity check digits of the code, the code is a (105, 94)
Fire code. The decoder of this code is shown in Figure P20.4.
+ + + + +
Test for all 0’s
Buffer Register
Gate 1
Gate 4
+
Gate 3
Gate 2
Output
Input r(x)
1 X X
4
X
7
X
8
X
11
Figure P20.4 A decoder for the (105, 94) Fire code.
3
20.5 The highspeed decoder for the (105, 94) Fire code designed in Problem 20.4 is shown in
Figure P20.5.
+
Error Pattern Register
Comparator test for a match Test for all 0’s
+ +
Buffer Register
r(X) Input
Error Location Register
Computation
for nq
Counter 1
Counter 2
Figure P20.5 A highspeed decoder for the (105, 94) Fire code.
20.6 We choose the second code given in Table 20.3 which is a (15, 9) code and capable of correct
ing any burst of length 3 or less. The bursterrorcorrecting efﬁciency z = 1. The generator
polynomial of this code is g(X) = 1 +X
3
+X
4
+X
5
+X
6
. Suppose we interleave this code
by a degree λ = 17. This results in a (255, 153) cyclic code that is capable of correcting any
single burst of length 51 or less and has bursterrorcorrecting efﬁciency z = 1. The generator
of this code is
g
(X) = g(X
17
) = 1 + X
51
+ X
68
+ X
85
+ X
102
.
A decoder for this code can be implemented with a deinterleaver and the decoder for the
(15, 9) code as shown in Figure P20.6. First the received sequence is deinterleaved and
arranged as a 17 × 15 array. Then each row of the array is decoded based on the base (15, 9)
code.
Deinterleaver
Buffer
Decoder C
Figure P20.6 A decoder for the (255, 153) bursterrorcorrecting code designed above.
20.7 A codeword in the interleaved code C
l
λ
is obtained by interleaving l codewords from the (n, k)
base code C. Let v
1
(X), v
2
(X), . . . , v
l
(X) be l codewords in C. Then the codeword in C
l
λ
4
obtained by interleaving these l codewords in C in polynomial form is
v(X) = v
1
(X
l
) + Xv
2
(X
l
) + X
2
v
3
(X
l
) + . . . + X
l−1
v
l
(X
l
).
Since v
i
(X) is divisible by g(X) for 1 ≤ i ≤ l, v
i
(X
l
) is divisible by g(X
l
). Therefore v(X)
is divisible by g(X
l
). The degree of g(X
l
) is (n − k)l. Since g(X
l
) is a factor of X
ln
+ 1,
g(X
l
) generates a (ln, lk) cyclic code.
20.8 In order to show that the Burton code is capable of correcting all phased bursts conﬁned to
a single subblock of m digits, it is necessary and sufﬁcient to prove that no two such bursts
are in the same coset of a standard array for the code. Let X
mi
A(X) and X
mj
B(X) be the
polynomial representations of two bursts of length l
1
and l
2
with l
1
≤ m and l
2
≤ m conﬁned
to ith and jth subblocks (0 ≤ i ≤ σ, 0 ≤ j ≤ σ), respectively, where
A(X) = 1 + a
1
X + . . . + a
l
1
−2
X
l
1
−2
+ X
l
1
−1
,
and
B(X) = 1 + b
1
X +. . . +b
l
2
−2
X
l
2
−2
+ X
l
2
−1
.
Suppose X
mi
A(X) and X
mj
B(X) are in the same coset. Then V(X) = X
mi
A(X) +
X
mj
B(X) must be a code polynomial and divisible by the generator polynomial g(X) =
(X
m
+ 1)p(X). Assume mj ≥ mi, then mj −mi = qm and
V(X) = X
mi
(A(X) +B(X)) + X
mi
B(X)(X
qm
+ 1).
Since X
m
− 1 is a factor of the generator g(X), V(X) must be divisible by X
m
− 1. Note
that X
qm
+ 1 is divisible by X
m
+ 1, and X
mi
and X
m
+ 1 are relatively prime. Since
V(X) and X
mi
B(X)(X
qm
+1) are divisible by X
m
+1, A(X) +B(X) must be divisible by
X
m
+ 1. However both degrees l
1
and l
2
of A(X) and B(X) are less than m, the degree of
A(X) +B(X) is less than m. Hence A(X) +B(X) is not divisible by X
m
+1. For V(X) to
be divisible by X
m
+ 1, A(X) and B(X) must be identical, i.e., A(X) = B(X). Therefore,
V(X) = X
mi
B(X)(X
qm
+ 1).
5
Since the degree of B(X) is less than m, B(X) and p(X) must be relatively prime. Also X
mi
and p(X) are relatively prime. Since V(X) is assumed to be a code polynomial, X
qm
+ 1
must be divisible by both p(X) and X
m
− 1. This implies that X
qm
+ 1 is divisible by
(X
m
+ 1)p(X) and qm must be a multiple of n = σm. This is not possible, since q = j − i
is less than σ. Therefore V(X) can not be a code polynomial and the bursts X
mi
A(X) and
X
mi
B(X) can not be in the same coset. Consequently, all the phased bursts conﬁned to a
single subblock of m digits are in different cosets of a standard array for the Burton code
generated by (X
m
+ 1)p(X) and they are correctable.
20.9 Choose p(X) = 1 +X
2
+X
5
which is a primitive polynomial with period ρ = 2
5
−1 = 31.
Then generator polynomial of the Burton code C with m = 5 is
g(X) = (X
m
+ 1)p(X) = 1 + X
2
+ X
7
+ X
10
.
The length of the code is n = LCM(31, 5) = 155. Hence the code is a (155, 145) code
that is capable of correcting any phased burst conﬁned to a single subblock of 5 digits. If the
code is interleaved to a degree λ = 6, we obtain a (930, 870) code C
6
generated by g(X
6
) =
1 + X
12
+X
42
+X
60
. This code is capable of correcting any burst of length 5 ×5 + 1 = 26
or less.
20.10 From Table 9.3, code (164, 153) has burstcorrectingcapability l = 4. If it is interleaved to
degree λ = 6, then λn = 6 × 164 = 984, λk = 6 × 153 = 918, and λl = 6 × 4 = 24. The
interleaved code is a (984, 918) code with bursterrorcorrecting capability 24.
The interleaved Burton code of Problem 20.9 is a (930, 870) code with bursterrorcorrecting
capability 26. The bursterrorcorrecting efﬁciency of the (984, 918) code is
z =
2λl
λn −λk
=
48
984 −918
=
8
11
.
The efﬁciency of the interleave Burton code of Problem 20.9 is
z
=
2[(λ −1)m + 1]
2λm
=
52
60
=
13
15
.
Therefore, z
≥ z. The interleaved Burton code is more powerful and efﬁcient.
6
20.11 The (15, 7) BCH code has random errorcorrecting capability 2. Interleaving this code to a
degree 7, we obtain a (105, 49) cyclic code that is capable of correcting any combination of
two random bursts, each of length 7 or less. Of course, it is capable of correcting any single
burst of length 14 or less. In decoding, a received sequence is deinterleaved and arranged into
a 7 ×15 array. Each row of the array is decoded based on the (15, 7) BCH code.
20.12 If each symbol of the (31, 15) RS code over GF(2
5
) is replaced by its corresponding 5bit
byte, we obtain a (155, 75) binary code. Since the (31, 15) RS code is capable of correcting
8 or fewer random symbol errors, the binary (155, 75) code is capable of correcting: (1) any
single burst of length (8 −1) ×5 + 1 = 36 or less; or (2) correcting any combination random
bursts that result in 8 or fewer random symbol errors for the (31, 15) RS code.
20.13 From Problem 20.4, the generator polynomial
g(X) = 1 + X + X
4
+ X
7
+ X
8
+X
11
generates a (105, 94) Fire code. If it is shortened by deleting the 15 highorder message digits,
it becomes a (90, 79) code.
Dividing X
n−k+15
= X
26
by g(X), we obtain a remainder ρ(X) = X
10
+X
8
+X
5
+X
3
+X.
Then a decoder for the (105, 94) shortened Fire code is shown in Figure P20.13
Test for all 0’s
Gate 1
Buffer Register
Gate 2
Gate 4
Gate 3
Output
1 x
x x
3
x
4
x
5
x
7
x
8
x
8
x
11
Figure P20.13 A decoder for the (90, 79) Fire code.
20.14 Let α be a primitive element of the Galois ﬁeld GF(2
6
). The order of α is 2
6
−1 = 63 and the
minimal polynomial of α is
Φ(X) = 1 + X + X
6
.
7
Since 63 = 7 ×9, we can factor X
63
+ 1 as follows:
X
63
+ 1 = (X
7
+ 1)(1 + X
7
+ X
14
+ X
21
+ X
28
+ X
35
+ X
42
+ X
49
+ X
56
).
The code generated by the polynomial
g
1
(X) = (X
7
+ 1)(1 + X + X
6
)
is a Fire code of length 63 which is capable of correcting any single error burst of length 4
or less. Let g
2
(X) be the generator polynomial of the doubleerrorcorrecting BCH code of
length 63. From Table 6.4, we ﬁnd that
g
2
(X) = (1 + X + X
6
)(1 + X + X
2
+ X
4
+ X
6
).
The least common multiple of g
1
(X) and g
2
(X) is
g(X) = (1 + X
7
)(1 + X + X
6
)(1 + X + X
2
+ X
4
+ X
6
).
Hence, g(X) generates a (63, 44) cyclic code which is a modiﬁed Fire code and is capable of
correcting any single error burst of length 4 or less as well as any combination of two or fewer
random errors.
8
integers a and b such that a · + b · λ = 1, where a and λ are also relatively prime. Dividing a by λ, we obtain a = kλ + r with 0 ≤ r < λ. (2) (1)
Since a and λ are relatively prime, r = 0. Hence 1≤r<λ Combining (1) and (2), we have · r = −(b + k ) · λ + 1 Consider
r ·r −(b+k )·λ
1·
i=1 i=1
1 =
i=1 λ
1=
i=1 −(b+k )
+1 1) + 1
i=1
= (
i=1
1)(
= 0 + 1 = 1. Hence, every nonzero sum has an inverse with respect to the multiplication operation of GF(q). Since the nonzero sums are elements of GF(q), they obey the associative and commutative laws with respect to the multiplication of GF(q). Also the sums satisfy the distributive law. As a result, the sums form a ﬁeld, a subﬁeld of GF(q). 2.8 Consider the ﬁnite ﬁeld GF(q). Let n be the maximum order of the nonzero elements of GF(q) and let α be an element of order n. It follows from Theorem 2.9 that n divides q − 1, i.e. q − 1 = k · n. Thus n ≤ q − 1. Let β be any other nonzero element in GF(q) and let e be the order of β. 2
Suppose that e does not divide n. Let (n, e) be the greatest common factor of n and e. Then e/(n, e) and n are relatively prime. Consider the element β (n,e) This element has order e/(n, e). The element αβ (n,e) has order ne/(n, e) which is greater than n. This contradicts the fact that n is the maximum order of nonzero elements in GF(q). Hence e must divide n. Therefore, the order of each nonzero element of GF(q) is a factor of n. This implies that each nonzero element of GF(q) is a root of the polynomial X n − 1. Consequently, q − 1 ≤ n. Since n ≤ q − 1 (by Theorem 2.9), we must have n = q − 1. Thus the maximum order of nonzero elements in GF(q) is q1. The elements of order q − 1 are then primitive elements. 2.11 (a) Suppose that f (X) is irreducible but its reciprocal f ∗ (X) is not. Then f ∗ (X) = a(X) · b(X) where the degrees of a(X) and b(X) are nonzero. Let k and m be the degrees of a(X) and b(X) respectivly. Clearly, k + m = n. Since the reciprocal of f ∗ (X) is f (X), f (X) = X n f ∗ ( 1 1 1 ) = X k a( ) · X m b( ). X X X
This says that f (X) is not irreducible and is a contradiction to the hypothesis. Hence f ∗ (X) must be irreducible. Similarly, we can prove that if f ∗ (X) is irreducible, f (X) is also irreducible. Consequently, f ∗ (X) is irreducible if and only if f (X) is irreducible. 3
Since both i and j are less than e. · · · . Then there exists a positive integer k less than 2n − 1 such that f ∗ (X) divides X k + 1.15 We only need to show that β. Suppose that i j β2 = β2 for 0 ≤ i. Let X k + 1 = f ∗ (X)q(X). we have X k + 1 = X k f ∗( 1 1 )q( ) X X 1 1 = X n f ∗ ( ) · X k−n q( ) X X 1 = f (X) · X k−n q( ). j−i −1 i Since the order β is a factor of 2m − 1. Consequently f ∗ (X) is primitive if and only if f (X) is primitive. Similarly. Taking the reciprocals of both sides of the above equality. if f ∗ (X) is primitive. Hencef ∗ (X) must be also primitive. (β 2 j−i −1 )2 = 1.(b) Suppose that f (X) is primitive but f ∗ (X) is not. β 2 . j < e and i < j. 2. X This implies that f (X) divides X k + 1 with k < 2n − 1. 4 . j − i < e. This is contradiction to the fact that the e is the smallest nonnegative integer such that β2 e −1 = 1. it must be odd. β 2 e−1 are distinct. we must have i = 1. Then. This is a contradiction to the hypothesis that f (X) is primitive. f (X) must also be primitive. For (β 2 β2 j−i −1 )2 = 1.
Then (β 2 )n = 1 Hence (β n )2 = 1. 2. we conclude that n = n.21 Note that 0 · v = 0. (3) i i i (2) Since 0 is the additive identity of the vector space. Adding −(c · v) to both sides of the above equality. n and 2i are relatively prime.16 Let n be the order of β 2 . From(1). we have c · v + [−(c · v)] = c · 0 + c · v + [−(c · v)] 0 = c · 0 + 0.20 Note that c · v = c · (0 + v) = c · 0 + c · v. 2. j < e. (−c + c) · v = 0 5 . Then for any c in F . i i i i j (1) Since the order n of β is odd. we then have c · 0 = 0. Hence n= n From (2) and (3). 2. Now consider (β 2 )n = (β n )2 = 1 This implies that n (the order of β 2 ) divides n.Hence β 2 = β 2 for 0 ≤ i. we see that n divides n and n = kn.
c · (−v + v) = 0 c · (−v) + c · v = 0.(−c) · v + c · v = 0. Then. Hence (−c) · v is the additive inverse of c · v.20). Let u be any element in S. u + v is in S and (ii) for any c in F and u in S. i. 0 f or c·u= u f or c=0 c=1 Clearly c · u is also in S. Let c be an element in GF(2). 2. the proof that GF(2m ) is 6 .24 If the elements of GF(2m ) are represented by mtuples over GF(2). The ﬁrst condition is now given. i. It follows from the given condition that u+u=0 is also in S.e.22.22 By Theorem 2. S is a subspace if (i) for any u and v in S.e. −(c · v) = (−c) · v Since c · 0 = 0 (problem 2. for any u in S. we obtain −(c · v) = (−c) · v = c · (−v) (2) (1) 2. we only have to show that the second condition is implied by the ﬁrst condition for F = GF (2). c · u is in S. Hence S is a subspace. −(c · v) = c · (−v) From (1) and (2). Hence c · (−v) is the additive inverse of c · v.
Again. u + v ∈ S1 and u + v ∈ S2 . It follows from Theorem 2. for any c in the ﬁeld F . since S1 and S2 are subspaces.u + v is in S1 ∩ S2 . Then x ∈ S1 . Now let x be any vector in S1 ∩ S2 .27 Let u and v be any two elements in S1 ∩ S2 . It is clear the u and v are elements in S1 . c · x is in S1 and also in S2 . Since S1 and S2 are subspaces. and x ∈ S2 . 7 . Hence. 2.a vector space over GF(2) is then straightforward. Hence c · v is in the intersection.22 that S1 ∩ S2 is a subspace. and u and v are elements in S2 . S1 ∩ S2 .
Hence the row space of H1 has dimension n − k + 1. the third and the sixth columns sum to zero. The last row of H1 has a 1 at its ﬁrst position but other rows of H1 have a 0 at their ﬁrst position. The dimension of its null space. Any linear combination including the last row of H1 will never yield a zero vector. 8 . C1 . k) linear code. Extend v by adding a digit v∞ to its left. However. 3. the minimum distance of the code is 4. Hence. and no two columns are alike. the ﬁrst. Thus no two columns sum to zero and any three columns sum to a 4tuple with odd number of ones. Thus all the rows of H1 are linearly independent. The inner product of a vector with odd weight and the allone vector is 1 . C1 consists of only evenweight code words. for any odd weight vector v. First we note that the n − k rows of H are linearly independent.Chapter 3 3. Then v · HT = 0. Therefore. is then equal to dim(C1 ) = (n + 1) − (n − k + 1) = k Hence C1 is an (n + 1. Therefore. the second. v · HT = 0 1 and v cannot be a code word in C1 . It is clear that the ﬁrst (n − k) rows of H1 are also linearly independent. (b) Note that the last row of H1 is an allone vector.1 The generator and paritycheck matrices are: 0 1 1 1 1 1 G= 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 H= 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 From the paritycheck matrix we see that each column contains odd number of ones.4 (a) The matrix H1 is an (n − k +1) × (n + 1) matrix. (c) Let v be a code word in C.
Ce  = Co . these 2k code words are all the code words of C1 . there are 2k such code words. 3. The dimension of C1 is k.e. Thus. v0 . 9 (2) . we must require that v∞ = 1 if the vector v has odd weight and v∞ = 0 if the vector v has even weight. we obtain a set Co of odd weight code words. vn−1 ). · · · . The number of vectors in Ce is equal to the number of vectors in Co . The number of vectors in Co is equal to the number of vectors in Ce and Co ⊆ Co Hence Ce  ≤ Co  From (1) and (2). v) = (v∞ . Let x be any oddweight code vector from Co . v1 . v1 = (v∞ . any vector v1 formed as above is a code word in C1 . 1 First we note that the inner product of v1 with any of the ﬁrst n − k rows of H1 is 0. Adding x to each vector in Co . Therefore. i.This results in a vector of n + 1 digits. Also Ce ⊆ Ce . For v1 to be a vector in C1 . For this sum to be zero. we obtain a set of Ce of even weight vector. we conclude that Co  = Ce . we must require that v1 HT = 0.5 Let Ce be the set of code words in C with even weight and let Co be the set of code words in C with odd weight. The inner product of v1 with the last row of H1 is v∞ + v0 + v1 + · · · + vn−1 . Co  ≤ Ce  (1) Now adding x to each vector in Ce .
Let x and y be any two code words in S0 . Clearly. S1  = S0  and S1 ⊆ S1 . This implies that the th column of the code array consists 2k−1 zeros and 2k−1 ones. we see that S0 consists of 2k−1 code words.we obtain S1  ≤ S0 .3. Adding x to each vector in S0 .6 (a) From the given condition on G. (b) Consider the th column of the code array. The dimension of S0 is k − 1. we see that. From (3) and (4) . From part (a) we see that this column contains at least one 1 . From part (b). Since S0 is a subset of C. we obtain a set S1 of code words with a 1 at the th position. Therefore no column in the code array contains only zeros. Let S0 be the code words with a 0 at the th position and S1 be the codewords with a 1 at the th position. This row is a code word in C. (2) (1) Adding x to each vector in S1 . we obtain a set of S0 of code words with a 0 at the th location. From (1) and (2). (c) Let S0 be the set of code words with a 0 at the th position. (6) (5) (4) (3) From (5) and (6) we have S0  = S1 . Therefore S0 is a subspace of the vector space of all ntuples over GF(2). The sum x + y also has a zero at the th location and hence is code word in S0 . there is a row in G with a nonzero component at that position. We see that S0  = S1  and S0 ⊆ S0 . for any digit position. it is a subspace of C. 10 . each column contains at least one nonzero entry. Let x be a code word from S1 . Hence in the code array. we obtain S0  ≤ S1 .
3. it will not be mistaken as y.7 Let x. Hence. y) + d(y. It follows from the theorem 3.8 From the given condition. the rightmost k positions). they are correctable. This is impossible since the minimum weight of the code is dmin . It follows from (1) that w(x + y) + w(y + z) ≥ w(x + y + y + z) = w(x + z). It is easy to see that w(u) + w(v) ≥ w(u + v). z). 3. Suppose that x and y are in the same coset. The weight of this code word is w(x + y) ≤ w(x) + w(y) ≤ + λ < dmin . (1) 3. d(x. Let u = x + y and v = y + z. Hence x and y are in different cosets. d(y. we see that λ < dmin −1 2 . every nonzero code vector has at least one nonzero component in its information section (i. Therefore x is detectable. As a result. y) = w(x + y). Then x + y is a nonzero code word. y and z be any three ntuples over GF(2).e. z) ≥ d(x. Note that d(x. In order to show that any error pattern of or fewer errors is detectable. z) = w(y + z). 11 .11 In a systematic linear code. From the above inequality. z) = w(x + z).5 that all the error patterns of λ or fewer errors can be used as coset leaders in a standard array. we have d(x. we need to show that no error pattern x of or fewer errors can be in the same coset as an error pattern y of λ or fewer errors. Hence a nonzero vector that consists of only zeros in its rightmost k position can not be a code word in any of the systematic code in Γ. when x occurs.
There are n n n + + ··· + 0 1 t 12 . Consider a matrix of the following form which has v as its ith row: p01 p00 p10 p11 . . . v1 . · · · .5 that all the vectors of weight t or less can be used as coset leaders. . pk−1. v2 )] ≥ d1 + d2 . vn−1 ) with at least one nonzero component in its k rightmost positions. v2 ).n−k−1 1 0 0 1 0 0 ··· 0 0 ··· 0 0 ··· ··· vn−k vn−k+1 · 0 0 · · ··· vn−1 0 · 1·· ··· 0 0 0 0 ··· 1 By elementary row operations.. . we can put G into systematic form G1 . hence w[(v1 . .1 ··· ··· p0. 3. Hence v is contained in 2(k−1)(n−k) codes in Γ. 0 or 1.0 pi+1. Since each pij has 2 choices.Now consider a nonzero vector v = (v0 . .n−k−1 p1.n−k−1 . . v0 v1 pi+1. Since w(v1 ) ≥ d1 and w(v2 ) ≥ d2 .n−k−1 . i.say vn−k+i = 1 for 0 ≤ i < k.1 . 3.e. The code generated by G1 contains v as a code word.0 pk−1.13 The generator matrix of the code is G = [P1 = [G1 Ik G2 ] P2 Ik ] Hence a nonzero codeword in C is simply a cascade of a nonzero codeword v1 in C1 and a nonzero codeword v2 in C2 . .15 It follows from Theorem 3. vn−k−1 pi+1. there are 2(k−1)(n−k) matrices G with v as the ith row. pk−1. Each can be put into systematic form G1 and each G1 generates a systematic code containing v as a code word. (v1 .
17 The number of nonzero vectors of length n and weight d − 1 or less is d−1 i=1 n i From the result of problem 3. M < N implies 13 . Hence (2k − 1) · dmin ≤ n · 2k−1 This implies that dmin ≤ n · 2k−1 . Note that each nonzero code word has weight (ones) at least dmin . we must have 2n−k ≥ n n n + + ··· + . each column of this code array contains 2k−1 zeros and 2k−1 ones. each of these vectors is contained in at most 2(k−1)(n−k) linear systematic codes. 0 1 t Taking logarithm on both sides of the above inequality. there exists at least one code with minimum weight at least d. we obtain the Hamming bound on t. Since there are 2n−k cosets.11. The total number of linear systematic codes is N = 2(k(n−k) If M < N . Thus the total number of ones in the array is n · 2k−1 . 2k − 1 3. 1 t 3. From problem 6(b). Therefore there are at most d−1 M =2 (k−1)(n−k) i=1 n i linear systematic codes contain nonzero codewords of weight d − 1 or less.such vectors.16 Arrange the 2k code words as a 2k × n array. n − k ≥ log2 {1 + n n + ··· + }.
that 2 (k−1)(n−k) d−1 i=1 d−1 n i < 2k(n−k) i=1 n i < 2(n−k) . the ﬁrst inequality garantees the existence of a systematic linear code with minimum distance dmin . 14 .17. 3.18 Let dmin be the smallest positive integer such that dmin −1 i=1 n i dmin < 2(n−k) ≤ i=1 n i From problem 3.
s1 = r1 + r4 + r5 + r9 + r10 + r11 + r13 + r14 . e2 = s0 s1 s2 s3 . s2 . r1 . . s3 ) with s0 = r0 + r4 + r7 + r8 + r10 + r12 + r13 + r14 . ¯ 15 . ¯¯¯ ¯ ¯¯ ¯¯ ¯ e3 = s0 s1 s2 s3 . s2 = r2 + r5 + r6 + r8 + r10 + r11 + r12 + r14 . ¯¯¯ ¯¯ ¯ ¯ . From the decoding table. s1 . .Chapter 4 4. we ﬁnd that e0 = s0 s1 s2 s3 . The syndrome of r is (s0 . . . . 11) Hamming code is 1 0 0 0 1 0 H= 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 Let r = (r0 . e14 = s0 s1 s2 s3 .1. r14 ) be the received vector. e13 = s0 s1 s2 s3 . e1 = s0 s1 s2 s3 . . e5 = s0 s1 s2 s3 . s3 = r3 + r6 + r7 + r9 + r11 + r12 + r13 + r14 .1 A paritycheck matrix for the (15. Set up the decoding table as Table 4. e4 = s0 s1 s2 s3 . .
.1: Decoding Table e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e7 e8 e9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 e11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 e12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 e13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 e14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 r0 r1 Buffer Register r14 .... . r0 e0 r1 e1 r2 e2 e14 r14 + + + + Decoded bits 16 ..s0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 s1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 s2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 s3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 e0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 e1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table 4... .. .. + s0 + s1 + s2 + s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 s0 s1 s2 s3 ..
it follows from (4) and (5) that Pu (E) ≤ 2−m . Let (a0 .3). Using (2) and (3) in (1). Since (1 − p)2 m −1 (5) ≥ 0. and (1 − 2−m ) ≥ 0.4.3) is 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 v0 1 v3 0 G= = v 0 2 0 v1 (1) The code generated by this matrix is a (8.3 From (4. 4. a2 . Note that 0 ≤ 1 − p ≤ 1 and 0 ≤ 1 − 2−m < 1. and 1 − (1 − p) · (1 − 2−m ) ≥ 0. (1) (2) (3) 2m−1 − (1 − p)2 m −1 {(1 − 2−m )(1 − p) − 1} (4) m −1 {(1 − (1 − p)(1 − 2−m )}. 4) code with minimum distance 4. Clearly 0 ≤ (1 − p) · (1 − 2−m ) < 1. a3 . we obtain the following inequality: Pu (E) ≤ 2−m + (1 − 2−m ) (1 − p)2 = 2−m + (1 − p)2 = 2−m − (1 − p)2 m −1 m−1 m−1 } − (1 − p)2 m −1 m −1 − (1 − p)2 . a1 ) 17 . the probability of an undetected error for a Hamming code is Pu (E) = 2−m {1 + (2m − 1)(1 − 2p)2 = 2−m + (1 − 2−m )(1 − 2p)2 Note that (1 − p)2 ≥ 1 − 2p.6 The generator matrix for the 1storder RM code RM(1.
r2 . b6 . r7 ) be the received vector. b3 = a0 + a2 + a1 . b3 . b5 = a0 + a3 + a1 . r5 . a2 = b0 + b2 = b1 + b3 = b4 + b6 = b5 + b7 . b2 . b6 = a0 + a3 + a2 . b5 . a0 = b0 = b1 + a1 = b2 + a2 = b3 + a2 + a1 = b4 + a3 = b5 + a3 + a1 = b6 + a3 + a2 = b7 + a3 + a2 + a1 . b2 = a0 + a2 . From (1) and (2). Let r = (r0 .be the message to be encoded. b7 = a0 + a3 + a2 + a1 . Then its corresponding codeword is b = (b0 . a2 and a3 are: (a1 ) A 1 = r0 + r1 A 2 = r2 + r3 A 3 = r4 + r5 A 4 = r6 + r7 (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (2) (3) (a2 ) B1 = r0 + r2 B2 = r1 + r3 B3 = r4 + r6 B4 = r5 + r7 (0) (0) (0) (0) (a3 ) C1 = r0 + r4 C2 = r1 + r5 C3 = r2 + r6 C4 = r3 + r7 (0) (0) 18 . From (3). r3 . b4 . b1 . The checksum for decoding a1 . a3 = b0 + b4 = b1 + b5 = b2 + b6 = b3 + b7 . r4 . b7 ) = a0 v0 + a3 v3 + a2 v2 + a1 v1 . r6 . r1 . b4 = a0 + a3 . we ﬁnd that a1 = b0 + b1 = b2 + b3 = b4 + b5 = b6 + b7 . b1 = a0 + a1 . we ﬁnd that b0 = a0 .
1. . respectively. Therefore. m − 1)}. a1 . (3) C1 = 0. 4. To decode a0 . m − 1) = {v(f ) : f (X1 . X1 . m − 1) codes are given as follows (from (4. r4 . B4 = 0. For decoding (01000101). 0 and 0. Then a0 is equal to the value taken by the majority of the bits in r(1) . the decoded message is (0001). Then 19 . C3 = 0. the four checksum for decoding a1 . X2 + X3 . RM (r − 1. . A4 = 1. X2 .38)): RM (r. X1 + X3 . a2 and a3 are: (1) A1 = 1. . X3 . r6 . m − 1) and RM(r − 1. m − 1)}. 1 + X2 . we decode a0 to 0. C2 = 0.14 RM (1. m − 1) = {v(g) : g(X1 . A2 = 0. . r7 ). X2 . a2 and a3 . 3) = { 0. C4 = 1. X2 . . Xm−1 ) ∈ P(r. From the bits of r(1) . r1 . X1 + X2 + X3 . A3 = 1. 1 + X3 . 1 + X1 + X3 . . 1 + X1 + X2 + X3 }.After decoding a1 . r3 . . (2) B1 = 0. 1 + X2 + X3 . r2 . (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (0) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) 4. 1 + X1 + X2 . Xm−1 ) ∈ P(r − 1. B2 = 1. a2 and a3 are decoded as 1. B3 = 0. Based on these checksums. r5 . X1 + X2 . we form r(1) = (01000101) − a1 v1 − a2 v2 − a3 v3 = (00010000). we form r(1) = r − a1 v1 − a2 v2 − a3 v3 = (r0 .15 The RM(r. 1 + X1 . .
. . . . .RM(r. X2 . X2 . m)={v(h) : h = f (X1 . m − 1)}. Xm−1 ) with f ∈ P(r. . 20 . Xm−1 ) + Xm g(X1 . . . m − 1) and g ∈ P(r − 1.
the corresponding code vector consists of all 1 s. g(X) must divide the polynomial X n−1 + X n−2 + · · · + X + 1. (c) First. we note that no X i is divisible by g(X). Therefore. the code has a minimum weight at least 3. hence it can not be divisible by g(X) if g(X) has (X + 1) as a factor.7 (a) Note that X n + 1 = g(X)h(X). Therefore.Chapter 5 5. However. Note that g(X) and X i are relatively prime. Hence. no code word with weight one. Since g(X) and X i are relatively prime. v(X) = X i + X j with 0 ≤ i < j < n. j − i < n. (b) The polynomial X n + 1 can be factored as follows: X n + 1 = (X + 1)(X n−1 + X n−2 + · · · + X + 1) Since g(X) divides X n + 1 and since g(X) does not have X + 1 as a factor. 5. This code word must be of the form. This contradicts the fact that n is the smallest integer such that g(X) divides X n + 1. Then X n (X −n + 1) = X n g(X −1 )h(X −1 ) 21 . Now. Hence our hypothesis that there exists a code vector of weight 2 is invalid. Since v(X) is a code word. Therefore 1 + X + · · · + X n−2 + X n−1 is a code polynomial. it must be divisible by g(X). the code contains no code vectors of odd weight.6 (a) A polynomial over GF(2) with odd number of terms is not divisible by X + 1. g(X) must divide the polynomial X j−i +1. Put v(X) into the following form: v(X) = X i (1 + X j−i ). suppose that there is a code word v(X) of weight 2.
a(X) and g(X) respectively. Since v∗ (X) and v(X) have the same weight. We know that C1 is a subcode of C and C1 consists all the evenweight code vectors of C as all its code vectors. C ∗ and C have the same weight distribution. Thus the weight enumerator A1 (z) of C1 should consists of only the evenpower terms of A(z) = Hence A1 (z) = j=0 n/2 n i=0 Ai z i . we see that the reciprocal v∗ (X) of a code polynomial in C is a code polynomial in C ∗ . k) cyclic codes generated by g(X) and g∗ (X) respectively. we obtain X n−1 v(X −1 ) = X k−1 a(X −1 ) X n−k g(X −1 ) Note that X n−1 v(X −1 ). Thus. Let v(X) = v0 + v1 X + · · · + vn−1 X n−1 be a code polynomial in C. we can show the reciprocal of a code polynomial in C ∗ is a code polynomial in C. We see that g∗ (X) is factor of X n + 1. Similarly. v∗ (X) = a∗ (X)g∗ (X).e. Replacing X by X −1 and multiplying both sides of above equality by X n−1 . where h∗ (X) is the reciprocal of h(X). (b) Let C and C ∗ be two (n. v(X) = a(X)g(X). X k−1 a(X −1 ) and X n−k g(X −1 ) are simply the reciprocals of v(X). Then v(X) must be a multiple of g(X). A2j z 2j (1) Consider the sum A(z) + A(−z) = n n Ai z + i=0 i=0 i Ai (−z)i 22 . i.1 + X n = X n−k g(X −1 ) X k h(X −1 ) = g∗ (X)h∗ (X).8 Let C1 be the cyclic code generated by (X + 1)g(X). Therefore.. (1) From (1). k) cyclic code. g∗ (X) generates an (n. 5.
Then e1 (X) + e2 (X) should be a code polynomial and is divisible by g(X) = (X + 1)p(X). 23 . p(X) should divide X i (X j−i + 1). Suppose that e1 (X) and e2 (X) are in the same coset. Therefore p(X) must divide X j−i + 1. if e(X) is detectable.12 Note that e(i) (X) is the remainder resulting from dividing X i e(X) by X n + 1. From (1). we see that if e(X) is not divisible by g(X). We see that z i + (−z)i = 0 if i is odd and that z i + (−z)i = 2z i if i is even. 5. we obtain A1 (z) = 1/2 [A(z) + A(−z)] .10 Let e1 (X) = X i + X i+1 and e2 (X) = X j + X j+1 be two different doubleadjacenterror patterns such that i < j. This is not possible since j − i < 2m − 1 and p(X) is a primitive polynomial of degree m (the smallest integer n such that p(X) divides X n + 1 is 2m − 1). e(i) (X) is also detectable. Thus e1 (X) + e2 (X) can not be in the same coset. and g(X) and X i are relatively prime. Hence n/2 A(z) + A(−z) = j=0 2A2j z 2j (2) From (1) and (2). However p(X) and X i are relatively prime. then e(i) (X) is not divisible by g(X). Thus X i e(X) = a(X)(X n + 1) + e(i) (X) (1) Note that g(X) divides X n + 1. Therefore. Note that e1 (X) + e2 (X) = X i (X + 1) + X j (X + 1) = (X + 1)X i (X j−i + 1) Since g(X) divides e1 (X) + e2 (X).n = i=0 Ai z i + (−z)i . 5.
This is not possible since 0 < r < and is the smallest positive integer such that v( ) (X) = v(X). Clearly. Also we note that g(X) is a factor of X n + 1. Hence g(X) = φ1 (X) · φ2 (X) generates a cyclic code of length n = LCM (n1 . Hence v(X) is in both C1 and C2 .17 Let n be the order of β. . g(X) = φ1 (X) · φ2 (X) divides X n + 1. i. 5. v(X) is a multiple of g(X) = LCM (g1 (X).e. every root of p(X) is a root of v(X). Therefore. Hence v(X) is divisible by the least common multiple g(X) of g1 (X) and g2 (X). our hypothesis that does not divide n is invalid. Let n be the least common multiple of n1 and n2 . Since φ1 (X) and φ2 (X) are factors of X n + 1. 5. Note that v(n) (X) = v(k· +r) (X) = v(X) Since v( ) (X) = v(X). Thus the code 24 (2) (1) 0<r< .e. 5. g2 (X)). hence must divide n. β1 and β2 are roots of X n + 1. i. Then v(X) is divisible by both g1 (X) and g2 (X). Hence φ(X) generates a cyclic code of length n. 5. v(k· ) (X) = v(X) From (1) and (2). Since φ1 (X) and φ2 (X) are relatively prime. It follows from Theorem 2. Then β n = 1. Hence v(X) is a code polynomial in the Hamming code generated by p(X). and β is a root of X n + 1. n = LCM (n1 . Suppose v(X) is a binary polynomial of degree 2m − 2 or less that has α as a root.5. we have v(r) (X) = v(X). any polynomial of degree n − 1 or less that is a multiple of g(X) is divisible by g1 (X) and g2 (X).19 Since every code polynomial v(X) is a multiple of the generator polynomial p(X). Consider X n + 1. Conversely. n2 ).20 Let v(X) be a code polynomial in both C1 and C2 .18 Let n1 be the order of β1 and n2 be the order of β2 . n2 ). Thus v(X) has α and its conjugates as roots.14 that v(X) is divisible by the minimal polynomial p(X) of α.14 Suppose that does not divide n. It follows from Theorem 2.14 that φ(X) is a factor of X n + 1. Then n = k · + r.
we note that X 2 m −1 + 1 = p∗ (X)h∗ (X). Suppose that v(i) (X) = v(X). Equating w. However p(X) and v(X) are relatively prime. This is not possible since 0 < i < 2m − 1 and p(X) is a primitive polynomial(the smallest positive integer n such that p(X) divides X n + 1 is n = 2m − 1). we have w = 2m−1 . It follows from (5. 25 . v(i) (X) = v(X) is invalid. The code C3 generated by g(X) has minimum distance d3 ≥ max(d1 . we have (X i + 1)v(X) = a(X)(X 2 Since p(X) divides X 2 m −1 m −1 m −1 + 1) + v(i) (X) m −1 + 1) + v(X) + 1).polynomials common to C1 and C2 form a cyclic code of length n whose generator polynomial is g(X) = LCM (g1 (X).21 See Problem 4. These 2m − 1 nonzero code polynomial have the same weight. + 1. Therefore our hypothesis that. Now we arrange the 2m code words in Cd as an 2m × (2m − 1) array. 5. 5. Thus the total nonzero components in the array is 2m−1 · (2m − 1). Since the roots of X 2 m −1 + 1 are the 2m − 1 nonzero elements in GF(2m ) which are all distinct. g2 (X)). d2 ).1) that X i v(X) = a(X)(X 2 = a(X)(X 2 Rearranging the above equality. for 0 < i < 2m − 1. and v(i) (X) = v(X). a code polynomial v(X) and its 2m − 2 cyclic shifts form all the 2m − 1 nonzero code polynomials in Cd .6(b) that every column in this array has exactly 2m−1 nonzero components. p∗ (X) and h∗ (X) are relatively prime. it must divide (X i + 1)v(X). It follows from Problem 3. v(X) can not be divisible by p(X) (otherwise v(X) is divisible by p∗ (X)h∗ (X) = X 2 m −1 +1 and has degree at least 2m − 1). (b) From part (a). Since every code polynomial v(X) in Cd is a polynomial of degree 2m − 2 or less.3. Hence p(X) divides X i + 1.(2m − 1) to 2m−1 · (2m − 1).22 (a) First. The total number of nonzero components in the code words of Cd is w·(2m −1). say w.
for three errors not conﬁned to 10 consecutive positions. If we ﬁx i. we must have j − i + 1 > 10. e(X) = X i + X j where j > i. 15 − (j − i) + 1 > 10. the only solutions for j and k are j = 5 + i and k = 10 + i. Therefore any double errors are conﬁned to 10 consecutive positions and can be trapped. Simplifying the above inequalities. we obtain j−i>9 j − i < 6. Hence. e(X) = X i + X j + X k . where 0 ≤ i < j < k ≤ 14.25 (a) Any error pattern of double errors must be of the form. If the two errors are not conﬁned to n − k = 10 consecutive positions. If these three errors can not be trapped. the error pattern must be of the following form e(X) = X i + X 5+i + X 10+i 26 . This is impossible. we must have k−i>9 j−i<6 k − j < 6.5. (b) An error pattern of triple errors must be of the form.
There are a total of 23 error patterns of double errors that can not be trapped. e1 (X) = X i + X 12+i . α1 = 23 . 5. Therefore. e(X) = X i + X j where 0 ≤ i < j < 23. Hence. we obtain 10 < j − i < 13 For a ﬁxed i. 5. for a doubleerror pattern that can not be trapped. we must have j − i + 1 > 11 23 − (j − i − 1) > 11 From the above inequalities.27 The coset leader weight distribution is α0 = 1.26 (b) Consider a doubleerror pattern. α2 = 1 23 . If these two errors are not conﬁned to 11 consecutive positions. only 5 error patterns of triple errors can not be trapped. α3 = 2 23 3 α4 = α5 = · · · = α23 = 0 The probability of a correct decoding is P (C) = (1 − p)23 + 23 23 2 p(1 − p)22 + p (1 − p)21 1 2 27 . j has two possible solutions. j = 11+i and j = 12+i.for 0 ≤ i < 5. it must be either of the following two forms: e1 (X) = X i + X 11+i .
Suppose that these two error patterns are in the same cosets. Note that X i + X i+1 + X j + X j+1 = X i (X + 1)(X j−i + 1). Hence no two doubleadjacenterror patterns can be in the same coset.+ The probability of a decoding error is 23 3 p (1 − p)20 . where j > i.29(a) Consider two singleerror patterns. Now consider a singleerror pattern e1 (X) = X i and a doubleadjacenterror pattern e2 (X) = X j + X j+1 . e1 (X) = X i and e2 (X) = X j . This is impossible since j − i < n and n is the smallest positive integer such that p(X) divides X n + 1. This is not possible since g(X) has X + 1 as a factor. Consider two doubleadjacenterror patterns. all singleerror patterns can be used as coset leaders. 5. Then X i + X j must be divisible by g(X) = (X 3 + 1)p(X). Therefore. 3 P (E) = 1 − P (C). Suppose that e1 (X) and e2 (X) are in the same coset. however X i + X j + X j+1 does not have X + 1 as a factor. Suppose that these two error patterns are in the same coset. where j > i. Hence no singleerror pattern and a doubleadjacenterror pattern can be in the same coset. But X i + X j + X j+1 + X j+2 = X i + X j (1 + X + X 2 ) is not divisible by X 3 + 1 = (X + 1)(X 2 + X + 1). If these two error patterns are in the same coset. Then X i + X j + X j+1 must be divisible by g(X) = (X 3 + 1)p(X). Consequently. X j−i + 1 must be divisible by p(X). no singleerror pattern and a tripleadjacenterror pattern can be in the same coset.X i + X i+1 and X j + X j+1 where j > i. Then X i + X i+1 + X j + X j+1 must be divisible by (X 3 + 1)p(X). We see that for X i (X + 1)(X j−i + 1) to be divisible by p(X). This is again not possible since j − i < n. This implies that X j−i + 1 must be divisible by p(X). Consider a single error pattern X i and a tripleadjacenterror pattern X j + X j+1 + X j+2 . then X i + X j + X j+1 + X j+2 must be divisible by (X 3 + 1)p(X). Therefore no two singleerror patterns can be in the same coset. Now we consider a doubleadjacenterror pattern X i +X i+1 and a tripleadjacenterror pattern 28 .
Hence no two tripleadjacenterror patterns can be in the same coset. Then X i + X i+1 + X j + X j+1 + X j+2 = X i (X + 1) + X j (X 2 + X + 1) must be divisible by (X 3 +1)p(X). hence by p(X). Hence a doubleadjacenterror pattern and a tripleadjacenterror pattern can not be in the same coset. Summarizing the above results. Hence p(X) and (X 2 + X + 1) are relatively prime. Suppose that these two error patterns are in the same coset. If they are in the same coset. X i + X i+1 + X i+2 and X j + X j+1 + X j+2 . Note that the degree of p(X) is 3 or greater. This is not possible since X i +X i+1 +X j +X j+1 +X j+2 does not have X +1 as a factor but X 3 +1 has X +1 as a factor. p(X) must divide X j−i + 1. we see that all the single. 29 . As a result. doubleadjacent. then their sum X i (X 2 + X + 1)(1 + X j−i ) must be divisible by (X 3 + 1)p(X). Consider two tripleadjacenterror patterns. Again this is not possible.X j + X j+1 + X j+2 . and tripleadjacenterror patterns can be used as coset leaders.
Thus g0 (X) = LCM (φ1 (X). we ﬁnd that φ1 (X) = 1 + X 3 + X 4 The minimal polynomial of β 3 = α21 = α6 is φ3 (X) = 1 + X + X 2 + X 3 + X 4 . β 2 and β 4 have the same minimal polynomial φ1 (X).Chapter 6 6.1 (a) The elements β. From table 2. (b) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 β β β β β β β β β β 1 β β β β H= 1 β 3 β 6 β 9 β 12 β 15 β 18 β 21 β 24 β 27 β 30 β 33 β 36 β 39 β 42 H= 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 30 . . φ2 (X)) = (1 + X 3 + X 4 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 3 + X 4 ) = 1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 8.9.
2(a) Galois Field GF(25 ) with p(α) = 1 + α2 + α5 = 0 0 1 α α2 α3 α4 α5 = 1 + α2 (0 0 0 0 0) (1 0 0 0 0) (0 1 0 0 0) (0 0 1 0 0) (0 0 0 1 0) (0 0 0 0 1) (1 0 1 0 0) 31 .(c) The reciprocal of g(X) in Example 6.6.2(c) Table P.2(a).2 The table for GF (s5 ) with p(X) = 1 + X 2 + X 5 is given in Table P.6.6.2(b). The minimal polynomials of elements in GF (2m ) are given in Table P. The generator polynomials of all the binary BCH codes of length 31 are given in Table P.6.1 is X 8 g(X −1 ) = X 8 (1 + X −4 + X −6 + X −7 + X −8 = X 8 + X 4 + X 2 + X + 1 = g0 (X) 6.
6.2(a) Continued α 6 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = 1 + 1 1 1 + + 1 1 + 1 1 1 1 1 + + + + 1 1 + 1 α α2 + α α2 α2 α2 + α α α α α + α2 α2 α2 α2 α2 α2 + α2 α2 α2 + α3 + α4 α4 α4 α3 α3 + + (0 1 0 1 0) (0 0 1 0 1) (1 0 1 1 0) (0 1 0 1 1) (1 0 0 0 1) (1 1 1 0 0) α7 α8 α9 α10 α11 α12 α13 α14 α15 α16 α17 α18 α19 α20 α21 α22 α23 α24 α25 α26 α27 α28 α29 α30 + + α α + + + + + + + α3 α3 α3 α3 α3 + + + + + α4 α4 α4 α4 α4 (0 1 1 1 0) (0 0 1 1 1) (1 0 1 1 1) (1 1 1 1 1) (1 1 0 1 1) (1 1 0 0 1) (1 1 0 0 0) (0 1 1 0 0) + α3 α3 + + α4 α4 α4 α4 α4 α4 α4 (0 0 1 1 0) (0 0 0 1 1) (1 0 1 0 1) (1 1 1 1 0) + + + (0 1 1 1 1) (1 0 0 1 1) (1 1 1 0 1) (1 1 0 1 0) + (0 1 1 0 1) (1 0 0 1 0) + (0 1 0 0 1) + α α + + + + + α3 α3 α3 α3 α3 α α α + + + α2 + α 32 .Table P.
6. α30 . α19 α11 . α12 . α6 . The syndrome components of r1 (X) = X 7 + X 30 are: S1 = r1 (α) = α7 + α30 = α19 S2 = r1 (α2 ) = α14 + α29 = α7 S3 = r1 (α3 ) = α21 + α28 = α12 33 . α8 . α23 1 + X3 + X5 Table P.2(b) Conjugate Roots 1 α.6. α4 . α26 . α22 . α18 α7 .2. α20 . α14 . α25 . α27 .2(c) n 31 k 26 21 16 11 6 t 1 2 3 5 7 g(X) g1 (X) = 1 + X 2 + X 5 g2 (X) = φ1 (X)φ3 (X) g3 (X) = φ1 (X)φ3 (X)φ5 (X) g4 (X) = φ1 (X)φ3 (X)φ5 (X)φ7 (X) g5 (X) = φ1 (X)φ3 (X)φ5 (X)φ7 (X)φ11 (X) 6. α13 . α16 1 + X 1 + X2 + X5 1 + X2 + X3 + X4 + X5 1 + X 1 + X 1 + X + X2 + X4 + X5 + X2 + X3 + X5 + X3 + X4 + X5 φi (X) α3 .3 (a) Use the table for GF (25 ) constructed in Problem 6. α24 . α28 . α17 α5 .Table P. α2 . α21 α15 . α9 . α10 . α29 .
3(a) µ 1/2 0 1 2 σ (µ) (X) 1 1 1 + α19 X 1 + α19 X + α6 X 2 dµ 1 α19 α25 – µ 2µ − 1 0 µ 0 0 1 2 1(ρ = −1/2) 2(ρ = 0) Hence σ(X) = 1 + α19 X + α6 X 2 . The decoder decodes r1 (X) into r1 (X) + e(X) = 0. Hence the error location numbers are α−1 = α30 and α−24 = α7 . (b) Now we consider the decoding of r2 (X) = 1 + X 17 + X 28 .6. As a result.6. The error location polynomial σ(X) is found by ﬁlling Table P. we ﬁnd that σ(X) has α and α24 as roots.3(b): 34 . 2 S2 = S1 = α4 . 2 S4 = S2 = α8 . The syndrome components of r2 (X) are: S1 = r2 (α) = α2 .S4 = r1 (α4 ) = α28 + α27 = α14 The iterative procedure for ﬁnding the error location polynomial is shown in Table P. the error polynomial is e(X) = X 7 + X 30 .3(a) Table P. S3 = r2 (α3 ) = α21 .6. Substituting the nonzero elements of GF (25 ) into σ(X).
Let α be a primitive element in GF (22m ). β 2 .6. 6. β. β 2 .4 Let n = (2t + 1)λ. β 3 . α. Then (X n + 1) = (X λ + 1)(X 2tλ + X (2t−1)λ + · · · + X λ + 1 The roots of X λ + 1 are 1. α2(2t+1) . and hence r2 (X) cannot be decoded and must contain more than two errors. α2t are roots of the polynomial u(X) = 1 + X λ + X 2λ + · · · + X (2t−1)λ + X 2tλ . α2t+1 . α2 . · · · . · · · . The m +1 elements 1.Table P. 6. α(λ−1)(2t+1) . Let ψi (X) be the minimal . Hence. Note that 22m − 1 = (2m − 1) · (2m + 1). Then β = α(2 m −1) is an element of order 2m + 1. β 4 .5 Consider the Galois ﬁeld GF (22m ). · · · . Thus the code has minimum distance exactly 2t + 1. β 2m are all the roots of X 2 35 +1.3(b) µ 1/2 0 1 2 σ (µ) (X) 1 1 1 + α2 X 1 + α2 X + α28 X 2 dµ 1 α2 α30 – µ 2µ − 1 0 µ 0 0 1 2 1(ρ = −1/2) 2(ρ = 0) The estimated error location polynomial is σ(X) = 1 + α2 X + α28 X 2 This polynomial does not have roots in GF (25 ). This implies that u(X) is code polynomial which has weight 2t + 1.
7 and 21 respectively. β −1 .10 Use Tables 6. Consider u∗ (β i ) = β (n−1)i u(β −i ) Since u(β −i ) = 0 for −t ≤ i ≤ t. · · · . Then a terrorcorrecting nonprimitive BCH code of length n = 2m + 1 is generated by g(X) = LCM {ψ1 (X). Hence g(X) = ψ2 (X)ψ3 (X)ψ5 (X) The orders of β 2 . and the code is a doubleerrorcorrecting (21. The minimal polynomial for β 2 = α6 and β 4 = α12 is ψ2 (X) = 1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 . we see that u∗ (β i ) has β −t . 21). The minimal polynomial for β 3 = α9 is ψ3 (X) = 1 + X 2 + X 3 . A cyclic code is said to be reversible if u(X) is a code polynomial then u∗ (X) is also a code polynomial. ψ2 (X). β 0 . 6. 6.2 and 6. 7. · · · . ψ2t (X)} .polynomial of β i . β t as roots 36 .11 (a) Let u(X) be a code polynomial and u∗ (X) = X n−1 u(X −1 ) be the reciprocal of u(X). β 1 .6) BCH code. The minimal polynomial for β 5 = α15 is ψ5 (X) = 1 + X 2 + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 .3. Thus the length is n = LCM (21. β 3 and β 5 are 21. · · · .
Therefore u∗ (X) is a code polynomial. Thus β t+1 and β −(t+1) are also roots of the generator polynomial. Hence β t+1 is the conjugate of β (t+1)/2 and β −(t+1) is the conjugate of β −(t+1)/2 . It follows from the BCH bound that the code has minimum distance 2t + 4 (Since the generator polynomial has (2t + 3 consecutive powers of β as roots).and is a multiple of the generator polynomial g(X). 37 . t+1 is even. (b) If t is odd.
From the syndrome components of the received polynomial and the coefﬁcients of the error 1 .4.7. The error location polynomial is σ(X) = 1 + α9 X 3 . The generator polynomial of the tripleerrorcorrecting RS code over GF(25 ) is g(X) = (X + α)(X + α2 )(X + α3 )(X + α4 )(X + α5 )(X + α6 ) = α21 + α24 X + α16 X 2 + α24 X 3 + α9 X 4 + α10 X 5 + X 6 . S2 = r(α2 ) = α10 + α10 + α14 = α14 . and α12 . 7. Hence the error location numbers are α3 . S3 = r(α3 ) = α13 + α3 + α12 = α9 . S5 = r(α5 ) = α4 + α4 + α8 = α8 . α7 .2 The generator polynomial of the doubleerrorcorrecting RS code over GF(25 ) is g(X) = (X + α)(X + α2 )(X + α3 )(X + α4 ) = α10 + α29 X + α19 X 2 + α24 X 3 + X 4 . and α13 .4 The syndrome components of the received polynomial are: S1 = r(α) = α7 + α2 + α = α13 . α8 . S6 = r(α6 ) = α7 + α12 + α6 = α3 . S4 = r(α4 ) = α + α11 + α10 = α7 . The iterative procedure for ﬁnding the error location polynomial is shown in Table P. The roots of this polynomial are α2 .Chapter 7 7.
4 µ −1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 σ µ (X) 1 1 1 + α13 X 1 + αX 1 + α13 X + α10 X 2 1 + α14 X + α12 X 2 1 + α9 X 3 1 + α9 X 3 dµ 1 α13 α10 α7 α9 α8 0 − lµ 0 0 1 1 2 2 3 − µ − lµ −1 0 0 (take ρ = −1) 1 (take ρ = 0) 1 (take ρ = 1) 2 (take ρ = 2) 2 (take ρ = 3) − location polynomial. the error pattern is e(X) = α4 X 3 + α9 X 8 + α3 X 13 . The error values at the positions X 3 . σ (α−8 ) α (1 + α3 α−8 )(1 + α13 α−8 ) α −Z0 (α−13 ) α13 + α + α13 α = 13 = 13 = α3 . we ﬁnd the error value evaluator. 2 . −13 ) 3 α−13 )(1 + α8 α−13 ) σ (α α (1 + α α e8 = e13 = Consequently. and X 13 are: e3 = −Z0 (α−3 ) α13 + α11 + α3 α7 = 3 = 3 = α4 . X 8 . σ (α−3 ) α (1 + α8 α−3 )(1 + α13 α−3 ) α α13 + α6 + α8 α2 −Z0 (α−8 ) = 8 = 8 = α9 . and the decoded codeword is the allzero codeword.7. Z0 (X) = S1 + (S2 + σ1 S1 )X + (S3 + σ1 S2 + σ2 S1 )X 2 = α13 + (α14 + 0α13 )X + (α9 + 0α14 + 0α13 )X 2 = α13 + α14 X + α9 X 2 .Table P.
7. σ (α−8 ) α α (1 + α3 α−8 )(1 + α13 α−8 ) α α7 + α10 + α7 α10 −Z0 (α−13 ) = 9 13 = 7 = α3 . and α13 .7. σ (α−13 ) α α (1 + α3 α−13 )(1 + α8 α−13 ) α 3 e13 = . we ﬁnd that the error location numbers are α3 . and error values are −Z0 (α−3 ) α7 + α5 + α12 α e3 = = 9 3 = 12 = α4 .5 displays the steps of Euclidean algorithm for ﬁnding the error location and error value polynomials. σ (α−3 ) α α (1 + α8 α−3 )(1 + α13 α−3 ) α e8 = −Z0 (α−8 ) α7 + 1 + α2 α11 = 9 8 = 2 = α9 .5 i −1 0 1 2 3 (i) Z0 (X) q i (X) − − α2 + α12 X α12 + αX α8 + α5 X σ i (X) 0 1 α2 + α12 X α3 + αX + α13 X 2 α9 + α3 X 3 X6 α13 + α14 X + α9 X 2 + α7 X 3 + α8 X 4 + α3 X 5 1 + α8 X + α5 X 3 + α2 X 4 α + α13 X + α12 X 3 α7 + α8 X + α3 X 2 The error location and error value polynomials are: σ(X) = α9 + α3 X 3 = α9 (1 + α9 X 3 ) Z0 (X) = α7 + α8 X + α3 X 2 = α9 (α13 + α14 X + α9 X 2 ) From these polynomials. α8 .7.5 The syndrome polynomial is S(X) = α13 + α14 X + α9 X 2 + α7 X 3 + α8 X 4 + α3 X 5 Table P. Table P.
the syndrome polynomial is S(X) = α27 + αX + α28 X 2 + α29 X 3 + α15 X 4 + α8 X 5 Using the Euclidean algorithm. Z0 (X) = α26 X 2 + α6 X + α18 . S5 = r(α5 ) = α2 + α81 + α107 = α15 . α11 and α19 . S1 = r(α1 ) = α2 + α33 + α27 = α27 .Hence the error pattern is e(X) = α4 X 3 + α9 X 8 + α3 X 13 . and the received polynomial is decoded into the allzero codeword. we ﬁnd the error location numbers: β1 = (α0 ) 4 = α0 . r(X) = α2 + α21 X 12 + α7 X 20 . 7. S4 = r(α4 ) = α2 + α69 + α87 = α29 . we compute the syndrome.6 From the received polynomial. as shown in the following table: The roots of σ(X) are: 1 = α0 . β2 = (α11 )−1 = α20 . S2 = r(α2 ) = α2 + α45 + α47 = α. S3 = r(α3 ) = α2 + α57 + α67 = α28 . From these −1 roots. and . we ﬁnd σ(X) = α23 X 3 + α9 X + α22 . S6 = r(α6 ) = α2 + α93 + α127 = α8 . Therefore.
0) 12 )(1 + α20 ) σ (α α (1 + α −12 −Z0 (α ) α2 + α25 + α18 = = 3 = α21 . = σ (α−20 ) α (1 + α11 )(1 + α23 ) Hence. The error values at the 3 error locations are given by: e0 = e12 e20 −Z0 (α0 ) α26 + α6 + α8 = 22 = α2 . 5 . the error pattern is e(X) = α2 + α21 X 12 + α7 X 20 and the decoded codeword is v(X) = r(X) − e(X) = 0. σ (X) = α22 (1 + α12 X)(1 + α20 X) + α3 (1 + X)(1 + α20 X) + α11 (1 + X)(1 + α12 X).i 1 0 1 2 3 Z0 (X) X6 S(X) α5 X 4 + α9 X 3 + α22 X 2 + α11 X + α26 α8 X 3 + α4 X + α6 α26 X 2 + α6 X + α18 (i) qi (X) α23 X + α30 α3 X + α5 α28 X + α σ i (X) 0 1 α23 X + α30 α24 X 2 + α30 X + α10 α23 X 3 + α9 X + α22 β 3 = (α19 )−1 = α12 . −12 ) 19 )(1 + α8 ) σ (α α (1 + α −20 α17 + α17 + α18 −Z0 (α ) = 11 = α7 . Hence the error pattern is e(X) = e0 + e12 X 12 + e20 X 20 . The error location polynomial and its derivative are: σ(X) = α22 (1 + X)(1 + α12 X)(1 + α20 X).
If a(1) = 0. . Since 1 is not a root of g(X). and α−(q−1) = 1 as roots. The dual code Cd of C is generated by the reciprocal of h(X). αd−1 (also their conjugates) as roots. .11 Suppose c(X) = 2m −2 i i=0 ci X is a minimum weight code polynomial in the (2m − 1. c2m −2 ) has weight d + 1. α2 . g(1) = 0. Since these polynomials are also code polynomials in the RS code Crs . . q − 2t) RS code with minimum distance q − 2t. The polynomial h(X) has α2t+1 .9 Let g(X) be the generator polynomial of a tsymbol correcting RS code C over GF(q) with α. . α. . Consider c(1) = a(1)g(1). . . α2 . These polynomials over GF(2) form a primitive BCH code Cbch with designed distance d. where α is a primitive element of GF(q). α−(q−2) = α. . . . We know that c(X) is divisible by g(X). 2t. α2t as roots. then c∞ = −c(1) = 0 and the vector (c∞ . . αq−2t−2 . . 7. c1 . . . Consider those polynomial v(X) over GF(2) with degree 2m −2 or less that has α. hence Cbch is a subcode of Crs . . . c0 .7. k) RS code C. α−(2t+2) = αq−2t−3 . . .10 The generator polynomial grs (X) of the RS code C has α. Thus c(X) = a(X)g(X) with a(X) = 0. α2 . α2 . . Note that GF(2m ) has GF(2) as a subﬁeld. . h∗ (X) = X q−1−2t h(X −1 ). We see that h∗ (X) has α−(2t+1) = αq−2t−2 . . 6 . Hence Cd is a (q − 1. . αq−1 as roots and is called the parity polynomial. . αd−1 as roots. Next we show that a(1) is not equal to 0. . . . Since g(X) divides X q−1 − 1. . The minimum weight is increased to d + 1 provided 2m −2 c∞ = −c(1) = − i=0 ci = 0. If a(1) = 0. 7. . then X q−1 − 1 = g(X)h(X). Thus h∗ (X) has the following consecutive powers of α as roots: 1.
we need to show that no 2t or fewer columns of H1 sum to zero over GF(2m ) and there are 2t + 1 columns in H1 sum to zero. 7. Therefore the minimum distance of the extended RS code is exactly 2t + 1.13 Consider v(X) = i=0 2m −2 2m −2 k−1 a(α )X = i=0 i i ( j=0 aj αij )X i Let α be a primitive element in GF(2m ). The second and third cases lead to a (δ − 1) × (δ − 1) Vandermonde determinant. 7. we have 2m −2 k−1 v(α ) = i=0 j=0 k−1 q aj αij αiq 2m −2 = j=0 aj ( i=0 αi(j+q) ). Consequently the extended RS code has a minimum distance d + 1. Since Vandermonde determinants are nonzero. The derivations are exactly the same as we did in the book. The ﬁrst case leads to a δ × δ Vandermonde determinant. The 4th case leads to a (δ − 2) × (δ − 2) Vandermonde determinant. δ columns of H1 can not be sum to zero. However. which sum to zero. This contradicts to the hypothesis that c(X) is a minimum weight code polynomial. (2) The δ columns consist of the ﬁrst column of H1 and δ − 1 columns from H. There are 2t + 1 columns in H (they are also in H1 ). 7 .then a(X) has X − 1 as a factor and c(X) is a multiple of (X − 1)g(X) and must have a weight at least d + 1. (3) The δ columns consist of the second column of H1 and δ − 1 columns from H. (4) The δ columns consist of the ﬁrst two columns of H1 and δ − 2 columns from H. Hence the minimum distance of the extended RS code is at least 2t + 1. H generates an RS code with minimum distance exactly 2t + 1. Replacing X by αq . There are 4 case to be considered: (1) All δ columns are from the same submatrix H. Suppose there are δ columns in H1 sum to zero and δ ≤ 2t.12 To prove the minimum distance of the doubly extended RS code.
The set {v(X)} is a set of polynomial over GF(2m ) with 2m −k −1 consecutive powers of α as roots and hence it forms a (2m −1.We factor 1 + X 2 −1 as follows: 1 + X2 m −1 = (1 + X)(1 + X + X 2 + · · · + X 2 m −2 m −2 ) as roots. . for 0 ≤ j < k and 1 ≤ q ≤ 2m − k − 1. . 2m − 8 . This implies that v(αq ) = 0 Hence v(X) has α. k. . . α2 m −2)l m −2 αli = 1 + αl + α2l + · · · + α(2 i=0 = 0. 2m −2 i=0 αi(j+q) = 0 when 1 ≤ j + q ≤ 2m − 2. . α2 . α2 k) cyclic RS code over GF(2m ). . . 2m −2 has α. m −k−1 as roots. Therefore. . α2 . then for Since the polynomial 1 + X + X 2 + · · · + X 2 1 ≤ l ≤ 2m − 2.
A3 = s3 . Then the paritycheck polynomial is h(X) = GCD{1 + X 2 + X 3 . Based on the above checksum. 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 The paritycheck matrix in systematic form is 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 H= 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 .Chapter 8 8.2 The order of the perfect difference set {0. 2. 8. X 7 + 1} = 1 + X 2 + X 3 . However. A2 = s1 . we ﬁnd that the generator matrix in systematic form is 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 G = 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 . (b) Let z(X) = 1 + X 2 + X 3 . 1 . no two or three columns can sum to zero. 3} is q = 2. a type1 decoder can be implemented. the ﬁrst. hence the minimum weight of the code is at least 4. (c) The generator polynomial is g(X) = X7 + 1 = 1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 4. (a) The length of the code n = 22 + 2 + 1 = 7. 1 1 1 1 0 1 The checksums orthogonal on the highest order error digit e6 are: A1 = s0 + s2 . h(X) (d) From g(X).4 (a) Since all the columns of H are distinct and have odd weights.
the third and the 6th columns sum to zero. A3. A3. s4 = e4 + e8 + e9 + e10 .9 = s2 . s4 ) = eHT with s0 = e0 + e5 + e6 + e7 + e8 + e9 + e10 . s2 = e2 + e5 + e7 + e9 . Therefore the minimum weight. s1 . A2. s1 = e1 + e5 + e6 + e8 . (c) The checksums orthogonal on e10 are: A1.8 = s0 + s2 + s3 .8 = s1 . A2. hence the minimum distance. s3 = e3 + e6 + e7 + e10 .9 = s4 . The checksums orthogonal on e9 are: A1.10 = s3 = e3 + e6 + e7 + e10 . s2 .8 = s4 . The checksums orthogonal on e8 are: A1. 2 .the second. A2. A3. s3 .10 = s4 = e4 + e8 + e9 + e10 .10 = s0 + s1 + s2 = e0 + e1 + e2 + e5 + e10 .9 = s0 + s1 + s3 . of the code is 4. (b) The syndrome of the error vector e is s = (s0 .
A2. 35. A2.6 = s3 . A3.5 = s1 . 10.6 α∞ α0 α1 α2 α3 α4 α5 α6 α7 α8 α9 α10 α11 α12 α13 α14 u = ( 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 ) Applying the permutation Z = α3 Y + α11 to the above vector. the code is completely orthogonalizable. The checksums orthogonal on e6 are: A1. For example. 8. the binary radix2 form of 43 is 43 = 1 + 2 + 23 + 25 .7 = s2 . the 1component at the location Y = α8 is permuted to the location α3 α8 + α11 = α11 + α11 = α∞ . 2. 11. 9.7 = s0 + s1 + s4 . A2. 41. 33. 34.5 For m = 6. since there are 3 checksums orthogonal on each message bit and the minimum distance of the code is 4. 3.6 = s1 . The nonzeroproper descendants of 43 are: 1. 42. Performing this permutation to 3 . (d) Yes.5 = s0 + s3 + s4 .7 = s3 . 8. A3.5 = s2 . A3. 32. The checksums orthogonal on e5 are: A1. the component at the location αi is permute to the location α3 αi +α11 .The checksums orthogonal on e7 are: A1.6 = s0 + s2 + s4 . 40. 8.
Then π(X) = 1+X 9 +X 18 +X 27 +X 36 +X 45 +X 54 .7 For J = 9 and L = 7. we obtain the following vector α∞ α0 α1 α2 α3 α4 α5 α6 α7 α8 α9 α10 α11 α12 α13 α14 v = ( 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 ) 8. For type1 DTI code of length 63 and J = 9. As the result. α49 . X 4 π(X). α7 . remove the overall paritycheck digits of all location vectors. Then. φ11 = 1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 5 + X 6 . φ3 = 1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 . φ5 = 1 + X + X 2 + X 5 + X 6 . we can ﬁnd G(X). H(X) = φ1 (X)φ3 (X)φ5 (X)φ9 (X)φ11 (X)φ13 (X)φ27 (X). φ9 = 1 + X 2 + X 3 . the polynomial π(X) has αh as a root when h is not a multiple of 7 and 0 < h < 63. the polynomial 1 + X 9 has α0 .2) on the roots of H(X). Represent the polynomials π(X). where φ1 = 1 + X + X 6 . X 7 π(X). Therefore. X 3 π(X). Add an overall paritycheck digit and apply the afﬁne permutation. X 63 + 1 can be factor as follows: X 63 + 1 = (1 + X 9 )(1 + X 9 + X 18 + X 27 + X 36 + X 45 + X 54 ). we can ﬁnd H(X) as: H(X) = LCM{minimal polynomials φi (X) of the roots of H(X)}. From the conditions (Theorem 8. and α56 as all it roots. 4 . G(X) = (1 + X 9 )π(X) X 63 + 1 = H(X) H(X) 9 2 = (1 + X )(1 + X + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X 5 + X 6 ). and φ27 = 1 + X + X 3 . X 5 π(X). X 6 π(X). Let α be a primitive element in GF(26 ) whose minimal polynomial is φ1 (X) = 1 + X + X 6 . Y = αX + α62 . Then. α28 .the each component of the above vector. φ13 = 1 + X + X 3 + X 4 + X 6 . the generator polynomial is: g 1 (X) = = (1 + X 9 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 6 ) X 27 G(X −1 ) = 1+X 1+X (1 + X + X 2 + X 3 + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 + X 7 + X 8 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 ) (1 + X + X 2 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 6 ). Because α63 = 1. By removing one vector with odd weight. X 2 π(X). to each of these location vectors. and X 8 π(X) by 63tuple location vectors. α35 . Xπ(X). α21 . α42 . α14 .
we can ﬁnd G(X). φ3 = 1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 . and α54 as all it roots. Let α be a primitive element in GF(26 ) whose minimal polynomial is φ1 (X) = 1+X +X 6 . we can ﬁnd H(X) as: H(X) = LCM{minimal polynomials φi (X) of the roots of H(X)}. Therefore. α36 . X 1 + X 7 + X 31 + X 41 + X 42 + X 45 + X 57 + X 62 . the polynomial π(X) has αh as a root when h is not a multiple of 9 and 0 < h < 63.2) on the roots of H(X). X 23 + X 33 + X 34 + X 37 + X 49 + X 54 + X 56 + X 62 . the polynomial 1 + X 7 has α0 .8 For J = 7 and L = 9. 8. φ7 = 1 + X 3 + X 6 . G(X) = (1 + X 7 )π(X) X 63 + 1 = H(X) H(X) 7 2 = (1 + X )(1 + X + X 3 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 3 + X 4 + X 6 ) (1 + X 2 + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X 5 + X 6 ). X 2 + X 14 + X 19 + X 21 + X 27 + X 51 + X 61 + X 62 . X 63 + 1 = (1 + X 7 )(1 + X 7 + X 14 + X 21 + X 28 + X 35 + X 42 + X 49 + X 56 ) and π(X) = 1+X 7 +X 14 +X 21 +X 28 +X 35 +X 42 +X 49 +X 56 . From the conditions (Theorem 8. They are: X 11 + X 16 + X 18 + X 24 + X 48 + X 58 + X 59 + X 62 . X 9 + X 10 + X 13 + X 25 + X 30 + X 32 + X 38 + X 62 . φ5 = 1 + X + X 2 + X 5 + X 6 . 5 . X 5 + X 29 + X 39 + X 40 + X 43 + X 55 + X 60 + X 62 . and φ21 = 1 + X + X 2 . α18 . α45 . X 0 + X 3 + X 15 + X 20 + X 22 + X 28 + X 52 + X 62 . α27 . As the result. α9 . where φ1 = 1 + X + X 6 . Then. H(X) = φ1 (X)φ3 (X)φ5 (X)φ7 (X)φ21 (X). Because α63 = 1. X 4 + X 6 + X 12 + X 36 + X 46 + X 47 + X 50 + X 62 .we can obtain the polynomials orthogonal on the digit position X 62 .
8. and X 6 π(X) by 63tuple location vectors. where a1 is linearly independent of α7 and β ∈ GF (22 ). X 2 + X 10 + X 23 + X 24 + X 26 + X 28 + X 29 + X 42 + X 50 + X 62 . Y = αX + α62 . where p(X) is a primitive polynomial of degree m over GF(2). + X n−1 )/p(X). 8. . They are: X 11 + X 14 + X 32 + X 36 + X 43 + X 44 + X 45 + X 52 + X 56 + X 62 . Xπ(X). Therefore.For type1 DTI code of length 63 and J = 7. to each of these location vectors. The 1ﬂats passing through α7 can be represented by α7 + βa1 . g(X) has 1 as a root. + X n−1 does not have 1 as a root. Add an overall paritycheck digit and apply the afﬁne permutation. . By removing one vector with odd weight. X 0 + X 4 + X 7 + X 17 + X 27 + X 30 + X 34 + X 39 + X 58 + X 62 . Since p(X) and (X + 1) are relatively prime. X 3 + X 8 + X 13 + X 19 + X 31 + X 33 + X 46 + X 48 + X 60 + X 62 . the allone vector is not a codeword in a maximumlength sequence code. Since the allone vector 1 + X + X 2 + . we can obtain the polynomials orthogonal on the digit position X 62 . the generator polynomial is: g 1 (X) = X 37 G(X −1 ) 1+X (1 + X 7 )(1 + X + X 3 + X 4 + X 6 )(1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 5 + X 6 ) = 1+X (1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 6 ) = (1 + X + X 2 + X 3 + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 3 + X 4 + X 6 )(1 + X 2 + X 3 + X 5 + X 6 ) (1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 5 + X 6 )(1 + X + X 6 ). X 5 + X 21 + X 22 + X 38 + X 47 + X 49 + X 53 + X 57 + X 59 + X 62 . X 3 π(X). X 2 π(X). it is not divisible by g(X).17 There are ﬁve 1ﬂats that pass through the point α7 . X 5 π(X).9 The generator polynomial of the maximumlength sequence code of length n = 2m − 1 is g(X) = (X n + 1)/p(X) = (X + 1)(1 + X + X 2 + . . X 1 + X 6 + X 9 + X 15 + X 16 + X 35 + X 54 + X 55 + X 61 + X 62 . X 4 π(X). . Represent the polynomials π(X). They are 6 .
0. α45 . α12 . α7 . α6 . α2 . α4 . α3 . α36 } L14 = {α63 . α30 } L6 = {α63 . α21 } L2 = {α63 . α20 } 7 . α54 . 8. α62 . α4 . α15 . α61 . α51 } L13 = {α63 . α58 } L17 = {α63 . L5 = {α7 . α9 . α22 } L10 = {α63 . α52 . α39 } L3 = {α63 . α12 . α1 . α13 .ﬁve 1ﬂats passing through α7 which are: L1 = {α7 . α14 } L12 = {α63 . α13 . α17 } L7 = {α63 . α50 . α19 } L16 = {α63 . α37 } L4 = {α63 . α41 . α9 } L5 = {α63 . α8 }. α31 . α33 . α49 . α23 . L3 = {α7 . α53 } L11 = {α63 . α6 }. α48 . α47 . α11 . α24 . α32 . α35 . α42 . α5 }. α57 } L18 = {α63 . α44 . They are: L1 = {α63 . L2 = {α7 . α25 . α18 . α38 } L9 = {α63 . 1. α40 } L15 = {α63 . α46 . α60 . α11 . α26 .18 (a) There are twenty one 1ﬂats that pass through the point α63 . α8 } L8 = {α63 . α14 . α3 . L4 = {α7 . α34 . α16 . α10 . α}. α2 }. 0.
α50 . α58 . α38 . α37 . α42 . α36 . α58 . α34 } L4 = {α21 . α10 } L21 = {α63 .20 a. α15 . α50 . α13 } L9 = {α21 . {α63 + ηα}. α26 . α27 . α2 } L6 = {α21 . α8 } F2 = {1. α. α56 . α39 . α43 . α30 . α48 . α53 . α20 . α19 . α41 . α28 . α3 . α5 . α36 . α44 . α33 .19 The 1ﬂats that pass through the point α21 are: L1 = {α21 . α49 . α26 . α39 . α4 . α5 } (b) There are ﬁve 2ﬂats that intersect on the 1ﬂat. α56 . α42 . α29 . α45 . α28 } 8. α17 . α5 . α51 . α32 . α7 . α46 . They are: F1 = {1. α52 } L3 = {α21 .L19 = {α63 . α25 . α29 } L20 = {α63 . α53 . α59 . α39 . α44 . α24 . α62 . α38 } F3 = {1. α2 } F5 = {1. where η ∈ GF (22 ). α59 . α48 . α19 . α10 . α39 . α59 . α50 . α6 . α40 . α13 . α24 . α55 . α54 . α34 . α45 . α55 . α16 . α11 . α40 } F4 = {1. α31 . α16 . α43 . α0 . α62 . α55 . α6 . α23 . α35 . α54 . α46 . α3 . α22 . α31 . α4 . α9 . α60 . α15 . α57 . 8 . α50 . α51 . α41 . α28 . α56 . α32 . α61 . α17 . α37 } L2 = {α21 . α14 . α43 . α47 . α7 } L7 = {α21 . 0. α27 . α35 . α1 } L8 = {α21 . α61 . α12 . α18 . α50 . α6 . α33 . α60 . α52 . α10 . α20 . 0. α14 . α23 . α29 . α8 . α27 . α11 . α9 . α39 . α30 . α47 . α6 . α18 . α49 } 8. α6 . The radix23 expansion of 47 is expressed as follows: 47 = 7 + 5 · 23 . α25 . α21 . α22 . α39 . α57 . α12 } L5 = {α21 . α50 . α6 .
12. 4. b. 2. 8. 14.Hence. 17. 33. 40. c. 20. 6. 0≤l<3 are 1. 34. Hence. 56. 42. 24. 5. 9 . W23 (47(2) ) = W23 (62) = 6 + 7 = 13. 48. 49. 32. 28. All the positive integers h less than 63 such that 0 < max W23 (h(l) ) ≤ 23 − 1. 35. W23 (47(0) ) = W23 (47) = 7 + 5 = 12. 7. W23 (47(1) ) = W23 (31) = 7 + 3 = 10. 0≤l<3 max W23 (47(l) ) = 13. 10. 3. 21. 16. the 23 weight of 47 W23 (47) = 7 + 5 = 12.
110.1 (a) The encoder diagram is shown below. (c) The codeword corresponding to u = (11101) is given by v = u · G = (111. 011). 001.. 100. 101. 010.. 1 . .21).2 (a) The generator sequences of the convolutional encoder in Figure 11. v(0) u v( 1 ) v( 2 ) (b) The generator matrix is given by 111 101 011 111 101 011 G= 111 101 011 .Chapter 11 Convolutional Codes 11. 11. .3 on page 460 are given in (11. . .
2 (b) The generator matrix is given by G= 1111 0000 0000 0101 0110 0000 0011 0100 0011 1111 0000 0000 0101 0110 0000 0011 0100 0011 . . 1 + D + D4 + D6 . . 1 + D3 + D5 + D6 .3 (a) The generator matrix is given by G(D) = 1+D 1 + D2 1 + D + D2 . v(2) (D) 1 + D + D2 + D5 .. (c) The codeword corresponding to u = (110. v(1) (D).4 (a) The generator matrix is given by G(D) = 1+D D D 1 1+D 1 and the composite generator polynomials are g1 (D) = = and g2 (D) = = g2 (D3 ) + Dg2 (D3 ) + D2 g2 (D3 ) D + D2 + D3 . and the corresponding codeword is v(D) = v(0) (D3 ) + Dv(1) (D3 ) + D2 v(2) (D3 ) = 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D5 + D6 + D10 + D14 + D15 + D16 + D19 + D20 . 1110. . . 0111. (b) The output sequences corresponding to u(D) = 1 + D2 + D3 + D4 are V(D) = = v(0) (D). 0011). 11. 11. 101) is given by v = u · G = (1010.. 1 + D2 + D3 is v(D) = = u(1) (D3 )g1 (D) + u(2) (D3 )g2 (D) 1 + D + D3 + D4 + D6 + D10 + D13 + D14 . . (0) (1) (2) g1 (D3 ) + Dg1 (D3 ) + D2 g1 (D3 ) 1 + D2 + D3 + D4 + D5 (0) (1) (2) (b) The codeword corresponding to the set of input sequences U(D) = 1 + D + D3 . 011. 0000.
. requiring 6 delay elements. v( 0 ) u( 1 ) v( 1 ) u( 2 ) v( 2 ) . (b) The parity sequences corresponding to u = (1101) are given by v(1) (D) = = = and v(2) (D) = u(D) · g(2) (D) = (1 + D + D3 )(1 + D + D4 + D5 ) = 1 + D2 + D3 + D6 + D7 + D8 . ..6 (a) The controller canonical form encoder realization.5 (a) The generator matrix is given by 111 001 010 010 001 011 111 001 010 010 001 011 G= 111 001 010 010 001 011 . u(D) · g(1) (D) (1 + D + D3 )(1 + D2 + D3 + D5 ) 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D4 + D8 . . v(1) v(2) = (111110001) = (101100111)..3 11. 11. Hence. is shown below. .
By inspection. is shown below. u(2) u(1) v(2) v(1) v(0) 11. (b) The encoder state diagram is shown below. the inverse transfer function matrix G−1 (D) must satisfy G(D)G−1 (D) = 1 + D2 1 + D + D2 G−1 (D) = I.4 (b) The observer canonical form encoder realization. G−1 (D) = 1+D D . S1 1/11 0/01 1/10 S3 1/11 1/01 1/00 0/00 S0 1/10 S2 0/00 S5 0/10 S7 1/00 0/01 0/11 1/01 0/11 S4 0/10 S6 (c) The cycles S2 S5 S2 and S7 S7 both have zero output weight.14 (a) The GCD of the generator polynomials is 1.15 (a) The GCD of the generator polynomials is 1 + D2 and a feedforward inverse does not exist. requiring only 3 delay elements. (d) The inﬁniteweight information sequence u(D) = 1 = 1 + D2 + D4 + D6 + D8 + · · · 1 + D2 . 11. (b) Since the GCD is 1.
. 0 ··· 0 G−1 (D) = Ik 0(n−k)×k . G(D) = [Ik P(D)] = . . . . . 0 0 · · · 1 gk (D) (k) · · · gk (n−1) (D) The transfer function matrix of a feedforward inverse G−1 (D) with delay l = 0 must be such that G(D)G−1 (D) = Ik . A matrix satisfying this condition is given by = 1 0 . k.16 For a systematic (n. ν) encoder. 0 0 . the generator matrix G(D)is a k × n matrix of the form (k) (n−1) 1 0 · · · 0 g1 (D) · · · g1 (D) (k) (n−1) 0 1 · · · 0 g2 (D) · · · g2 (D) . . 0 0 ··· 0 1 ··· 0 . . . . (e) This is a catastrophic encoder realization. 0 ··· 1 . . . . . . . and hence a codeword of ﬁnite weight. . . . . . . .5 results in the output sequences v(0) (D) v(1) (D) = = u(D) 1 + D2 = 1 u(D) 1 + D + D2 + D3 = 1 + D. 0 ··· 0 . 11.
6 11. 0/000 S0 0/011 1/100 1/111 S2 0/101 0/110 1/010 S1 S3 1/001 (b) The modiﬁed state diagram is shown below. .19 (a) The encoder state diagram is shown below. X S3 X X2 X X2 S2 S0 X3 S1 X2 S0 (c) The WEF function is given by Fi ∆i A(X) = i ∆ .
one codeword of weight 9. 1− i Ci + i . and so on. 3 1−X −X 1 − X − X3 ∆ . S 1 S2 S1 S1 S3 S2 S1 S3 S3 C1 = X 3 C2 = X 4 C3 = X. Cycle 3) C1 C3 = X 4 . X. (d) The augmented state diagram is shown below. and hence ∆2 = 1. one codeword of weight 8. i X7 X 7 (1 − X) + X 8 = . ∆ = = = There are 2 forward paths: Forward path 1: Forward path 2: S0 S1 S2 S0 S0 S 1 S 3 S 2 S 0 F1 = X 7 F2 = X 8 . Finally. Forward path 2 touches all the cycles. . Therefore. A(X) = X 7 + X 8 + X 9 + 2X 10 + · · · . and hence ∆1 = 1 − X. L) = There are 3 cycles in the graph: Cycle 1: Cycle 2: Cycle 3: S1 S2 S1 S1 S3 S2 S1 S3 S3 C1 = W X 3 L2 C2 = W 2 X 4 L3 C3 = W XL.7 There are 3 cycles in the graph: Cycle 1: Cycle 2: Cycle 3: There is one pair of nontouching cycles: Cycle pair 1: (Cycle 1. the WEF is given by A(X) = Carrying out the division.j Ci Cj 1 − (X + X 3 + X 4 ) + X 4 1 − X − X 3. Only cycle 3 does not touch forward path 1. There are no more sets of nontouching cycles. (e) The IOWEF is given by Fi ∆i A(W. 2 codewords of weight 10. indicating that there is one codeword of weight 7.
X. Therefore. 1 − (W X 3 L2 + W 2 X 4 L3 + W XL) + X 4 Y 2 Z 3 1 − W XL − W X 3 L2 F1 = W X 7 L3 F2 = W 2 X 8 L4 . and hence ∆2 = 1. Only cycle 3 does not touch forward path 1. and hence Carrying out the division. A(W. one codeword of weight 8 with an information weight of 2 and length 4. indicating that there is one codeword of weight 7 with an information weight of 1 and length 3. S0 W X3L S1 S2 X2L S0 There are no more sets of nontouching cycles. . There are 2 forward paths: Forward path 1: Forward path 2: S 0 S1 S2 S0 S0 S 1 S 3 S 2 S 0 ∆1 = 1 − W XL. ∆ = 1− i Ci + i . and one codeword of weight 9 with an information weight of 3 and length 5. L) = W X 7 L3 + W 2 X 8 L4 + W 3 X 9 L5 + · · · .j Ci Cj = 1 − W X 3 L2 + W 2 X 4 L3 + W XL + W 2 X 4 L3 . X. Forward path 2 touches all the cycles. Cycle 3) C1 C3 = W 2 X 4 L3 .8 WXL S3 WXL X2L X2L WXL There is one pair of nontouching cycles: Cycle pair 1: (Cycle 1. Finally. the IOWEF is given by A(W. L) = W X 7 L3 W X 7 L3 (1 − W XL) + W 2 X 8 L4 = .
which indicates that there is one codeword of weight 4.19(c). the WEF is given by A(X)= 1−X+2X 4 −X 3 −X 2 +3X 24 +X 21 −3X 20 +32X 18 −8X 22 −X 19 −45X 16 −8X 12 −5X 17 −6X 11 +9X 15 +2X 7 +27X 14 +3X 10 −2X 9 −4X 6 +X 8 . 11. −X 4 (−1−2X 4 +X 3 +9X 20 −42X 18 +78X 16 +38X 12 +3X 17 +5X 13 +9X 11 −9X 15 −2X 7 −74X 14 −14X 10 −9X 9 +X 6 +6X 8 ) Performing the division results in A(X) = X 4 + X 5 + 2X 6 + 3X 7 + 6X 8 + 9X 9 + · · · . and the free distance of the code is therefore df ree = 7. . (b) The complete CDF is shown below. dfree =7 7 6 dmin = 5 5 d 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 (c) The minimum distance is dmin = dl l=m=2 = 5. and so on. 505506. one codeword of weight 5.9 11.20 Using state variable method described on pp. the lowest power of X in A(X).28 (a) From Problem 11. two codewords of weight 6. the WEF of the code is A(X) = X 7 + X 8 + X 9 + 2X 10 + · · · .
dfree = 6 6 5 d 4 dmin = 3 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 (c) The minimum distance is dmin = dl l=m=3 = 3. Q. 11.31 By deﬁnition. it follows that [dl ]re = df ree for all l ≥ j. it follows that lim [dl ]un → ∞. the free distance df ree is the minimum weight path that has diverged from and remerged with the allzero state. E. for a noncatastrophic encoder. any path that remains unmerged must accumulate weight. Assume that [v]j represents the shortest remerged path through the state diagram with weight free df ree . D. Letting [dl ]re be the minimum weight of all remerged paths of length l. we ﬁnd that the free distance of the code is df ree = 6. Letting [dl ]un be the minimum weight of all unmerged paths of length l. . This corresponds to the path S0 S1 S2 S4 S0 and the input sequence u = (1000).29 (a) By examining the encoder state diagram in Problem 11. (b) The complete CDF is shown below. l→∞ Therefore l→∞ lim dl = min l→∞ lim [dl ]re .15 and considering only paths that begin and end in state S0 (see page 507).10 11. lim [dl ]un l→∞ = df ree . Also.
Chapter 12 Optimum Decoding of Convolutional Codes 12.2.2) encoder in Example 11.2 ”rather than “ for the (3.1(d)”.1 (Note: The problem should read “ for the (3.2) code in Table 12.) The state diagram of the encoder is given by: 00/000 S0 01/011 00/100 00/011 00/111 10/101 01/100 01/111 S2 10/001 11/010 01/000 11/110 11/001 10/110 S1 10/010 S3 11/101 1 .2.
we can draw a trellis diagram containing h + m + 1 = 3 + 1 + 1 = 5 levels as shown below: S3 11/101 S3 11/101 S3 11 /0 10 S2 01/111 S2 11 /0 10 01/111 01 11/0 01 /1 00 S1 10/010 S1 01 11/0 /1 01 00 1 10 0/ 1 01 /1 10 S0 S0 00/000 S0 11/1 10 01/ 011 11/1 10 01/ 011 11/1 10 01/ 011 Hence. . agreeing with (11. 01.2. 111).2 From the state diagram. The path through the trellis corresponding to this codeword is shown highlighted in the ﬁgure. 001. for u = (11. 10).16) in Example 11. 00 /0 10 01 /1 10 11 00/0 01 /0 10 100 00/ 11 /1 00 00/000 00 /0 10 0110/1 11 00/0 S2 01 /0 10 100 00/ 10/010 S1 11 /1 00 11 00/0 100 1 00/ /11 00 1 10 0/ 1 S0 00/000 00/000 S0 v(0) v(1) v(2) = (1001) = (1001) = (0011) and v = (110. 000.
. The decoded sequence is shown in the ﬁgure below. 11 11 11 . 000).3 The integer metric table becomes: N −1 l=0 log P (rl vl ) also maximizes + 0 1 01 6 0 02 5 3 12 3 5 11 0 6 The received sequence is r = (11 12 01 . 11 11 02 . 010. 011. which yields a decoded information sequence of ˆ u = (11000). Since max c2 v N −1 N −1 log P (rl vl ) + N c2 c1 l=0 = c2 max v l=0 log P (rl vl ) + N c 2 c1 N −1 l=0 c2 [log P (rl vl ) if C2 is positive. 11 11 01 .3 12. 110. and the ﬁnal survivor is ˆ v = (111.2 Note that N −1 N −1 c2 [log P (rl vl ) + c1 ] l=0 = l=0 [c2 log P (rl vl ) + c2 c1 ] N −1 = c2 l=0 log P (rl vl ) + N c2 c1 . 000. 01 12 01 . any path that maximizes c1 ]. 12 02 11 . 12 01 11 ). 12. This result agrees with Example 12. 000.1.
4 22 S3 1/001 0 0/11 36 S3 1/001 0 0/11 42 S3 1/001 0 0/11 63 S3 0 0/11 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 11 S1 1 10 0/ 24 S1 1 10 0/ 1/ 10 0 32 S1 1 10 0/ 1/ 10 0 46 1/ 01 0 S1 1 10 0/ 1/ 10 0 57 S1 1 10 0/ 20 S2 1 01 0/ 40 S2 1 01 0/ 48 S2 1 01 0/ 53 S2 1 01 0/ 73 S2 1 01 0/ 1/11 1 1/11 1 1/11 1 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0 9 13 26 52 67 75 84 .
777 −0. the resulting metric table is: 01 02 03 04 14 13 12 11 −0. (b) After Viterbi decoding the ﬁnal survivor is ˆ v = (11.097 −2.097 −1.4 For the given channel transition probabilities.699 and c2 = 4.363 0 1 To construct an integer metric table.638 −2.237 −1.777 −0. 11.13(a). 01.237 −0.699 −2.363 −0. Then the integer metric table becomes: 01 02 0 10 9 1 0 3 03 8 5 04 7 6 14 6 7 13 5 8 12 3 9 11 0 10 12. This corresponds to the information sequence ˆ u = (1110). .955 −0.706 −0. choose c1 = 2.638 −1.955 −1.699 −2.5 12.28.706 −0.5 (a) Referring to the state diagram of Figure 11. the trellis diagram for an information sequence of length h = 4 is shown in the ﬁgure below. 00. 10. 00).
6 46 S7 1/10 51 S7 0/01 38 S3 0 0/1 1/ 01 20 S3 0 0/1 1/ 01 0/01 48 S3 0 0/1 1/ 10 1/ 10 19 S1 1 0/0 12 S1 1 0/0 21 S1 1 0/0 1/ 10 42 S1 1 0/0 1/0 1 40 61 S5 0 0/1 S5 0 0/1 53 S6 00 0/ 1/ 00 1/ 11 71 S6 00 0/ 66 S6 00 0/ 22 S2 1/ 00 20 S2 45 S2 79 S2 1/00 0/00 0/00 S0 0/00 S0 0/00 0/00 S0 0/00 S0 0/00 11 0/ 27 S4 11 0/ 68 11 0/ 0/00 S4 S0 11 0/ 83 11 0/ 0/00 S4 S0 11 0/ 94 11 0/ 0/00 S4 11 0/ S0 0/00 S0 0 3 16 34 49 80 98 115 .
00. . 10. This result matches the result obtained using soft decisions in Problem 12. For the received sequence r = (11. and the ﬁnal survivor is ˆ v = (11.5.909 For hard decision decoding.6 Combining the soft decision outputs yields the following transition probabilities: 0 1 0 0.909 0. 11. 01. which corresponds to the information sequence ˆ u = (1110).7 12. 10. 00). the decoding trellis is as shown in the ﬁgure below. 00). 01. 01.091 1 0.091 0. the metric is simply Hamming distance. 00. 10. 01.
8 1 S7 1/10 3 S7 0/01 0 S3 0 0/1 1/ 01 4 S3 0 0/1 1/ 01 0/01 2 S3 0 0/1 1/ 10 1/ 10 0 S1 1 0/0 3 S1 1 0/0 5 S1 1 0/0 1/ 10 4 S1 1 0/0 1/0 1 2 3 S5 0 0/1 S5 0 0/1 1 S6 00 0/ 1/ 00 1/ 11 1 S6 00 0/ 2 S6 00 0/ 2 S2 1/ 00 4 S2 4 S2 3 S2 1/00 0/00 0/00 S0 0/00 S0 0/00 0/00 S0 0/00 S0 0/00 11 0/ 4 S4 11 0/ 2 11 0/ 0/00 S4 S0 11 0/ 2 11 0/ 0/00 S4 S0 11 0/ 3 11 0/ 0/00 S4 11 0/ S0 0/00 S0 0 2 3 3 4 3 3 3 .
D. X) = + ··· ∂W (1 − 2W X − W X 3 )2 ∂A(W. P (E) < d=df ree Ad Pd < A(X)X=2√p(1−p) .21) is an upper bound on Pd for d even. A(X) = which yields (a) P (E) < 1.W =1 . X) = Hence. 12.01.29) ∞ X6 + X7 − X8 = X 6 + 3X 7 + 5X 8 + 11X 9 + 25X 10 + · · · .9 Proof: For d even. From Example 11.001. From Example 11. 1 − 2X − X 3 Pb (E) < d=df ree 1 ∂A(W. X) ∂W = W =1 and 2X 6 − X 7 − 2X 8 + X 9 + X 11 = 2X 6 + 7X 7 + 18X 8 + · · · . W X 7 + W 2 (X 6 − X 8 ) = W X 7 +W 2 X 6 + X 8 + X 10 +W 3 2X 7 + 3X 9 + 3X 11 + X 13 +· · · . (1 − 2X − X 3 )2 . X) Bd Pd < B(X)X=2√p(1−p) = k ∂W X=2 √ p(1−p).25) ∞ Q.9 12.7391 × 10−8 for p = 0.10 The event error probability is bounded by (12.2118 × 10−4 for p = 0.12.12. E. (b) P (E) < 7. A(W. Pd = 1 2 d d d/2 d e d e pd/2 (1 − p)d/2 + pe (1 − p)d−e pd/2 (1 − p)d/2 d e=(d/2) d e=(d/2)+1 d e pe (1 − p)d−e < e=(d/2) d < e=(d/2) = pd/2 (1 − p)d/2 < 2 p d d/2 d e (1 − p) d/2 and thus (12. 1 − W (2X + X 3 ) X 7 + 2W (X 6 − 3X 8 − X 10 ) − 3W 2 (2X 7 − X 9 − X 11 ) ∂A(W. The bit error probability is bounded by (12.
28 × 10−7 . 2 These expressions are plotted versus Eb /No in the ﬁgure below.30) is given by Pb (E) ≈ Bdf ree 2 From Problem 12. 1. Pb (E) ≈ (Rdf ree /2)·(Eb /No ) = 2(7/2) e− (7/6)·(Eb /No ) .001)6/2 = 6. Bdf ree = 2. (b) Pb (E) < 1. 12. expression (12. (b) For p = 0.26) P (E) ≈ Adf ree 2 p(1 − p) and the bit error probability (12.01)6/2 = 1.001.4 × 10−5 Pb (E) ≈ 2 · 26 · (0.01. 2) encoder of (12. 12.01)6/2 = 6. p(1 − p) df ree df ree ≈ Adf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 ≈ Bdf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 . P (E) ≈ 1 · 26 · (0. Thus. df ree = 6. (a) For p = 0.4 × 10−8 Pb (E) ≈ 2 · 26 · (0. P (E) ≈ 1 · 26 · (0.001.12 The (3.1) has df ree = 7 and Bdf ree = 1. Adf ree = 1.10.28 × 10−4 .01.0435 × 10−4 for p = 0.11 The event error probability is given by (12.001)6/2 = 1.10 This yields (a) Pb (E) < 3.37) remains 1 −Eb /No e .6139 × 10−7 for p = 0.36) becomes Pb (E) ≈ Bdf ree 2df ree /2 e− and (12.
11 10 2 10 0 12.36 (Coded) 12.37 (Uncoded) 10 2 10 4 10 P b(E) 10 6 8 10 10 10 12 10 14 10 16 0 5 Eb/N o (dB) 10 15 .
1 has df ree = 7 and Bdf ree = 1. The coding gain as a function of Pb (E) is plotted below. Pb (E) ≈ (7/3)·(Eb /No ) . Coded Required SNR. 2 These expressions are plotted versus Eb /No in the ﬁgure below.12 Equating the above expressions and solving for Eb /No yields 2(7/2) e− e (7/6)·(Eb /No ) = (−1/6)(Eb /No ) 1 = = 1 −Eb /No e 2 2(9/2) e−(1/6)(Eb /No ) 2−(9/2) ln(2−(9/2) ) −6 ln(2−(9/2) ) = 18. 14 12 Reguired SNR. 1. the approximate expressions for Pb (E) indicate that a positive coding gain is only achieved at very small values of Pb (E).7dB. (−1/6)(Eb /No ) = Eb /No = which is Eb /No = 12. 12. Uncoded Gain 10 8 6 E b/N o (dB) 4 2 0 2 4 6 10 10 10 9 10 8 10 7 10 6 10 P b (E ) 5 10 4 10 3 10 2 10 1 Note that in this example. 2) encoder of Problem 12. the coding threshold. Thus.13 The (3.37) remains 1 −Eb /No e .71. expression (12. a short constraint length code (ν = 2) with hard decision decoding. and the asymptatic coding gain is only 0.46) for the unquantized AWGN channel becomes Pb (E) ≈ Bdf ree e−Rdf ree Eb /No = e− and (12.72dB.
1 = e(4/3)(Eb /No ) = (4/3)(Eb /No ) = Eb /No = which is Eb /No = −2.46 (Coded) 12.84dB. But this is just an artifact of the bounds. (Note: If the slightly tighter bound on Q(x) from (1.0 dB is achieved at moderate values of Pb (E).5) is used to form the approximate expressin for Pb (E).5199.) The coding gain as a function of Pb (E) is plotted below.13 0 10 12. the coding threshold. which are not tight for small values of Eb /No . the coding threshold actually moves to −∞ dB. the approximate expressions for Pb (E) indicate that a coding gain above 3. . a short constraint length code (ν = 2) with soft decision decoding. and the asymptotic coding gain is 3.37 (Uncoded) 10 5 10 10 10 P b(E) 10 15 20 10 25 10 30 10 35 0 5 Eb/N o (dB) 10 15 Equating the above expressions and solving for Eb /No yields e−(7/3)·(Eb /No ) = 1 −Eb /No e 2 1 (4/3)(Eb /No ) e 2 2 ln(2) (3/4) ln(2) = 0.7 dB. Note that in this example.
14
14
12
Reguired SNR, Coded Required SNR, Uncoded Gain
10
8 E b/N o (dB)
6
4
2
0
2 10 10
10
9
10
8
10
7
10
6
10 P b (E )
5
10
4
10
3
10
2
10
1
15
12.14 The IOWEF function of the (3, 1, 2) encoder of (12.1) is A(W, X) = and thus (12.39b) becomes Pb (E) < B(X)X=Do = 1 ∂A(W, X) k ∂W =
X=D0 ,W =1
W X7 1 − W X − W X3
X7 (1 − W X − W X 3 )2
X=D0 ,W =1
.
For the DMC of Problem 12.4, D0 = 0.42275 and the above expression becomes Pb (E) < 9.5874 × 10−3 . If the DMC is converted to a BSC, then the resulting crossover probability is p = 0.091. Using (12.29) yields Pb (E) < B(X)X=Do = 1 ∂A(W, X) k ∂W √ = X7 (1 − W X − W X 3 )2 √ = 3.7096×10−1,
X=2
p(1−p),W =1
X=2
p(1−p),W =1
about a factor of 40 larger than the soft decision case. 12.16 For the optimum (2, 1, 7) encoder in Table 12.1(c), df ree = 10, Adf ree = 1, and Bdf ree = 2. (a) From Table 12.1(c) γ = 6.99dB. (b) Using (12.26) yields (c) Using (12.30) yields (d) For this encoder G−1 = and the ampliﬁcation factor is A = 4. For the quicklookin (2, 1, 7) encoder in Table 12.2, df ree = 9, Adf ree = 1, and Bdf ree = 1. (a) From Table 12.2 γ = 6.53dB. (b) Using (12.26) yields (c) Using (12.30) yields P (E) ≈ Adf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 = 5.12 × 10−7 . Pb (E) ≈ Bdf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 = 5.12 × 10−7 . P (E) ≈ Adf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 = 1.02 × 10−7 . Pb (E) ≈ Bdf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 = 2.04 × 10−7 . D2 1 + D+ D2
16
(d) For this encoder G−1 = and the ampliﬁcation factor is A = 2. 12.17 The generator matrix of a rate R = 1/2 systematic feedforward encoder is of the form G = 1 g(1) (D) . Letting g(1) (D) = 1 + D + D2 + D5 + D7 achieves df ree = 6 with Bdf ree = 1 and Adf ree = 1. (a) The softdecision asymptotic coding gain is γ = 4.77dB. (b) Using (12.26) yields (c) Using (12.30) yields P (E) ≈ Adf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 = 6.4 × 10−5 . Pb (E) ≈ Bdf ree 2df ree pdf ree /2 = 6.4 × 10−5 . 1 1
(d) For this encoder (and all systematic encoders) G−1 = and the ampliﬁcation factor is A = 1. 12.18 The generator polynomial for the (15, 7) BCH code is g(X) = 1 + X 4 + X 6 + X 7 + X 8 and dg = 5. The generator polynomial of the dual code is h(X) = and hence dh ≥ 4. (a) The rate R = 1/2 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = 1 + D4 + D6 + D7 + D8 has generator matrix G(D) = 1 + D2 + D3 + D4 D3 and df ree ≥ min(5, 8) = 5. (b) The rate R = 1/4 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = g(D2 ) + Dh(D2 ) = 1 + D + D8 + D9 + D12 + D13 + D14 + D15 + D16 has generator matrix G(D) = 1 + D2 + D3 + D4 1 + D2 + D3 D3 D3 and df ree ≥ min(dg + dh , 3dg , 3dh ) = min(9, 15, 12) = 9. X 15 + 1 = X7 + X6 + X4 + 1 X8 + X7 + X6 + X4 + 1 1 0
12.20 (a) The augmented state diagram is shown below. L) = There are 3 cycles in the graph: i ∆ . 18) = 13. 3dh ) = min(13. The generator polynomial of the dual code is h(X) = and hence dh ≥ 6. 3dg . 21. (b) The rate R = 1/4 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = g(D2 ) + Dh(D2 ) = 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D4 + D6 + D9 + D10 + D14 + D16 + D18 + D19 + D20 + D21 + D22 + D23 has generator matrix G(D) = 1 + D + D4 + D5 1 + D2 + D5 + D6 + D8 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D4 + D5 + D7 1 + D5 and df ree ≥ min(dg + dh . . (a) The rate R = 1/2 code with composite generator polynomial g(D) = 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D5 + D7 + D8 + D9 + D10 + D11 + D15 has generator matrix G(D) = 1 + D + D4 + D5 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D4 + D5 + D7 and df ree ≥ min(7. X.17 The generator polynomial for the (31. X 15 + 1 = X 16 + X 12 + X 11 + X 10 + X 9 + X 4 + X + 1 g(X) S0 WX 3 L X2L S1 WXL S3 WXL WXL X2L S2 X2L S0 The generating function is given by Fi ∆i A(W. 12) = 7. 16) BCH code is g(X) = 1 + X + X 2 + X 3 + X 5 + X 7 + X 8 + X 9 + X 10 + X 11 + X 15 and dg = 7.
L).18 Cycle 1: Cycle 2: Cycle 3: There is one pair of nontouching cycles: Cycle pair 1: (loop 1. L) = W X 7 L3 W X 7 L3 (1 − W XL) + W 2 X 8 L4 = 3 L2 + W 2 X 4 L3 + W XL) + W 2 X 4 L3 1 − (W X 1 − W XL − W X 3 L2 F1 = W X 7 L3 F2 = W 2 X 8 L4 . L) = = W X 3 L(1 − W XL) W X 3 L(1 − W XL) = ∆ 1 − W XL − W X 3 L2 3 2 6 3 W X L + W X L + W 3 X 7 L4 + (W 3 X 9 + W 4 X 8 ) L5 + (2 W 4 . X. Finally. X. X. L) = = A2 (W. L) are given by: A1 (W. the WEF A(W. X 10 + W 5 X 9 ) L6 + · · · W X 5 L2 W X 5 L2 (1 − W XL) + W 2 X 6 L3 = ∆ 1 − W XL − W X 3 L2 5 2 2 6 3 2 8 W X L + W X L + (W X + W 3 X 7 ) L4 + (2 W 3 X 9 + W 4 X 8 ) L5 +(W 3 X 11 + 3 W 4 X 10 + W 5 X 9 )L6 + · · · W 2 X 4 L2 W 2 X 4 L2 = ∆ 1 − W XL − W X 3 L2 2 4 2 W X L + W 3 X 5 L3 + (W 3 X 7 + W 4 X 6 ) L4 + (2 W 4 X 8 + W 5 X 7 ) L5 +(W 4 X 10 + 3 W 5 X 9 + W 6 X 8 )L6 · · · A3 (W. There are no more sets of nontouching cycles. Only cycle 3 does not touch forward path 1. L) above yields τ min = 5. X. Therefore.j Ci Cj 1 − (W X 3 L2 + W 2 X 4 L3 + W XL) + W 2 X 4 L3 . X. X. and hence and the generating WEF’s Ai (W. ∆ = = There are 2 forward paths: Forward path 1: Forward path 2: S 0 S1 S2 S0 S0 S 1 S 3 S 2 S 0 ∆1 = 1 − W XL. 1− i Ci + i . loop 3) C1 C3 = W 2 X 4 L3 . and A3 (W. and hence ∆2 = 1. X. A2 (W. L) = = (b) This code has df ree = 7. L). X. L) is given by A(W. X. so τ min is the minimum value of τ for which d(τ ) = df ree + 1 = 8. Examining the series expansions of A1 (W. S 1 S2 S1 S1 S3 S2 S1 S3 S3 C1 = W X 3 L2 C2 = W 2 X 4 L3 C3 = W XL. . Forward path 2 touches all the cycles.
L). X. τ →∞ 12. The results are shown in the three ﬁgures below.6 in the book may be used to decode the three possible 21bit subequences using the Hamming metric. Since the r used in the middle ﬁgure (b) below has the smallest Hamming distance (2) of the three subsequences. it can be seen that lim d(τ ) = τ + 3.19 (c) A table of d(τ ) and Ad(τ ) is given below. the trellis diagram of Figure 12. τ 0 1 2 3 4 5 d(τ ) 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ad(τ ) 1 1 1 1 1 1 (d) From part (c) and by looking at the series expansion of A3 (W.21 For a BSC. 3 S3 1/001 0 0/11 5 S3 1/001 0 0/11 3 S3 1/001 0 0/11 6 S3 0 0/11 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 1 S1 4 S1 3 S1 5 1/ 01 0 S1 5 S1 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1/ 10 0 2 S2 3 1/ 10 0 S2 6 1/ 10 0 1/11 1 1/11 1 1/11 1 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 1 10 0/ S2 3 S2 7 S2 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0 r 2 011 100 3 110 4 010 4 110 6 010 4 001 6 (a) . it is the most likely to be correctly synchronized.
20 2 S3 1/001 0 0/11 4 S3 1/001 0 0/11 4 S3 1/001 0 0/11 6 S3 0 0/11 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 0 S1 5 S1 1 S1 4 1/ 01 0 S1 1 S1 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1/ 10 0 1 S2 3 1/ 10 0 S2 1 1/ 10 0 1/11 1 1/11 1 1/11 1 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 1 10 0/ S2 5 S2 2 S2 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0 r 3 111 001 4 100 4 101 5 100 4 100 5 011 2 (b) .
21 2 S3 1/001 0 0/11 2 S3 1/001 0 0/11 3 S3 1/001 0 0/11 3 S3 0 0/11 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 1/ 01 0 1 S1 3 S1 5 S1 5 1/ 01 0 S1 6 S1 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1 10 0/ 1/ 10 0 3 S2 4 1/ 10 0 S2 4 1/ 10 0 1/11 1 1/11 1 1/11 1 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 1/11 1 1 10 0/ S2 6 S2 5 S2 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 1 01 0/ 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0/000 S0 0 r 2 110 011 4 001 4 011 4 001 5 000 5 111 6 (c) .
00.13a. 11. the code tree for an information sequence of length h = 4 is shown below. 10 01 01 10 11 10 00 11 01 00 10 01 00 11 11 01 10 10 11 00 01 11 00 10 11 01 00 11 00 00 00 00 00 01 11 11 11 11 00 10 00 11 11 00 00 10 11 11 00 11 10 00 01 00 00 00 11 01 11 11 11 11 00 10 00 11 11 00 00 10 11 11 00 11 10 01 00 11 1 . 11). 01. as shown below. the corresponding codeword is v = (11. 11. 01.Chapter 13 Suboptimum Decoding of Convolutional Codes 13.1 (a) Referring to the state diagram of Figure 11. (b) For u = (1001).
where i is the binary input to the channel.974 −3. 11. 11) using the stack algorithm results in the following eight steps: Step 1 1(2) 0(18) Step 2 11(6) 10(6) 0(18) Step 3 10(6) 111(14) 110(14) 0(18) Step 4 100(4) 111(14) 110(14) 0(18) 101(24) Step 5 1001(2) 111(14) 110(14) 0(18) 1000(22) 101(24) Step 6 10010(0) Step 7 100100(8) Step 8 1001000(6) ˆ ˆ The decoded sequence is v = (11.2 Proof: A binaryinput.5 [P (r = j0) + P (r = j1)] 0.434 0 1 Dividing by 0. 00. Q. For equally likely input signals. Q − 1. 00.434 results in the following integer metric table: 0 1 1 −9 −9 1 0 1 (b) Decoding r = (11. . E. 00. 01. 10. 1. 10. . P (1) = P (0) = 0. 11) and u = [1001]. 01. D. 13. 11.3 (a) Computing the Fano metric with p = 0. Qaryoutput DMC is symmetric if P (r = j0) = P (r = Q − 1 − j1) for j = 0.2 13. 01. 00) using the stack algorithm results in the following sixteen steps: .5 [P (r = Q − 1 − j0) + P (r = Q − 1 − j1)] [using (a1)] P (r = Q − 1 − j).434 −3. The output probability distribution may be computed as 1 (a1) P (r = j) = i=0 P (r = ji)P (i). 01. (c) Decoding r = (11. 01.5 and P (r = j) = = = = P (r = j0)P (0) + P (r = j1)P (1) 0. 10. . The Viterbi algorithm requires ﬁfteen steps to decode the same sequence. .974 0.045 results in the metric table: 0 1 0. 11. 00.
268 0.106 −1.314 −4.0845 P (r v ) −R P (r ) Multiplying by 3/0.106 0. 10.4 (a) Computing the Fano metric using M (r v ) = log2 with R = 1/2 and P (01 ) = P (02 ) = P (03 ) = P (04 ) = results in 0 1 01 0.6.494 P (11 ) = P (12 ) = P (13 ) = P (14 ) = 0.095 0.3 Step 1 1(2) 0(18) Step 2 11(4) 10(16) 0(18) Step 3 111(4) 110(4) 10(16) 0(18) Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 1110(2) 110(4) 11100(10) 1100(12) 1101(12) 110(4) 11100(10) 1100(12) 1101(12) 10(16) 10(16) 10(16) 1101(12) 10(16) 111000(18) 0(18) 0(18) 10(16) 111000(18) 0(16) 1111(22) 1111(22) 0(18) 0(18) 11000(20) Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 1011(12) 10110(10) 101100(18) 111000(18) 1110000(16) 111000(18) 111000(18) 111000(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 110100(18) 0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 0(18) 11000(20) 11000(20) 11000(20) 11000(20) 11000(20) 1010(32) 1010(32) 1010(32) 1010(32) 1010(32) 100(34) 100(34) 100(34) 100(34) 100(34) 1011000(36) 1011000(36) Step 9 11010(10) 10(16) 111000(18) 0(18) 11000(20) Step 10 10(16) 111000(18) 110100(18) 0(18) 11000(20) Step 11 101(14) 111000(18) 110100(18) 0(18) 11000(20) 100(34) ˆ ˆ The decoded sequence is v = (11.66 04 −0.106 yields the following integer metric table: 01 0 14 1 −167 02 12 −115 03 9 −75 04 −3 −30 14 −30 −3 13 −75 9 12 11 −115 −167 12 14 .043 −2.66 −0. 01. 01.443 11 −7.268 02 03 0.043 14 13 −1.1025 0.07 −2.07 0. This agrees with the result of Problem 12. 11. 00) and u = (1110).494 −7.218 0. 00. 13.443 0.314 12 −4.
the integer metric table is 0 1 −5 1 −5 1 0 1 . 03 01 .6 As can be seen from the solution to Problem 13. Thus.3. 00) and u = (1110). 03 02 ) using the stack algorithm results in the following thirteen steps: Step 1 1(26) 0(282) Step 2 11(52) 10(256) 0(282) Step 3 110(9) 111(106) 10(256) 0(252) Step 4 1100(70) 111(106) 1101(167) 10(256) 0(282) Step 5 111(106) 1101(167) 11000(173) 10(256) 0(282) Step 6 1110(83) 11000(173) 11000(173) 10(256) 0(282) 1111(348) Step 12 111000(247) 10(256) 0(282) 110000(348) 1111(348) 1101000(394) Step 7 1101(167) 11100(186) 11100(186) 10(256) 0(282) 1111(348) Step 13 1110000(226) Step 8 11010(143) 11000(173) 11100(186) 10(256) 0(282) 1111(348) Step 9 11000(173) 11100(186) 110100(204) 10(256) 0(282) 1111(348) Step 10 11100(186) 110100(204) 10(256) 0(282) 110000(331) 1111(348) Step 11 110100(204) 111000(247) 10(256) 0(282) 110000(331) 1111(348) ˆ ˆ The decoded sequence is v = (11.5. This agrees with the result of Problem 12. 12 02 . 10. 03 11 . the ﬁnal decoded path is not eﬀected in either case. 12 01 . 01 13 .4 (b) Decoding r = (12 11 . 01. 00. for a stacksize of 10 entries. the ﬁnal decoded path never falls below the second stack entry (part (b)) or the fourth stack entry (part(c)). 11. 13. 01.5(b).7 From Example 13. 13.
100. 101.5. 011) using the stack bucket algorithm with an interval of 5 results in the following decoding steps: Interval 1 9 to 5 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Interval 2 4 to 0 Interval 3 1 to 5 0(3) Interval 4 6 to 10 1(9) 00(6) 1(9) 1(9) Interval 5 11 to 15 01(12) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 11100(15) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 11100(15) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 11100(15) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) Interval 6 16 to 20 Interval 7 21 to 25 Step 4 11(6) 10(24) Step 5 111(3) 110(21) 10(24) 1111(18) 110(21) 10(24) 110(21) 10(24) Step 6 1110(0) Step 7 11101(3) 1111(18) Step 8 111010(6) 1111(18) 110(21) 10(24) Step 9 1110100(6) 1111(18) 110(21) 10(24) ˆ ˆ The decoded sequence is v = (111. 001. 101. 110. 010. 001. 100. 011) and u = (11101).5 (a) Decoding the received sequence r = (010. . 010. which agrees with the result of Example 13. 110.
which agrees with the result of Example 13. . 010. 001. 110. Interval 1 8 to 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Interval 2 1 to 9 0(3) 1(9) 00(6) 1(9) 1(9) Interval 3 10 to 18 Interval 4 19 to 27 01(12) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 1111(18) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 11100(15) 1111(18) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 11100(15) 1111(18) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) 11100(15) 1111(18) 000(12) 001(15) 01(12) Step 4 11(6) 10(24) Step 5 111(3) 110(21) 10(24) 110(21) 10(24) Step 6 1110(0) Step 7 11101(3) 110(21) 10(24) Step 8 111010(6) 110(21) 10(24) Step 9 1110100(9) 110(21) 10(24) ˆ ˆ The decoded sequence is v = (111. 100. 001. 101. 101. 100.6 (b) Decoding the received sequence r = (010. 110. 011) using the stack bucket algorithm with an interval of 9 results in the following decoding steps. 011) and u = (11101).5 and part (a). 010.
The number of computations in both cases is reduced compared to Examples 13. Note: The ﬁnal decoded path agrees with the results of Examples 13.7 and 13.7 and 13. 010. 100. (ii) = 10 Step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Look LFB LFB LFB LFB LFB LFNB LFNB LFNB LFB LFB LFB LFB LFB LFB MF 3 3 6 9 12 15 12 9 6 3 0 3 6 9 MB −∞ 6 3 0 Node X X 0 00 000 00 0 X 1 11 111 1110 11101 111010 1110100 Metric 0 0 3 6 9 6 3 0 9 6 3 0 3 6 9 T 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 10* 10 10 10 0 0 0 Stop * Not the ﬁrst visit. .7.8.8 (i) =5 Step 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Look LFB LFB LFB LFNB LFB LFB LFB LFB LFNB LFNB LFNB LFB LFB LFB LFB LFB LFB MF 3 3 6 9 3 6 9 12 15 12 9 6 3 0 3 6 9 MB −∞ 0 −∞ 9 3 0 Node X X 0 X X 0 00 000 00 0 X 1 11 111 1110 11101 111010 1110100 Metric 0 0 3 0 0 3 6 9 6 3 0 9 6 3 0 3 6 9 T 0 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 0 0 5 Stop ˆ ˆ The decoded sequence is v = (111. 001.8 and Problem 13. 110.7 13. 011) and u = [11101] which agrees with the result of Example 13. Therefore no tightening is done. 101.5.
.. . . ... ... .20 (a) g (1) (D) = 1 + D + D3 + D5 + D8 + D9 + D10 + D11 Therefore: H= 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ... we obtain: s0 = s1 = s2 = s3 = s4 = s5 = s6 = s7 = s8 = s9 = s10 = s11 = e0 (0) e0 e0 e0 (0) (0) +e1 (0) +e1 (0) +e1 (0) +e1 (0) +e2 (0) +e2 +e2 +e2 (0) (0) (0) +e3 (0) +e3 (0) +e3 (0) +e3 (0) +e4 (0) +e4 +e4 +e4 (0) (0) (0) +e5 (0) +e5 (0) +e5 (0) +e5 (0) (0) e0 (0) e0 (0) e0 (0) e0 +e6 (0) +e6 +e6 +e6 (0) (0) +e1 (0) +e1 (0) +e1 (0) (0) +e2 (0) +e2 (0) +e7 (0) +e7 (0) +e7 (0) +e8 (0) +e8 +e8 (0) (0) +e3 (0) (0) +e9 (0) +e9 (0) +e10 (0) +e10 (0) +e11 (0) +e0 (1) +e1 (1) +e2 (1) +e3 (1) +e4 (1) +e5 (1) +e6 (1) +e7 (1) +e8 (1) +e9 (1) +e10 (1) +e11 (1) . .... .... 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 (b) Using the parity triangle of the code.. . . . .8 13. .. .. .. . . 1 .
28 (a) Using either of the methods described in Examples 13. s3 and s5 (0) both check information error bit e2 ). .15 and 13. s1 .9 (c) The eﬀect of error bits prior to time unit given by the following equations: s s s s s s s s s s s s +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 are removed. s5 }. Thus. (c) From the parity triangle shown below. we see that the maximum number of orthogonal parity (0) checks that can be formed on e0 is 4: {s0 . we arrive at the conclusion that dmin = 7. we can see that this code is not selforthogonal (for instance. (b) From the parity triangle. this code is not completely orthogonalizable. because of (c).16. s2 + s11 . the modiﬁed syndrome bits are =e =e = =e = =e = = =e =e = = (0) (0) (0) +1 (0) +e +1 +e (0) (0) +2 (0) +e +2 +e +e (0) (0) +1 (0) +3 (0) +e +3 +e +e +e (0) +1 (0) +2 (0) +4 (0) +e +4 +e +e +e (0) +2 (0) +3 (0) +5 (0) +e +5 +e +e +e (0) +3 (0) +4 (0) +6 (0) +e +6 +e (0) (0) +e +e (0) +4 (0) +5 (0) +1 (0) (0) e +e +1 (0) (0) e +e +1 +e +e +e (0) +5 (0) +6 (0) +2 (0) +e +2 +e +e (0) +3 +e (0) +6 (1) +1 (1) +e +2 (1) +e +3 (1) +e +4 (1) +e +5 (1) +e +6 (0) (1) +e +7 +e +7 (0) (0) (1) +e +7 +e +8 +e +8 (0) (0) (1) +e +8 +e +9 +e +9 (0) (0) (0) (1) +e +7 +e +9 +e +10 +e +10 (0) (0) (0) (1) +e +8 +e +10 +e +11 +e +11 +e 13. 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 (d) So.
(b) According to Table 13. the best rate R = 1/2 nonsystematic code with df ree = 9 (actually.1.32 (a) According to Table 13.3(a).10 13.1.1.34 (a) This self orthogonal code with g (1) (D) = 1 + D2 + D7 + D13 + D16 + D17 yields the parity triangle: → → 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 → → → → 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 The orthogonal check sums on e0 are {s0 . 10 in this case) is the (2. * This generator polynomial can be found in Table 13.21) code with g (1) (D) = 1 + D11 + D13 + D16 + D17 + D19 + D20 + D21 and m(b) = 21. s16 .1(c). . (c) The best rate R = 1/2 systematic code with dmin = 9 is the (2. and m(d) = 6. there is only one rate R = 1/2 self orthogonal code with dmin = 9: the (2.35) code with g (1) (D) = 1 + D7 + D10 + D16 + D18 + D30 + D31 + D35 and m(a) = 35. s13 .1 of the ﬁrst edition of this text. s2 .1. g (1) (D) = 1 + D2 + D3 + D5 + D6 . s17 }. 13. there is only one rate R = 1/2 orthogonalizable code with dmin = 9: the (2. s7 . (d) According to Table 12.15) code with g (1) (D) = 1 + D + D3 + D5 + D7 + D8 + D11 + D13 + D14 + D15 and m(c) = 15∗ . Thus m(d) < m(c) < m(b) < m(a) .2(a).6) code with g (0) (D) = 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D6 .
s6 .37 (a) These orthogonalizable code with g (1) (D) = 1 + D6 + D7 + D9 + D10 + D11 yields the parity triangle: 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 (0) 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 The orthogonal check sums on e0 are {s0 . s7 . . s4 + s8 + s11 }. s9 . s1 + s3 + s10 .11 (b) The block diagram of the feedback majority logic decoder for this code is: (0) r 17 r (0) ˆ u + + s 17 (1) r 17 + + + + + + s MAJORITY GATE ˆ e ( 0) 13.
12 (b) The block diagram of the feedback majority logic decoder for this code is: ( 0) r 11 r ( 0) + ˆ u + (1) r 11 s 11 s + + + + + + + + MAJORITY GATE ˆ e ( 0) .
. (If T is the identity matrix. 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 . 1 + D + D2 (1) (1) (1) (K × K) Now let u = [u0 . . . . . . 1 + D2 .. Then we can write u = u T. 1 1 ..2) systematic feedbacK encoder with G(1) (D) = 1 the parity generator matrix is 1 1 1 1 1 G(1) = 1 given by 0 1 1 .Chapter 16 Turbo Coding 16.1.. .. ... .e. .. .. where T is a K × K permutation matrix with a single one in each row and column. . vK−1 ] = u G(1) is the output of encoder 1. .. Then v(1) = [v0 . For example. where G(2) is the K × K parity generator matrix for encoder 2.. for the (2. u1 .. v(1) = uG(1) is the parity sequence produced by encoder 1.. 1 (2) (2) (2) .. uK−1 ] be the (interleaved) input to encoder 2. . uK−1 ] be the input to encoder 1. u1 .1 Let u = [u0 . .... . v1 .) The output of encoder 2 is then given by v(2) = [v0 . 1 .. . where G(1) is the K × K parity generator matrix for encoder 1. . . .. then u = u. .. . i. . vK−1 ] = u G(2) = u T G(2) .. . v1 . .... . .. ..
4. C1 Codeword list: 0000000 1101000 0111001 1010001 1011010 0110010 1100011 0001011 1110100 0011100 1001101 1000101 0101110 1000110 1000111 1111111 The CWEF for C1 is given by AC1 (Z) = 1 AC1 (Z) = 2 AC1 (Z) = 3 AC1 (Z) 4 = 3Z 2 + Z 3 3Z + 3Z 2 1 + 3Z Z3 . u1 G(1) .3 Deﬁne C1 to be the (7. Thus superposition holds and the turbo encoder is linear. u1 G(1) .3) Hamming code and C2 to be the (8. u G(2) ] = [u. u2 G(1) . u1 G(1) + u2 G(2) . u G(1) . u T G(2) ] = [u1 + u2 . The encoder output 3tuple in this case is given by [u. 16.4. both of length K. u1 T G(2) + u2 T G(2) ] = [u1 . u1 T G(2) ] + [u2 . u2 T G(2) ] = y1 + y2 . u2 G(2) .4) extended Hamming code. u2 G(2) ] = [u2 . The corresponding encoder outputs in each case are given by the 3tuples [u1 .2 Now consider two input sequences u1 and u2 . u2 G(1) . u1 G(1) . u G(1) . u1 T G(2) ] = y1 and [u2 . u2 T G(2) ] = y2 . u1 G(2) ] = [u1 . Now consider the input sequence u = u1 + u2 .
23) as AP C (Z) = w AP C (Z) 1 AP C (Z) 2 AP C (Z) 3 AP C (Z) 4 The bit CWEF’s are given by P Bw C (Z) P B1 C (Z) P B2 C (Z) P B3 C (Z) AC1 (Z) ∗ AC2 (Z)/ w w K w = = = = (3Z 2 + Z 3 )(4Z 3 )/4 = 3Z 5 + Z 6 (3Z + 3Z 2 )(6Z 2 )/6 = 3Z 3 + 3Z 4 (1 + 3Z)(4Z)/4 = Z + 3Z 2 (Z 3 )(Z 4 )/1 = Z 7 = = = = w K 1 4 2 4 3 4 AP C (Z) w (3Z 5 + Z 6 ) = .25 Z 6 (3Z 3 + 3Z 4 ) = 1.75 Z 5 + .5Z 4 (Z + 3Z 2 ) = .3 C2 Codeword list: 0000 0000 11010001 01110010 10100011 10110100 01100101 11000110 00010111 11101000 00111001 10011010 10001011 01011100 10001101 10001110 11111111 The CWEF for C2 is given by AC2 (Z) = 4Z 3 1 AC2 (Z) = 6Z 2 2 AC2 (Z) = 4Z 3 AC2 (Z) = Z 4 4 The CWEF for the PCBC is given by equation (16.75Z 3 + 2.25Z 2 .5Z 3 + 1.
64Z 2 + 1.29Z 6 + 17.04Z 12 ) + W 3 (0.40Z 10 + 0. Z) = W (.64Z 10 ) + W 4 (3.90Z 7 + 0.64Z 3 + 0.57Z 5 + 14.32Z 4 + 3Z 5 + 6.90Z 3 + 2.97Z 8 + 1.24Z 2 + 0.5Z 4 ) + W 3 (.48Z 10 + 0.57Z 9 + 1.01Z 12 ) + W 3 (0.75X 5 + 2.57Z 5 + 7. Z) = W (4.43Z 6 + 3.29Z 10 ) + W 7 (0.86Z 7 + 1.04Z 12 ) + W 6 (0.86Z 3 + 3.32Z 2 + 0.57Z 3 + 1.64Z 2 + 5.32Z 8 + 3.97Z 9 + 0.48Z 3 + 2.09Z 4 + 2.14Z 7 + 3.07Z 12 ) + W 6 (0.97Z 10 .5Z 6 ) + W 2 (1.48Z 7 3.57Z 8 + 1.25Z 5 4.4 The codeword IRWEF can be found from equation (16.14Z 8 + 5. Z) and divide by w/8.61Z 8 ) + W 5 (0.56Z 4 + 0. B P C (W.14Z 5 + 29.75Z + 2.65Z 6 + 8.81Z 9 + 0.64Z 5 + 4.43Z 6 + 3Z 7 + 3.05Z 6 + 3Z 7 + 4.32Z 4 + 0.83Z 8 + 0.09Z 5 + 2.06Z 6 ) + W 2 (0.11Z 11 + 0.4 4 4 P B4 C (Z) = (Z 7 ) = Z 7 The IRWEF’s are given by AP C (W.43Z 11 + 0. Z) = W (0.27Z 11 + 0. set W = Z = X: AP C (X) = X 4 + 6X 5 + 6X 6 + X 7 + X 11 B P C (X) = .16Z + 0.14Z 4 + 15.25X 6 + .21Z 8 ) + W 5 (0.32Z + 1.75Z 5 + .003 + 0.57Z 4 + 5.75Z 7 + 0.48Z 8 + 0.29Z 3 + 5.14Z 9 + 0.14Z 3 + 14.04 + 0.42Z 6 + 3.5Z 8 ) + W 8 Z 12 To ﬁnd the bit IRWEF.07Z 6 + 5.30Z 8 + 1.43Z + 1.40Z 2 + 3.61Z 6 + .84Z 4 + 9.24Z 10 ) + W 4 (1.79Z 7 + 5. where w is the exponent of W.45Z 2 + 2.97Z 5 + 1.21Z 3 + 8.65Z 6 + 5.5Z 4 + 3Z 5 + 0.93Z 2 + 3. take each term in the expression for AP C (W.43Z + 0.07 + 0.29Z 2 + 2.49Z 4 + 2.29Z 4 + 3.25Z 2 ) + W 4 Z 7 To ﬁnd the WEF’s.57Z 7 + 1.07Z 6 + 15.82Z 6 + 2.03 + 0. Z) = W (3Z 5 + Z 6 ) + W 2 (3Z 3 + 3Z 4 ) + W 3 (Z + 3Z 2 ) + W 7 Z 7 B P C (W.38Z 5 + 0.93Z 9 + 0.61Z 4 + 8.34) as follows: AP C (W.57Z 7 + 5.93Z 10 + 0.21Z 4 + 17.86Z 5 + 6.93Z 9 + 0.43Z 7 + 14.25X 7 + X 11 16.64Z 10 + 0.75X 4 + 3.86Z 9 + 1.29Z 9 + 0.29Z 8 + 2.43Z 5 + 7.5Z 3 + 1.25Z 6 ) + W 2 (1.43Z 11 + 0.
71X 13 + 9. 4.79X 11 + 20. and the parity bits from the interleaved encoder v(2) .29X 18 + X 20 B P C (X) = 0.07X 3 + 1.39X 10 + 21.19X 11 + 10.46X 14 + 5.45X 5 + 1.63Z 7 + 3.79X 10 + 44. AP C (X) = 0.21X 9 + 66.03X 3 + 0.14X 12 + 9.71X 9 + 33. The output consists of the original input bits u.71X 12 + 5.71X 5 + 5.04X 14 + 0.14X 15 + 3X 16 + 0.94Z 8 ) + W 8 Z 12 To ﬁnd the WEF’s. Z) = [1 + W (3Z 2 + Z 3 ) + W 2 (3Z + 3Z 2 ) + W 3 (1 + 3Z) + W 4 Z 3 ]4 − 1 = W (12Z 2 + 4Z 3 ) + W 2 (12Z + 12Z 2 + 54Z 4 + 36Z 5 + 6Z 6 ) + W 3 (4 + 12Z + 108Z 3 + 144Z 4 + 36Z 5 + 108Z 6 + 108Z 7 + 36Z 8 + 4Z 9 ) + W 4 (90Z 2 + 232Z 3 + 90Z 4 + 324Z 5 + 540Z 6 + 252Z 7 + 117Z 8 + 108Z 9 + 54Z 10 + 12Z 11 + Z 12 ) + W 5 (36Z + 144Z 2 + 108Z 3 + 432Z 4 + 1188Z 5 + 780Z 6 + 468Z 7 + 648Z 8 + 432Z 9 + 120Z 10 + 12Z 11 ) + W 6 (6 + 36Z + 54Z 2 + 324Z 3 + 1296Z 4 + 1296Z 5 + 918Z 6 + 1836Z 7 + 1620Z 8 + 556Z 9 + 66Z 10 ) + W 7 (144Z 2 + 780Z 3 + 1188Z 4 + 1080Z 5 + 2808Z 6 + 3456Z 7 + 1512Z 8 + 324Z 9 + 108Z 10 + 36Z 11 + 4Z 12 ) + W 8 (36Z + 252Z 2 + 540Z 3 + 783Z 4 + 2592Z 5 + 4464Z 6 + 2592Z 7 + 783Z 8 + 540Z 9 + 252Z 10 + 36Z 11 ) + .16) constituent code is A(W. 4h) PCBC. For the h = 4repeated PCBC.29X 8 + 45.96X 18 + X 20 16.82X 13 + 5.84X 7 + 9.04X 17 + 0. k.5 W 7 (0. 3) Hamming code as the constituent code.61X 6 + 11X 7 + 22.96X 8 + 23. dmin ) = (7.96X 15 + 2.20X 16 + 0. forming an (h[2n − k]. k) = (10h. the parity bits from the noninterleaved encoder v(1) .04Z 6 + 2.07X 17 + 1.48X 4 + 1.5 Consider using an hrepeated (n.21X 6 + 3.71X 4 + 7. substitute X=W=Z into the equations for the IRWEF’s. the IRWEF of the (28. as shown below.
615Z 8 + 315.2Z 2 + 2.686Z 4 + 6.2Z 4 + 10.374Z 3 + 6. using AP C (Z) = w is the interleaver (and input) length.451Z 4 + 22.659Z 21 + 0.771Z 12 + 48.013Z 23 + 0.8Z 5 + 18Z 6 + 8.686Z 10 + 83.2Z 10 + 3.505Z 12 + 611.475Z 6 + 54.029 + 0.549Z 7 + 160.527Z 4 + 14.171Z + 0.901Z 18 + 27.057Z 8 + 61.5Z 8 + 32.029Z 18 = AP C (Z) 4 = 4.001Z 24 AP C (Z) 5 = 0.543Z 3 + 6.6Z 11 + 0.3Z 12 0.791Z 15 + 238.268Z 18 + 8.6 W 9 (4 + 36Z + 108Z 2 + 324Z 3 + 1512Z 4 + 3456Z 5 + 2808Z 6 + 1080Z 7 + 1188Z 8 + 780Z 9 + 144Z 10 ) + W 10 (66Z 2 + 556Z 3 + 1620Z 4 + 1836Z 5 + 918Z 6 + 1296Z 7 + 1296Z 8 + 324Z 9 + 54Z 10 + 36Z 11 + 6Z 12 ) + W 11 (12Z + 120Z 2 + 432Z 3 + 648Z 4 + 468Z 5 + 780Z 6 + 1188Z 7 + 432Z 8 + 108Z 9 + 144Z 10 + 36Z 11 ) + W 12 (1 + 12Z + 54Z 2 + 108Z 3 + 117Z 4 + 252Z 5 + 540Z 6 + 324Z 7 + 90Z 8 + 232Z 9 + 90Z 10 ) + W 13 (4Z 3 + 36Z 4 + 108Z 5 + 108Z 6 + 36Z 7 + 144Z 8 + 108Z 9 + 12Z 11 + 4Z 12 ) + W 14 (6Z 6 + 36Z 7 + 54Z 8 + 12Z 10 + 12Z 11 ) + W 15 (4Z 9 + 12Z 10 ) + W 16 Z 12 .4Z 3 + 1.686Z 5 + 23.385Z 10 + 579.229Z 14 + 15.138Z 22 + 0.099Z 9 + 550.771Z 9 + 99.316Z 17 + 17.363Z 11 + 551.273Z 14 + 117.831Z 13 + 151.989Z 7 + 140.802Z 13 + 540.229Z 19 + 3.155Z 20 + 0.156Z 15 + 73.389Z 12 + 216.697Z 11 + 294.429Z 15 + 3.4Z 7 + 25.088Z 16 + 158.297Z 19 + 5.736Z 6 + 112.670Z 20 + 0.459Z 8 + 194. The IRWEF’s of the (40.4Z 9 + 16.314Z 11 + 54.831Z 21 + 0.857Z 16 + 0.514Z 17 + 0.914Z 6 + 61.637Z 9 + 186.903Z 10 + 257.242Z 5 + 50.297Z 2 + 2.343Z 13 + 35.89Z 14 + 360.945Z 5 + 38.714Z 7 + 56.033Z 22 .16) PCBC are found.176Z 17 + 80. where K = hk = 16 AP C (Z) 1 AP C (Z) 2 AP C (Z) 3 = = 9Z 4 + 6Z 5 + Z 6 1.257Z 2 + 1.844Z 16 + 36. to be: K w −1 [Aw (Z)]2 .
928Z 9 + 682.374Z 21 + 0.089Z 18 + 19.391Z 10 + 1030.7 AP C (Z) 6 = 0.116Z 4 + 18.054Z 23 + 0.088Z 8 + 360.01Z 15 + 456.116Z 20 + 0.475Z 18 + 22.229Z 5 + 17.099Z 15 + 160.243Z 2 + 0.929Z 8 + 533.221Z 15 + 341.549Z 17 + 50.615Z 6 + 133.219Z 7 + 597.906Z 21 + 0.964Z 5 + 43.001Z 24 AP C (Z) 8 = 0.697Z 13 + 186.307Z 18 + 9.6Z 11 + 1269.527Z 5 + 67.803Z 16 + 255.389Z 12 + 257.242Z 19 + 6.391Z 14 + 533.964Z 19 + 5.462Z 8 + 795.355Z 17 + 43.138Z 2 + 0.025Z + 0.929Z 16 + 133.803Z 8 + 891.155Z 4 + 8.355Z 7 + 345.637Z 15 + 140.615Z 18 + 17.514Z 7 + 3.6Z 13 + 993.165Z 19 + 0.189Z 2 + 0.971Z 21 + 0.439Z 6 + 169.544Z 4 + 9.791Z 9 + 540.297Z 22 AP C (Z) 12 = 0.686Z 14 + 61.7Z 12 + 2064.004Z 24 AP C (Z) 11 = 0.505Z 12 + 579.054Z + 0.615Z 16 + 112.3Z 11 + 1702.5Z 10 + 1462.5Z 14 + 694.316Z 7 + 73.636Z 5 + 83.326Z 7 + 456.057Z 16 + 61.813Z 20 AP C (Z) 10 = 0.385Z 14 + 315.013Z + 0.176Z 7 + 238.7Z 12 + 1462.928Z 15 + 345.686Z 10 + 1130.459Z 16 + 54.268Z 6 + 36.527Z 20 + 2.686Z 14 + 891.029Z 6 + 0.771Z 15 + 56.41Z 3 + 7.59Z 11 + 1269.326Z 17 + 61.802Z 11 + 551.189Z 22 + 0.945Z 19 + 4.01Z 9 + 1874.156Z 9 + 151.451Z 20 AP C (Z) 13 = 0.05Z 5 + 61.74Z 13 + 1316.429Z 9 + 35.99Z 11 + 1702.89Z 10 + 611.219Z 20 + 0.844Z 8 + 117.439Z 18 + 18.06Z 12 + 2201.314Z 13 + 99.025Z 23 + 0.089Z 6 + 189.877Z 15 + 454.229Z 10 + 48.67Z 4 + 27.001 + 0.714Z 17 + 23.831Z 3 + 3.185Z 17 + 67.674Z 9 + 993.39Z 10 + 2201.857Z 8 + 15.901Z 6 + 158.74Z 12 + 1030.92Z 14 + 1101.74Z 12 + 1130.659Z 3 + 5.243Z 16 + 169.219Z 4 + 17.41Z 21 + 0.906Z 3 + 4.189Z 17 + 83.877Z 9 + 1316.39Z 14 + 795.736Z 18 + 14.101Z 2 + 1.914Z 18 + .971Z 3 + 5.544Z 20 AP C (Z) 7 = 1.831Z 11 + 294.343Z 11 + 54.219Z 17 + 65.59Z 13 + 682.955Z 20 + 1.297Z 5 + 80.821Z 6 + 192.462Z 16 + 192.033Z 2 + 0.165Z 5 + 65.527Z 19 + 7.74Z 11 + 2743.189Z 7 + 341.3Z 13 + 1194.903Z 14 + 194.955Z 4 + 25.273Z 10 + 216.101Z 22 AP C (Z) 9 = 0.92Z 10 + 2064.185Z 7 + 454.821Z 18 + 25.989Z 17 + 38.771Z 12 + 83.243Z 8 + 1101.363Z 13 + 550.333Z 16 + 189.243Z 22 + 0.813Z 4 + 19.307Z 6 + 255.636Z 19 + 1.001 + 0.004 + 0.221Z 9 + 1194.05Z 19 + 4.99Z 13 + 1874.674Z 15 + 597.333Z 8 + 694.
15X 21 . in the codeword.78Z 14 + 0.686Z 19 + 6.81Z 12 + 1. resulting in wH (u) = 1. So.89Z 8 + 6.22X 19 + 0.81Z 12 ) + W 4 (0.04Z 4 + 1.7 On page 791 in the text.67Z 14 + 0. Using a 4x4 rowcolumn (block) interleaver.67Z 10 + 3.4Z 17 + 18Z 18 + 10.33Z 16 ) + W 5 (0.74Z 10 + 1. These deviations from the zero state can be separated by any amount of time spent in the zero state.029Z 24 AP C (Z) 14 AP C (Z) 15 AP C (Z) 16 = 0.63X 12 + 13.15Z 8 + 12. This comes from a weight 1 input. since the remaining λ − h places are then determined by the error events.33Z 4 + 2.6 is found in the same manner as for a PCBC.93X 8 + 7. the number of ways to choose h elements from N − λ + h places gives the multiplicity of block codewords for herror events.81X 7 + 0.11X 13 + 13. if there are h error events with total length λ in a block codeword length K.04Z 6 + 8.49) for the CWEF’s: AP C (W.8 The IRWEF and WEF for the PCCC in Example 16.11X 11 + 15.3Z 12 + 3. 16.97X 10 + 12..6Z 13 + 16. Z) = W 2 (4Z 8 + 4Z 10 + Z 12 ) + W 3 (1.74Z 6 + 9.89Z 12 + 0. there are K − λ + h places where an error event can start. Since there are h events. the minimum distance of the PCBC is 5.44Z 10 + 5.07X 9 + 9.8Z 19 + 1.” Another way to look at it is that for convolutional codewords.4Z 21 + 1.4Z 15 + 25. The following combines the equations in (16.15Z 16 ) + W 6 (0.5Z 16 + 8.any multiple error event in a codeword belonging to a terminated convolutional code can be viewed as a succession of single error events separated by sequences of 0’s.95X 15 + 16.2Z 14 + 32.33X 16 + 9. or the codeword could stay in the zero state for several input zeros.257Z 22 + 0. For example. wH (v(1) ) = 2.22Z 6 + 6. as explained in the text.171Z 23 + 0. it is explained that “. we start in the zero state and end in the zero state and any multiple error event can be seen as a series of deviations from the zero state. and wH (v(2) ) = 2.92X 17 + 6X 18 + 2. 16. the codeword could have a deviation starting and another deviation ending at the same zero state.33Z 10 + 6. K − λ 0’s.2Z 22 = Z 18 + 6Z 19 + 9Z 20 = Z 24 . where wH (x) is the Hamming weight of x.37Z 8 + 9.2Z 20 + 2.543Z 21 + 0.93Z 4 + 5..44Z 12 ) + W 9 (Z 12 ) AP C (X) = 1.44Z 8 + 3.8 6. then there must be K − λ times that state 0 occurs or. Now.93Z 4 + 10.33Z 12 ) + W 7 (5.11Z 10 + 0.33X 20 + 1.59Z 8 + 4.81Z 4 + 6. Likewise the ﬁrst input bit could take the codeword out of the zero state or the last input bit could be the one to return the codeword to the zero state.686Z 20 + 1.82X 14 + 15.
9 16.9 The bit IRWEF is given by: B P C (W, Z) = W 2 (0.89Z 8 + 0.89Z 10 + 0.22Z 12 ) + W 3 (0.60Z 4 + 2.25Z 6 + 3.30Z 8 + 2.25Z 10 + 0.60Z 12 ) + W 4 (0.41Z 4 + 2.63Z 6 + 4.71Z 8 + 2.07Z 10 + 1.73Z 12 + 0.30Z 14 + 0.15Z 16 ) + W 5 (0.19Z 4 + 1.23Z 6 + 3.54Z 8 + 5.18Z 10 + 3.79Z 12 + 0.99Z 14 + 0.08Z 16 ) + W 6 (0.02Z 4 + 0.69Z 6 + 5.43Z 8 + 8.30Z 10 + 3.55Z 12 ) + W 7 (4.23Z 8 + 2.42Z 10 + 0.35Z 12 ) + W 9 Z 12
The bit WEF is given by: B P C (X) 0.60X 7 + 0.41X 8 + 2.43X 9 + 3.55X 10 + 4.53X 11 + 6.29X 12 + 5.79X 13 + 7.73X 14 10.02X 15 + 10.02X 16 + 6.20X 17 + 3.85X 18 + 1.33X 19 + 0.15X 20 + 1.08X 21
=
16.10 Redrawing the encoder block diagram and the IRWEF state diagram for the reversed generators, we see that the state diagram is essentially the same except that W and Z are switched. Thus, we can use equation (16.41) for the new IRWEF with W and Z reversed. = L3 W 2 Z 3 + L4 W 4 Z 2 + L5 (W 4 Z 3 + W 2 Z 4 ) + L6 (2W 4 Z 3 + W 4 Z 4 ) + L7 (W 2 Z 5 + 2W 4 Z 4 + W 4 Z 5 + W 6 Z 2 ) + L8 (W 4 Z 5 + 3W 4 Z 4 + 2W 4 Z 5 + 2W 6 Z 3 ) + L9 (W 2 Z 6 + 3W 4 Z 5 + 2W 4 Z 6 + W 4 Z 7 + 3W 6 Z 3 + 3W 6 Z 4 ).
A(W, Z, L)
After dropping all terms of order larger than L9 , the singleerror event enumerators are obtained as follows: A2,3 (1) A4,4 (1) A4,7 (1) A6,7
(1)
= Z3 = Z2 = 2Z 4 + Z 5 = Z2
A2,5 (1) A4,5 (1) A4,8 (1) A6,8
(1)
= Z4 = Z3 = 3Z 4 + 2Z 5 + Z 6 = 2Z 3
A2,7 (1) A4,6 (1) A4,9 (1) A6,9
(1)
= Z5 = 2Z 3 + Z 4 = 3Z 5 + 2Z 6 + Z 7 = 3Z 3 + 2Z 4
A2,9 = Z 6
(1)
The doubleerror event IRWEF is A2 (W, Z, L) = [A(W, Z, L)]2 = L6 W 4 Z 6 + 2L7 W 6 Z 5 + L8 (2W 4 Z 7 + 2W 6 Z 6 + W 8 Z 4 ) + L9 (6W 6 Z 6 + 2W 6 Z 7 + 2W 8 Z 5 ) + . . . Dropping all terms of order greater than L9 gives the doubleerror event enumerators A2, (Z): A4,6 = Z 6 (2) A6,7 = 2Z 5 (2) A8,8 = Z 4
(2) (2)
A4,8 = 2Z 7 (2) A6,8 = 2Z 6 (2) A8,9 = 2Z 5
(2)
A6,9 = 6Z 6 + 2Z 7
(2)
10 Following the same procedure, the tripleerror event IRWEF is given by A(3) (W, Z, L) = [A(W, Z, L)]3 = (3) L9 W 6 Z 9 + . . ., and the tripleerror event enumerator is given by A6,9 (Z) = Z 9 . Before ﬁnding the CWEF’s we need to calculate hmax . Notice that there are no doubleerror events of weight less than 4 and that the only tripleerror event has weight 6. Also notice that, for the terminated encoder, odd input weights don’t appear. So for weight 2, hmax = 1. For weight 4 and 8, hmax = 2. For weight 6, hmax = 3. Now we can use equations (16.37) and (16.39) to ﬁnd the CWEF’s as follows:
(1) (1) (1) (1)
A2 (Z) = = A4 (Z) = = A6 (Z) = = A8 (Z) = =
c[3, 1]A2,3 (Z) + c[5, 1]A2,5 (Z) + c[7, 1]A2,7 (Z) + c[9, 1]A2,9 (Z) 3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 5Z 4 + Z 6 (1) (1) (1) (1) (1) c[4, 1]A4,4 (Z) + c[5, 1]A4,5 (Z) + c[6, 1]A4,6 (Z) + c[7, 1]A4,7 (Z) + c[8, 1]A4,8 (Z) + c[9, 1]A4,9 (Z) + c[6, 2]A4,6 (Z) + c[8, 2]A4.8 (Z) 6Z 2 + 13Z 3 + 16Z 4 + 10Z 5 + 14Z 6 + 7Z 7 (1) (1) (1) (2) (2) c[7, 1]A6,7 (Z) + c[8, 1]A6,8 (Z) + c[9, 1]A6,9 (Z) + C[6, 2]A6,7 (Z) + c[8, 2]A6,8 (Z) + c[9, 2]A6,9 (Z) + c[9, 3]A6,9 (Z) 3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 3Z 4 + 12Z 5 + 12Z 6 + 2Z 7 + Z 9 (2) (2) c[8, 2]A8,8 (Z) + c[9, 2]A8,9 (Z) 3Z 4 + 2Z 5
(2) (3) (1) (2) (2)
A quick calculation shows that the CWEF’s include a total of 127 nonzero codewords, the correct number for an (18,7) code. The IRWEF and WEF are given by:
A(W, Z)
= W 2 (3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 5Z 4 + Z 6 ) + W 4 (6Z 2 + 13Z 3 + 16Z 4 + 10Z 5 + 14Z 6 + 7Z 7 ) + W 6 (3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 3Z 4 + 12Z 5 + 12Z 6 + 2Z 7 + Z 9 ) + W 8 (3Z 4 + 2Z 5 ) A(X) = 3X 4 + 7X 5 + 11X 6 + 13X 7 + 20X 8 + 17X 9 + 17X 10 + 20X 11 + 15Z 12 + 4X 13 + X 15
This convolutional code has minimum distance 4, one less than for the code of Example 6.6. As in the example, we must modify the concept of the uniform interleaver because we are using convolutional constituent codes. Therefore, note that for weight 2, there are 16 valid input sequences. For weight 4, there are 66. For weight 6, there are 40, and for weight 8, there are 5. For all other weights, there are no valid input sequences.
11 The CWEF’s of the (27,7) PCCC can be found as follows:
AP C (Z) 2 AP C (Z) 4
= = = = = = = =
AP C (Z) 6
AP C (Z) 8
(3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 5Z 4 + Z 6 )2 /16 0.56Z 4 + 2.62Z 5 + 4.94Z 6 + 4.37Z 7 + 1.94Z 8 + 0.87Z 9 + 0.62Z 10 + 0.06Z 12 (6Z 2 + 13Z 3 + 16Z 4 + 10Z 5 + 14Z 6 + 7Z 7 )2 /66 0.55Z 4 + 2.36Z 5 + 5.47Z 6 + 8.12Z 7 + 10.36Z 8 + 11.63Z 9 + 11.06Z 10 + 7.65Z 11 5.09Z 12 + 2.97Z 13 + 0.74Z 14 (3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 3Z 4 + 12Z 5 + 12Z 6 + 2Z 7 + Z 9 )2 /40 0.22Z 4 + 1.05Z 5 + 1.67Z 6 + 2.85Z 7 + 6.22Z 8 + 6.3Z 9 + 6.1Z 10 + 7.65Z 11 + 5.15Z 12 + 1.35Z 13 + 0.7Z 14 + 0.6Z 15 + 0.1Z 16 + 0.02Z 18 (3Z 4 + 2Z 5 )2 /5 1.8Z 8 + 2.4Z 9 + 0.8Z 10
16.11 As noted in Problem 16.10, odd input weights do not appear. For weight 2, hmax = 1 and equation (16.55) simpliﬁes to
P AP C (Z) = 2[A2 (Z)]2 and B2 C (Z) = 2 (1)
4 (1) [A (Z)]2 . K 2
For weight 4 and 8, hmax = 2, so we have AP C (Z) 4 AP C (Z) 8 = =
P 6[A4 (Z)]2 and B4 C (Z) =
24 (2) [A (Z)]2 . K 4 10080 (2) 80640 (2) P [A8 (Z)]2 and B4 C (Z) = [A8 (Z)]2 . K4 K5
(2)
For weight 6, hmax = 3, so AP C (Z) = 6
P 20[A6 (Z)]2 and B6 C (Z) = (3)
120 (3) [A6 (Z)]2 . K
Including only these terms in the approximate IRWEF’s for the PCCC gives A(W, Z) = 2W 2 [A2 (Z)]2 + 6W 4 [A4 (Z)]2 + 20W 6 [A6 (Z)]2 + 10080W 8 [A8 (Z)]2 K4
B(W, Z)
≈ 2W 2 [A2 (Z)]2 + 6W 4 [A4 (Z)]2 + 20W 6 [A6 (Z)]2 4W 2 24W 4 120W 6 80640W 8 = [A2 (Z)]2 + [A4 (Z)]2 + [A6 (Z)]2 + [A8 (Z)]2 K K K K5 4W 2 24W 4 120W 6 ≈ [A2 (Z)]2 + [A4 (Z)]2 + [A6 (Z)]2 . K K K
Z. .13 First constituent encoder: Gf f (D) = [1 + D + D2 Second constituent encoder: Gf f (D) = [1 (2) 1 + D2 ] 1 + D + D2 ] For the ﬁrst constituent encoder. . . Z) = w AC1 (X) ∗ AC2 (Z) w w K w . the IOWEF is given by AC1 (W. X. L) = W Z 3 L3 + W 2 Z 2 L4 + W 2 Z 4 L5 + . L) = W X 5 L3 + W 2 L4 (1 + L)X 6 + W 3 L5 (1 + L)2 X 7 + . . Z) ≈ 2W 2 Z 4 (3 + 7Z + 5Z 2 + Z 4 )2 + +6W 4 Z 4 (6 + 13Z + 16Z 2 + 10Z 3 + 14Z 4 + 7Z 5 )2 + 20W 6 Z 4 (3 + 7Z + 3Z 2 + 12Z 3 + 12Z 4 + 2Z 5 + Z 7 )2 (4W 2 Z 4 (3 + 7Z + 5Z 2 + Z 4 )2 + 24W 4 Z 4 (6 + 13Z + 16Z 2 + 10Z 3 + 14Z 4 + 7Z 5 )2 + 120W 6 Z 4 (3 + 7Z + 3Z 2 + 12Z 3 + 12Z 4 + 2Z 5 + Z 7 )2 )/K and the approximate WEF’s are given by: AP C (X) ≈ 18X 6 + 84X 7 + 374X 8 + 1076X 9 + 2408X 10 + 4084X 11 + 5464X 12 + 6888X 13 + 9362X 14 + 8064X 15 + 6896X 16 + 7296X 17 + 4414X 18 + 1080X 19 + 560X 20 + 480X 21 + 80X 22 + 20X 24 36X 6 /K + 168X 7 /K + 1180X 8 /K + 4024X 9 /K + 9868X 10 /K + 17960X 11 /K + 24496X 12 /K + 32112X 13 /K + 47404X 14 /K + 42336X 15 /K + 37344X 16 /K + 41424X 17 /K + 25896X 18 /K + 6480X 19 /K + 3360X 20 /K + 2880X 21 /K + 480X 22 /K + 120X 24 /K (1) B P C (X) ≈ 16.12 The approximate CWEF’s from the previous problem are: A2 (Z) A4 (Z) A6 (Z) A8 (Z) ≈ ≈ ≈ ≈ 3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 5Z 4 + Z 6 6Z 2 + 13Z 3 + 16Z 4 + 10Z 5 + 14Z 6 + 7Z 7 3Z 2 + 7Z 3 + 3Z 4 + 12Z 5 + 12Z 6 + 2Z 7 + Z 9 3Z 4 + 2Z 5 . Now we obtain the approximate IRWEF’s as: A(W. Z) ≈ B(W. and for the second one the IRWEF can be computed as AC2 (W. The eﬀect of uniform interleaving is represented by AP C (X. . .
2 6 W X 8 + KW 2 X 16 + K 2 3 24 W X + . (w − 1)! Therefore wK w AP C (W. this can be approximated as AP C (X. Z) ≈ w and P Bw C (X. w ≥ 1. X) ≈ 1≤w≤K W w! X 8w = KW X 8 + K 2 2 16 K 3 3 24 W X + W X − . we obtain AP C (X. w Hence AP C (X. 2 the average WEF’s are .. Z) ≈ w and P Bw C (X. w ≥ 1 w and A(w) (Z) = Z 3w . With further approximations. X) ≈ B P C (W.. Z) ≈ (h ) (h ) w! K (h1max +h2max −w) A(h1max ) (X)A(h2max ) (Z) w w h1max! h2max! w PC A (X. w ≥ 1. It follows that A(w) (X) = X 5w . Z) ≈ w 1≤ h1 ≤ hmax 1≤ h2 ≤ hmax c[h1 ]c[h2 ] (h1 ) Aw (X)A(h2 ) (Z). Z). since the weight 1 single error event can be repeated w times..13 and for large K... C1 and C2 . for any input weight w. w K w where Aw 1 (X) and Aw 2 (Z) are the conditional IO and IR herror event WEF’s of the nonsystematic and systematic constituent encoders.. hmax = w. K w Going directly to the large K case. respectively. Z) ≈ w! K w 5w 3w K (w+w−w) X 5w Z 3w = X Z w!w! w! K (w−1) 5w 3w X Z .
· · · . S3 . S2 .14 The encoder and augmented modiﬁed state diagram for this problem are shown below: LZ S3 L S0 (a) LW LWZ LW (b) 1+D+D 2 1+D LWZ S1 S2 LZ S0 (a) Encoder and (b) Augmented Modiﬁed State Diagram for G(D) = Note that in order to leave from and return to state S0 (i. 2 6 K 2 24 X 8 + KX 16 + X + . · · · . L4 W 2 Z 2 + 2L6 W 4 Z 3 L7 W 4 Z 2 + . · · · . terminating a K − 2 bit input sequence).. S1 . S1 . S2 . S0 } {S0 .. S2 .e.. S0 } {S0 . 16. Examination of the state diagram reveals 6 paths that contain overallinput weight W < 6 (“· · ·” means an indeﬁnite loop around S3 ): Path {S0 . Z. an even overallinput (including termination bits) weight is required. · · · . S1 .. S3 .. S1 . S1 . 1 − ZL (1 − ZL)2 Function L3 W 2 Z 3 L5 W 4 Z 4 L4 W 2 Z 2 1−ZL L6 W 4 Z 3 1−ZL L6 W 4 Z 3 1−ZL L7 W 4 Z 2 (1−ZL)2 . S2 . S3 . S1 . S3 . S2 . S0 } {S0 . S1 . L) = L3 W 2 Z 3 + L5 W 4 Z 4 + and for both W < 6 and L < 10.. S1 . S2 . · · · . S3 . S3 . S1 . S1 .. S3 . S0 } {S0 . S2 . 2 KX 8 + and the free distance of the code is 8. S3 . S2 . S3 . S2 . S0 } {S0 .14 AP C (X) = B P C (X) = K 2 16 K 3 24 X + X + . S3 . S2 . S0 } resulting in the single error event IRWEF for W < 6 of A(1) (W.
1 − ZL (1 − ZL)2 A(2) (W. up to Z 7 . Thus the single. L) = L6 W 4 Z 6 + 2 n=0 L7+n W 4 Z 5+n + (n + 1)L8+n W 4 Z 4+n n=0 . w]A(h1 ) (Z) w h2 =1 hmax h2 =1 hmax h3 =1 −2 c[h2 . Assume that a particular input sequence of weight w enters the ﬁrst encoder. K − 2) terminated multiple turbo code is given by hmax hmax AP C (Z) = w h1 =1 hmax c[h1 . by the deﬁnition of the uniform interleaver.7 (Z) = Z 2 A4. The codeword w CWEF of this (4K. Z.9 (Z) = 3Z 4 (1) Z2 = Z3 + 1−Z 5 4 K−4 Z 2+n = Z 2 + 2Z 3 + Z 4 + Z 5 + Z 6 + Z 7 + · · · + Z n + · · · n=0 K−7 K−8 2Z Z + = Z6 + 2 Z 5+n + 1−Z (1 − Z)2 n=0 5 6 7 n (n + 1)Z 4+n n=0 Z + 4Z + 6Z + 6Z + · · · + (n − 1)Z + · · · . L)]2 = L6 W 4 Z 6 + and for both W < 6 and L < 10. and the code uses the same constituent encoders. (2) (1) A4. and it is assumed that the interleavers are uniformly distributed.7+n (Z) = 2Z 5+n Z3 + Z6 + 4 (2) (1) (1) A4. Z.5 (Z) = Z 4 A4. L) = [A(1) (W.8 (Z) = 2Z 3 A4.and doubleerror event enumerators for W < 6 and L < 10 are A2.15 5 A(1) (W.2. Z. w w w w .6 (Z) = Z 6 and thus. as shown in Figure 16.8 (Z) = Z 4 (2) (1) A4.9 (Z) = 2Z 5 . w] K A(h2 ) (Z) w w −1 hmax c[h3 . contains 3 encoders. 2 1 2L7 W 4 Z 5 L8 W 4 Z 4 + . w] h3 =1 K A(h3 ) (Z) w w −1 = h1 =1 K c[h1 .6+n (Z) = 2Z 3+n A4. generating the parity weight enumerator AP C (Z). The multiple turbo code. L) = L3 W 2 Z 3 + L5 W 4 Z 4 + n=0 3 L4+n W 2 Z 2+n + 2 2 n=0 L6+n W 4 Z 3+n + (n + 1)L7+n W 4 Z 2+n n=0 .4+n (Z) = Z 2+n A4. Then. the second w and third encoders will generate any of the weights in AP C (Z) with equal probability. Z. w] c[h3 .3 (Z) = Z 3 A4. w] c[h2 . The IRWEF for double error events for W < 6 is then A(2) (W. the block size K is large. w] A(h1 ) (Z) A(h2 ) (Z) A(h3 ) (Z) . A2 (Z) = A4 (Z) = = (2) (1) (2) (1) (1) A2.
w] ≈ ≈ K . the approximate IRWEF’s for this PCCC are AP C (W. X) and B P C (X) = B P C (X.e. 120 (a) Using the above. for w < 6. With K h and K w. w] = h K −h+w K . Z) ≈ w w=2 P W w Bw C (Z). the term corresponding to h1 = h2 = h3 = hmax . X). and the WEF’s are AP C (X) = AP C (X. result in the codeword CWEF AP C (Z) ≈ w and the bit CWEF P Bw C (Z) = (w!)2 K (3hmax −2w) A(hmax ) (Z) w (hmax !)3 3 w (w!)2 (3hmax −2w−1) (hmax ) w PC Aw (Z) ≈ K Aw (Z) K (hmax !)3 5 5 3 . These h! 2 w h approximations. along with keeping only the highest power of K. i. c[h. Z) ≈ w=2 W w AP C (Z) and B P C (W. and hmax = w .. the approximate CWEF’s up to Z 14 are AP C (Z) ≈ 2 4 K A2 (Z) (1) 3 = 4 6 KZ + 24 7 KZ + 60 8 KZ + 92 9 KZ + 120 10 K Z + 2 156 11 K Z + 196 12 K Z + 240 13 K Z + 288 14 K Z + ··· + 2 n −3n−10 K Zn + · · · AP C (Z) ≈ 4 AP C (Z) 3 P B2 C (Z) 72 K2 A4 (Z) =0 AP C (Z) 2 (2) 3 ≈ 72 12 K2 Z + 864 13 K2 Z + 4752 14 K2 Z + ··· = AP C (Z) 5 = 2 K ≈ 8 6 K2 Z + 48 7 K2 Z + 120 8 K2 Z + 184 9 K2 Z + 240 10 K2 Z + 312 11 K2 Z + P B4 C (Z) = P B3 C (Z) 4 K AP C (Z) 4 =0 ≈ 392 12 + 480 Z 13 + 576 Z 14 + · · · + K2 Z K2 K2 288 12 3456 13 19008 14 + K3 Z + K3 Z + · · · K3 Z 4 n2 −3n−10 K2 Zn + · · · = P B5 C (Z) .16 where hmax is the maximum number of error events for the particular choice of w and c[h. Then. A2 (Z) (1) 3 = = Z9 + 3Z 8 3Z 7 Z6 + + 2 1−Z (1 − Z) (1 − Z)3 n2 − 3n − 10 2 Zn + · · · Z 6 + 6Z 7 + 15Z 8 + 23Z 9 + 30Z 10 + 39Z 11 + · · · + and A4 (Z) (2) 3 = = Z 18 + 6Z 17 15Z 16 20Z 15 16Z 14 6Z 13 Z 12 + + + + + 1−Z (1 − Z)2 (1 − Z)3 (1 − Z)4 (1 − Z)5 (1 − Z)6 Z 12 + 12Z 13 + 66Z 14 + 226Z 15 + 561Z 16 + 1128Z 17 + 1995Z 18 + 3258Z 19 + −21720 − 7046n + 3015n2 − 155n3 − 15n4 + n5 5028Z 20 + · · · + Zn + · · · . From the above.
unquantized output AWGN channel are shown below.N = 1000 ______ N = 10000 X=e − R Eb N0 and BER ≤ B P C (X) X=e − R Eb N0 where R = 1/4 is the code rate and Eb N0 102 103 104 105 106 107 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Eb /N0 (dB) (a) Word Error Rate . are AP C (X) ≈ and B P C (X) ≈ 4 8 24 9 60 10 92 11 120 12 156 13 196 14 X + X + X + X + X + X + X + ··· K K K K K K K 8 8 48 120 184 240 312 392 X + 2 X 9 + 2 X 10 + 2 X 11 + 2 X 12 + 2 X 13 + 2 X 14 + · · · 2 K K K K K K K (d) The union bounds on the BER and WER for K = 103 and K = 104 ...17 (b) Using the above... Z) ≈ W2 8 6 K2 Z + 48 7 K2 Z + 120 8 K2 Z + 184 9 K2 Z + 240 10 K2 Z 2 + 312 11 K2 Z + 392 12 + 480 Z 13 + 576 Z 14 + · · · + 4 K2 Z K2 K2 W 4 288 Z 12 + 3456 Z 13 + 19008 Z 14 + · · · 3 3 K K K3 n −3n−10 K2 Zn + · · · + (c) Using the above. the approximate IRWEF’s up to W 5 and Z 14 are AP C (W. the approximate WEF’s up to X 14 . The plots were created using the loose bounds WER ≤ AP C (X) is the SNR. Z) ≈ W2 4 6 KZ + 24 7 KZ + 60 8 KZ + 92 9 KZ + 120 10 K Z + 2 156 11 K Z + 196 12 + K Z 4 72 12 W K2 Z + 240 13 + K Z 864 13 + K2 Z 288 14 + ··· + K Z 4752 14 + ··· K2 Z 2 n −3n−10 K Zn + · · · + and B P C (W. assuming a binary input. 101 . neglecting any higher power of K terms.
18
104      N = 1000 ______ N = 10000
105 106 107
108 109
1010 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Eb /N0 (dB) (b) Bit Error Rate
16.15 (a) 1
1 1+D
i. Weight 2 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D. Corresponding parity weight = 1. In a PCCC (rate 1/3) we therefore have (assuming a similar input after interleaving): Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 1 + 1 = 2; Total weight = 4. ii. Weight 3 For this encoder a weight 3 input does not terminate the encoder and hence is not possible. (b) 1
1+D 2 1+D+D 2
i. Weight 2 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D3 . Corresponding parity weight = 4. In a PCCC we therefore have: Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 10. ii. Weight 3 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D + D2 . Corresponding parity weight = 2. In a PCCC we therefore have: Information weight = 3; Parity weight = 2 + 2 = 4; Total weight = 7. (c) 1
1+D 2 +D 3 1+D+D 3
i. Weight 2 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D7 . Corresponding parity weight = 6. In a PCCC we therefore have: Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 6 + 6 = 12; Total weight = 14.
19 ii. Weight 3 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D + D3 . Corresponding parity weight = 4. In a PCCC we therefore have: Information weight = 3; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 11. (d) 1
1+D+D 2 +D 4 1+D 3 +D 4
i. Weight 2 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D15 . Corresponding parity weight = 10. In a PCCC we therefore have: Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 10 + 10 = 20; Total weight = 22. ii. Weight 3 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D3 + D4 . Corresponding parity weight = 4. In a PCCC we therefore have: Information weight = 3; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 11. (e) 1
1+D 4 1+D+D 2 +D 3 +D 4
i. Weight 2 Minimum parity weight generating information sequence = 1 + D5 . Corresponding parity weight = 4. In a PCCC we therefore have: Information weight = 2; Parity weight = 4 + 4 = 8; Total weight = 10. ii. Weight 3 For this encoder a weight 3 input does not terminate the encoder and hence is not possible. In all cases the input weight two sequence gives the free distance codeword for large K. 16.16 For a systematic feedforward encoder, for input weight w, the single error event for input weight 1 can occur w times. Therefore hmax , the largest number of error events associated with a weight w input sequence, is equal to w. That is, the maximum number of error events produced by a weight w input sequence occurs by repeating the single error event for input weight 1 w times. Thus, A(w) (Z) = [A1 (Z)]w . w This is not true for feedback encoders. Feedback encoders require at least a weight 2 input sequence to terminate. Thus, for an input sequence of weight 2w, hmax = w, i.e., we have a maximum of w error events. This occurs when an error event caused by a weight 2 input sequence is repeated w times (for a total input weight of 2w). Therefore A2w (w) (Z) = [AZ (1) (Z)]w .
(1)
20
u
v(())
m0
m1
m2
m
1
V(1) V(2)
V(n1)
16.19 An (n, 1, v) systematic feedback encoder can be realized by the following diagram: In the ﬁgure, the dashed lines indicate potential connections that depend on the encoder realization. It can be seen from the encoder structure that the register contents are updated as mi,t = mi−1,t−1 and
v−2
, i = 1, 2, . . . , v − 1
m0,t = mv−1,t−1 + ut +
i=0
ai mi,t−1 ,
where t is the time index, ut represents the input bit at time t, and the coeﬃcients ai depend on the particular encoder realization. When the encoder is in state S2v−1 = (0 0 . . . 1) at time t − 1, it follows from the given relations that mi,t = mi−1,t−1 = 0, and
v−2
i = 1, 2, . . . , v − 1
m0,t = mv−1,t−1 + ut +
i=0
ai mi,t−1 = 1 + ut .
Thus if the input bit ut = 1, the ﬁrst memory position at time t is also 0, and the encoder is in the allzero state. 16.20 For the primitive encoder D with Gp (D) = 1 sequence is
D 4 +D 2 +D+1 D 4 +D 3 +1
, the shortest terminating weight 2 input
u(D) = 1 + D2
4
−1
= 1 + D15 ,
Thus Zmin = 4 and def f = 2 + 2Zmin = 10. Thus Zmin = 10 and def f = 2 + 2 Zmin = 2 + 2 × 10 = 22. which generates the parity sequence v(D) = (D + 1)(D4 + 1) = 1 + D + D4 + D5 .21 which generates the parity sequence v(D) = (1 + D3 + D4 + D6 + D8 + D9 + D10 + D11 )(D4 + D2 + D + 1) = 1 + D + D2 + D3 + D4 + D8 + D11 + D12 + D14 + D15 . . the shortest terminating weight 2 input sequence is u(D) = 1 + D . For the nonprimitive encoder E with Gnp (D) = 1 5 D 4 +1 D 4 +D 3 +D 2 +D+1 .
Therefore. then no burst of length l + d or less can be a codeword. then z must be in the same coset as y. Gate 1 Buffer Register Gate 2 + Gate 3 + Gate 4 . k) code C is designed to correct all the bursts of length l or less and simultaneously to detect all the bursts of length d or less with d ≥ l.2 that n − k ≥ l + d. y must be a coset leader in a standard array for the code. Since the code is designed to correct all the bursts of length l or less.2 An errortrapping decoder is shown in Figure P20. We can decompose this burst x into two bursts y and z such that: (1) x = y + z. then y will be taken as the error burst for correction..2. The decoding operation is given below: 1 .. In this case. Test All 0’s l stages Figure P20. 20. As a results.Chapter 20 20. z has the same syndrome as y.. This will result in an incorrect decoding and hence the decoder will fail to detect z which contradicts to the fact that the code is designed to correct all the bursts of lengths l or less and simultaneously to detect all the bursts of length d or less with d ≥ l.2 An errortrapping decoder. Then it follows from Theorem 20. if z occurs as an error burst during the transmission of a codeword in C. Suppose there is a burst x of length l + d or less that is a codeword in C. (2) the length of y is l or less and the length of z is d or less.. a burst of length l + d or less can not be a codeword.1 If an (n. Since y + z = x is codeword. Syndrome Register .
X n−1 of r(X). the rest information digits are read out and corrected by the error digit shifted out from the syndrome register. the error burst is conﬁned to positions X n−i . In this event. the i rightmost digits in the syndrome register match the errors at the positions X n−i . Gate 2 is activated and the k errorfree information digits in the buffer are shifted out to the data sink. The received polynomial r(x) is shifted into the buffer and syndrome registers simultaneously with Gates 1 and 3 turned on and all the other gates turned off. X 0 . In this event. the error burst is conﬁned to positions X n−i−1−l . a clock starts to count from (n − l + i + 1). the error burst is conﬁned to the positions X n−l . X n−l . the k received information digits in the buffer are error free. At this instant. X n−1 . If the n − k − l leftmost stages of the syndrome register contains all zeros after ith shift 0 < i ≤ 2k − n (Assume 2k − n ≥ 0. Gate 2 is ﬁrst activated and the i high position information digits are shifted out. . The error correction begins. . X l−i−1 . The received information digits are read out of the buffer register and connected by the error digits shifted out from the syndrome register. the l − i digits contained in the l − i rightmost stages of the syndrome register match the errors at the paritycheck positions of r(X). The syndrome register is then shifted with Gate 3 turned off. there are three cases to be considered. Step 4. Gate 2 and Gate 4 are activated. the contents of the syndrome form the syndrome S (n−k) (x) of r (n−k) (x). . If the n − k − l leftmost stages of the syndrome register contains all zeros after the ith shift k ≤ i ≤ n − l. Xn − 1. . . and the i digits contained int the next i stages of the syndrome register match the errors at the positions X n−i . Step 2. . The received information digits are read out of the buffer register and corrected by the error digits shifted out from 2 . If n − k − l leftmost stages of the syndrome register does not contain all zeros. Step 3. its l rightmost stages contain the bursterror pattern. . . otherwise. In this event. Then Gate 4 is activated... . As soon as the clock has counted up to n. If the n − k − l leftmost stages of the syndrome register contain all zeros. no this step). Gate 4 and Gate 2 are then activated. go to step 3.Step 1.. X n−1 of r(X). if the n−k−l leftmost stages of the syndrome register contains all zeros after (n−l+i)th shift 0 < i < l.. . . The syndrome register starts to shift with Gate 3 on. . . the errors of the burst e(x) are conﬁned to the paritycheck positions of r(x). . As soon as its n − k − l leftmost stages contain only zeros. Step 6. .. Step 5. As soon as the entire r(x) has been shifted into the syndrome register. X n−i−1 .
the code is a (105.4 A decoder for the (105. 94) Fire code. Gate 2 1 X X4 X7 X8 X11 + + + + + Test for all 0’s Gate 3 Buffer Register Gate 1 Gate 4 + Output Input r(x) Figure P20. 15) = 105. Hence g(X) = (X 7 + 1)(1 + X + X 4 ) = 1 + X + X 4 + X 7 + X 8 + X 11 . l = 4. If the n − k − l stages of the syndrome never contain all zeros after all the steps above. 3 . Hence the length of the code is n = LCM (7. 94) Fire code. an uncorrectable burst of errors has been detected. Since the degree of the generator polynomial of the code is 11 which is the number of parity check digits of the code.4 The generator polynomial of the desired Fire code is g(X) = (X 2l−1 + 1)p(X) Since the code is designed to correct all the bursts of length 4 or less.the syndrome register. its period ρ is 24 − 1 = 15.4. The decoder of this code is shown in Figure P20. 20. Since p(X) is a primitive polynomial of degree 4.
. A decoder for this code can be implemented with a deinterleaver and the decoder for the (15.6.5 The highspeed decoder for the (105. Error Pattern Register + Comparator test for a match Test for all 0’s + + Error Location Register Buffer Register Counter 1 Computation for nq Counter 2 r(X) Input Figure P20. Then each row of the array is decoded based on the base (15. l 20. This results in a (255.6 We choose the second code given in Table 20.7 A codeword in the interleaved code Cλ is obtained by interleaving l codewords from the (n. v 2 (X). k) l base code C. 94) Fire code. . 9) code.5 A highspeed decoder for the (105. 153) cyclic code that is capable of correcting any single burst of length 51 or less and has bursterrorcorrecting efﬁciency z = 1. 153) bursterrorcorrecting code designed above. . Then the codeword in Cλ 4 . 9) code and capable of correcting any burst of length 3 or less. 20. Suppose we interleave this code by a degree λ = 17. 94) Fire code designed in Problem 20.20. v l (X) be l codewords in C. 9) code as shown in Figure P20. The bursterrorcorrecting efﬁciency z = 1. Let v 1 (X). First the received sequence is deinterleaved and arranged as a 17 × 15 array. The generator of this code is g (X) = g(X 17 ) = 1 + X 51 + X 68 + X 85 + X 102 .4 is shown in Figure P20.5. Deinterleaver Buffer Decoder C Figure P20. . The generator polynomial of this code is g(X) = 1 + X 3 + X 4 + X 5 + X 6 .6 A decoder for the (255.3 which is a (15.
v i (X l ) is divisible by g(X l ). respectively. Since g(X l ) is a factor of X ln + 1. Assume mj ≥ mi. . and B(X) = 1 + b1 X + . 20. and X mi and X m + 1 are relatively prime. + al1 −2 X l1 −2 + X l1 −1 . then mj − mi = qm and V(X) = X mi (A(X) + B(X)) + X mi B(X)(X qm + 1). + bl2 −2 X l2 −2 + X l2 −1 . . Hence A(X) + B(X) is not divisible by X m + 1. 0 ≤ j ≤ σ). The degree of g(X l ) is (n − k)l. g(X l ) generates a (ln. V(X) must be divisible by X m − 1. . A(X) + B(X) must be divisible by X m + 1. Therefore v(X) is divisible by g(X l ). For V(X) to be divisible by X m + 1. lk) cyclic code. Then V(X) = X mi A(X) + X mj B(X) must be a code polynomial and divisible by the generator polynomial g(X) = (X m + 1)p(X). .. V(X) = X mi B(X)(X qm + 1).e. Suppose X mi A(X) and X mj B(X) are in the same coset. + X l−1 v l (X l ). Since V(X) and X mi B(X)(X qm + 1) are divisible by X m + 1. However both degrees l1 and l2 of A(X) and B(X) are less than m. . 5 . Therefore. Since v i (X) is divisible by g(X) for 1 ≤ i ≤ l.8 In order to show that the Burton code is capable of correcting all phased bursts conﬁned to a single subblock of m digits. it is necessary and sufﬁcient to prove that no two such bursts are in the same coset of a standard array for the code. where A(X) = 1 + a1 X + . .obtained by interleaving these l codewords in C in polynomial form is v(X) = v 1 (X l ) + Xv 2 (X l ) + X 2 v 3 (X l ) + . the degree of A(X) + B(X) is less than m. Note that X qm + 1 is divisible by X m + 1. Let X mi A(X) and X mj B(X) be the polynomial representations of two bursts of length l1 and l2 with l1 ≤ m and l2 ≤ m conﬁned to ith and jth subblocks (0 ≤ i ≤ σ. Since X m − 1 is a factor of the generator g(X). A(X) = B(X). i. A(X) and B(X) must be identical.
z ≥ z. since q = j − i is less than σ. This is not possible.10 From Table 9. λk = 6 × 153 = 918. The length of the code is n = LCM (31. Consequently.9 is a (930. 5) = 155. we obtain a (930. 6 .9 Choose p(X) = 1 + X 2 + X 5 which is a primitive polynomial with period ρ = 25 − 1 = 31.3. 20. then λn = 6 × 164 = 984. and λl = 6 × 4 = 24. This code is capable of correcting any burst of length 5 × 5 + 1 = 26 or less. 2λm 60 15 Therefore. 918) code is z= 48 8 2λl = = . If it is interleaved to degree λ = 6. Therefore V(X) can not be a code polynomial and the bursts X mi A(X) and X mi B(X) can not be in the same coset. 153) has burstcorrectingcapability l = 4.Since the degree of B(X) is less than m. 20. 918) code with bursterrorcorrecting capability 24. 870) code with bursterrorcorrecting capability 26. 870) code C 6 generated by g(X 6 ) = 1 + X 12 + X 42 + X 60 . Since V(X) is assumed to be a code polynomial. Then generator polynomial of the Burton code C with m = 5 is g(X) = (X m + 1)p(X) = 1 + X 2 + X 7 + X 10 . Hence the code is a (155. The interleaved Burton code of Problem 20. The interleaved code is a (984. B(X) and p(X) must be relatively prime. If the code is interleaved to a degree λ = 6. X qm + 1 must be divisible by both p(X) and X m − 1. The interleaved Burton code is more powerful and efﬁcient.9 is z = 52 13 2[(λ − 1)m + 1] = = . code (164. The bursterrorcorrecting efﬁciency of the (984. 145) code that is capable of correcting any phased burst conﬁned to a single subblock of 5 digits. Also X mi and p(X) are relatively prime. λn − λk 984 − 918 11 The efﬁciency of the interleave Burton code of Problem 20. This implies that X qm + 1 is divisible by (X m + 1)p(X) and qm must be a multiple of n = σm. all the phased bursts conﬁned to a single subblock of m digits are in different cosets of a standard array for the Burton code generated by (X m + 1)p(X) and they are correctable.
Interleaving this code to a degree 7. 79) code.20. 15) RS code is capable of correcting 8 or fewer random symbol errors.13 Gate 2 1 x x3 x4 x5 x7 x8 x8 x11 x Test for all 0’s Gate 3 Buffer Register Gate 1 Gate 4 Output Figure P20. In decoding. Since the (31. we obtain a (155. we obtain a (105. 20. 20. 20. 15) RS code over GF(25 ) is replaced by its corresponding 5bit byte. If it is shortened by deleting the 15 highorder message digits. Each row of the array is decoded based on the (15.14 Let α be a primitive element of the Galois ﬁeld GF(26 ).11 The (15. we obtain a remainder ρ(X) = X 10 +X 8 +X 5 +X 3 +X. 15) RS code. 7) BCH code.13 From Problem 20.4. each of length 7 or less. Of course. 75) binary code. 49) cyclic code that is capable of correcting any combination of two random bursts. or (2) correcting any combination random bursts that result in 8 or fewer random symbol errors for the (31. the generator polynomial g(X) = 1 + X + X 4 + X 7 + X 8 + X 11 generates a (105. 94) shortened Fire code is shown in Figure P20. it becomes a (90. The order of α is 26 − 1 = 63 and the minimal polynomial of α is Φ(X) = 1 + X + X 6 . 7 . 75) code is capable of correcting: (1) any single burst of length (8 − 1) × 5 + 1 = 36 or less. Then a decoder for the (105. it is capable of correcting any single burst of length 14 or less. 94) Fire code. a received sequence is deinterleaved and arranged into a 7 × 15 array. 7) BCH code has random errorcorrecting capability 2. Dividing X n−k+15 = X 26 by g(X). the binary (155.13 A decoder for the (90.12 If each symbol of the (31. 79) Fire code.
g(X) generates a (63.4. The least common multiple of g 1 (X) and g 2 (X) is g(X) = (1 + X 7 )(1 + X + X 6 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 ).Since 63 = 7 × 9. 44) cyclic code which is a modiﬁed Fire code and is capable of correcting any single error burst of length 4 or less as well as any combination of two or fewer random errors. The code generated by the polynomial g 1 (X) = (X 7 + 1)(1 + X + X 6 ) is a Fire code of length 63 which is capable of correcting any single error burst of length 4 or less. we can factor X 63 + 1 as follows: X 63 + 1 = (X 7 + 1)(1 + X 7 + X 14 + X 21 + X 28 + X 35 + X 42 + X 49 + X 56 ). 8 . From Table 6. we ﬁnd that g 2 (X) = (1 + X + X 6 )(1 + X + X 2 + X 4 + X 6 ). Hence. Let g 2 (X) be the generator polynomial of the doubleerrorcorrecting BCH code of length 63.